Bucaniers of America the second volume : containing the dangerous voyage and bold attempts of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others, performed upon the coasts of the South Sea, for the space of two years, &c. : from the original journal of the said voyage
Ringrose, Basil, d. 1686., Exquemelin, A. O. (Alexandre Olivier). Americaenische zee-roovers. English.
Page  [unnumbered]Page  [unnumbered]

BUCANIERS OF AMERICA.

The Second Volume.

CONTAINING The Dangerous Voyage and Bold Attempts of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others; performed upon the Coasts of the South Sea, for the space of two years, &c.

From the Original Journal of the said Voyage.

WRITTEN By Mr. BASIL RINGROSE, Gent. Who was all along present at those Transactions.

LONDON: Printed for William Crooke, at the Sign of the Green Dragon without Temple-bar. 1685.

Page  [unnumbered]Page  [unnumbered]

THE PREFACE TO THE READER.

THE general Applause wherewith the History of the Bucaniers hath been rececived, could have no o∣ther effects, than easily to perswade the Pulisher of that Piece, to undertake the Second Volume thereof. Especially conside∣ring that the same points which deserved the Credit and Commendation of the first, did seem to subsist for the like esteem and reception of the second. These were the fidelity of the Rela∣tions both here and there published, the Authors having been not onely Eye-witnesses, but also Actors in the transactions they report: the candor and sincerity of the Stile; the variety and plea∣santness of these Voyages, the greatness of the Attempts here related, the unparallel'd, and undaunted Courage of the Bucaniers, the Page  [unnumbered] strangeness of their performances, the novelty of their Exploits; and withal, the glory and gran∣deur of Valour, which here is seen to be inherent to our English Nation, and as pregnant of great Actions in the present, as in the former Ages. Unto which points may be added, in this Second Volume, for its recommendation, the grand discovery of a new passage into the South-Sea, beyond the Streights of Ferdinando de Ma∣gallanes and le Maire, through an open and in no-wise dangerous Ocean, without those for∣midable perils both from Rocks, Currents, and Shoals, which hitherto have rendred the two passages aforementioned, altogether unaccessible to Trading; a Navigation performed by Captain Sharp and his Companions, many degrees beyond what Sir Francis Drake, Ja∣cob le Maire, Noord, or Magallanes himself, who first Circumnavigated the World, ever rea∣ched unto in their Sailings. This Discovery alone, as hugely beneficial to Mankind, so may it seem sufficient of it self to recommend this present piece unto the publick, even as extremely necessary to all such as Navigate the Ocean; and no less delightful unto those per∣sons whose Studys are directed to the search of Nature, to the Arts of Mathematick or Na∣vigation. Besides which point, both of Art, Curiosity, and Usefulness, we have given unto Page  [unnumbered] us here, by Mr. Ringrose, an exact account of many places in the South Sea; the very Draughts and Maps of many Ports, Islands, Bays, Gulfs, Points, and Coasts, hitherto un∣known to the greatest part of Europe; their appearance at Sea; their soundings, landings, and bearings; together with what variety of Winds and Weather, of Currents and Calms, and other Observations the Bucaniers experi∣mented in those parts. All which things, as they manifest unto us the inquisitiveness of the Author, so ought we highly to applaud his Cu∣riosity and Genius, who all along the course of this Voyage, not onely fought with his Sword in the most desperate Engagements and Bat∣tels of the Bucaniers against the Spaniards, but with his Pen gave us a true account of those Transactions; and with his Pensil hath delinea∣ted unto us the very Scenes of those Trage∣dies. Thus we find him totally employed towards our information and instruction at home, while he endured the greatest fatigues and hardship abroad: at the same time making Quadrants at Sea, that others sate idle and mur∣muring upon the Decks; at the same time ship∣wrackt, and almost naked, and starving upon a desart Island, and yet describing, even more exactly than the Spaniards themselves, the Gulf of Ballona, otherwise called of San Mi∣guel,Page  [unnumbered] where he was cast away. These things, I say, as they are not undeserving of the high∣est praise and commendation in this ingenious Gentleman Mr. Ringrose their Author, so shall the Curioso's of Nature and Posterity it self be his eternal debtors for their acquain∣tance with these writings.

Some imperfect account of these transacti∣ons, both short and in many things defective, I gave the last year unto the publick, at the end of the second Impression of the History of the Bucaniers. But such as that Relation was, I had no better then to give; neither had I then seen the present Journal of Mr. Ringrose; and that same account being received from the hands of some of the Bucaniers themselves at Wapping, it was esteemed fit, both by me and others, to be published at that time. But as the Author of those Papers mistrusting both his own memory and sufficiency, remitteth him∣self in that Narrative unto the Journal of Mr. Ringrose, and desireth by this alone to be cor∣rected, or supplied either in what he was mistaken or deficient; so now this Diary be∣ing published, I hope I have vindicated my self from any fault in History, having brought these papers to light, by which those others were before-hand both acknowledged and de∣sired to be amended.

Page  [unnumbered]As to any other Journal of this Voyage, I shall not concern my self in the least with their veracity, nor meddle with their Relati∣ons; knowing, that if any other person did take it, that no person in the Voyage was so able as Mr. Ringrose. Yet I know that divers Narratives, in many points differing from one another, have at several times been made pub∣lick of one and the same Battel, one and the same Siege, Voyage, Journey, or other trans∣action. And indeed all humane Affairs, where∣soever reported by several persons, though all were present at the same times and places of their circumvolution, are necessarily subject to some diversity in the rehearsal; one per∣son observing, omitting, contracting, dilating, understanding, or mistaking, one particular point or part of any transaction more than a∣nother.

Having premised thus much, I shall here onely declare, that what here is asserted, shall be supported by Mr. Ringrose himself, when ever he returneth into England; yea, and owned for truth by Captain Bartholomew Sharp, as the chiefest actor in these Affairs, assoon as he cometh home again: and if any other per∣son can shew unto the World any Journal of the same Voyage more compleat, more exact, more elaborate, more curious, and informing, Page  [unnumbered] than Mr. Ringrose hath done, he shall deserve the Laurel for me.

The case being thus stated concerning the present Narrative or Journal, I hope no per∣son for the future will asperse or misconster the sincerity of my Intentions, in relation to the publick. This I speak under that due re∣sentment I ought to have, for being traduced, the last year, by some persons, who being transported with too much passion and partia∣lity, would have no body else to be an admi∣rer of the person and valorous Actions of Sir Henry Morgan, or the rest of the Bucaniers, but themselves. As if to publish a Transla∣tion of the unparallel'd Exploits of that Ja∣maican Hero; to give him this commendable title; to say, that both he and his Compani∣ons had acted beyond mortal men in Ameri∣ca; to compare them to Alexander, Julius Caesar, and the Nine Worthies of Fame; to propose them unto our English Nation, as the truest patterns of undaunted and exem∣plary Courage, that ever it produced, were to disparage the Conduct of Sir Henry Morgan and his Companions; as if all this were in∣tended onely to diminish the glory of his A∣ctions, and eclipse the splendour of his and their valorous Triumphs. Methinks, if En∣vy reacheth thus far, with the same reason, Page  [unnumbered] or unjust measure, those persons may say, that to publish this present Journal, is to divulge nothing else than a Satyr against Captain Sharp; and that Mr. Ringrose who every∣where admireth his Conduct, and extolleth his Actions unto the Sky's, yea and was pre∣sent himself, and concerned in the same Af∣fairs, did mean nothing else than to traduce both his own and Captain Sharps name, as infamous unto Posterity. For my part, I judge my self so far distant from blemish∣ing in the least, or disparaging Sir Henry Morgan, or his Heroick Actions; that I be∣lieve I have shewed my self to be the great∣est admirer of his personal Valour, and Con∣duct: yea, I think that I have done more, towards the advantage, both of the Honour, and Credit of that great Commander, by soliciting and publishing that Translation, than all the Authors of our English Nation be∣sides. And I could unfeignedly wish, that these persons who pretend to be so passio∣nate for Sir Henry Morgan, and his huge De∣serts, as to Misinterpret the sincere respects and service, I have endeavoured to perform unto his Merits, would outdo what I have al∣ready done in this particular, and give us ei∣ther a more full, exact, and true account of his Exploits, or the best Panegyrick of his Page  [unnumbered] Prowess, that ever was Written; and then experiment whether I did not readily embrace the Printing such a thing at my own cost and charge, and rather render them ten thou∣sand thanks for his Commendations, than carp at their Actions for Penning, or Printing the 〈◊〉.

or what if the French or Dutch Author 〈◊〉 the History of the Bucaniers, did mistake himself in two or three points, relating to Sir Henry Morgan? Must, therefore the Pub∣lisher be blamed for faithfully Printing, what was most faithfully Translated? Must the Saddle be set upon the wrong Horse, and the faults of the Author, be imputed unto the Printer? Thus if Mr. Ringrose should happen to commit any mistake in these pre∣sent Papers, that blame should be present∣ly mine; and happy should be all Authors, if so readily their errours could be discharged upon the Publishers. Besides, what Authors can there be found so accurate in all things, as not to be subject now and then to some little lapses of their Pen? Were it so in John Esquemeling; as he ought to be par∣doned for any small peccadillo not wittingly nor willingly committed, concerning what he relateth of Sir Henry Morgan, so am I hi∣therto perswaded, that he never designed to Page  [unnumbered] offend that great person, or falsely traduce his memory, in the least. My Argument is: because he himself had the hand of a pri∣vate Bucanier in those Affairs, he himself was a Sharer in those Bootys, an Actor in those En∣terprizes, and could no more blame Sir Hen∣ry Morgan for leading unto those Attempts, than blemish himself for following unto them. Another Reason, even more prevalent, is, that he all along speaketh more honourably of Sir Henry Morgan, than of any other Com∣mander of the Bucaniers, though they were his own Country-men, either Francis Lolo∣nois, or Roche Brasiliano, whereof the one was a Dutch man, and the other was born in France. So that to say, that he representeth the English Bucaniers, as the worst of men, is plainly to forget, that he relateth ten times greater villanies of his own Nation and Coun∣try People; and that the partiality they ac∣cuse him of, if any such can be found in that Author, is rather bent against the French and other Nations, than the English. Doth he in any place of his History, lay all the faults and cruelties of the English Bucaniers upon Sir Henry Morgan? Or do we believe that if committed without order, as in most Armys many things are so done, the General or Commander in Chief, ought to be account∣able Page  [unnumbered] for them? Or if those things were per∣formed by order, that the Spaniards had not deserved them at the hands of the Bu∣caniers?

Ay, but he mistaketh the Pedigree of Sir Henry Morgan. Truely, a great fault, and unpardonable in John Esquemeling, a For∣reigner to our Nation, and an illiterate Buca∣nier, that he should not be better read in our English History. So did he also mistake his very name, calling him Captain John Morgan, for Henry; but that that fault was rectified in the Translation. As if every private Soul∣dier ought to be thoroughly acquainted with the Christian name of his General, and know whether he was Baptized John, or Thomas, Richard, or William! Now what dishonour can it be reputed, unto the merits of Sir Hen∣ry Morgan to be misrepresented by John Es∣quemeling, for the Son of a Rich Yeoman in Wales, whenas at the same time he saith, that he was of good quality in that Country, even as most who bear that name in Wales are known to be? Doth not all our English Nation know the Family of the Morgans to be one of the Ancientest, and best Qualified in all Wales, or England; and that to be descended of a rich Yeoman of the same Family, is as great an hounour, and as honourable a Pedi∣gree, Page  [unnumbered] as any private Gentleman needeth to pretend unto?

But then Sir Henry Morgan did not burn Panama. And what disgrace were it, to that worthy person, if he had set fire unto it, for those reasons he knew best himself? Certainly no greater dishonour than to take and plunder the said City. Thus are these persons so far transported with passion to∣wards Sir Henry Morgan, as to bereave him of the glory of his greatest Actions, whether true or false. For whether he fired the Town or not, (for that Question I shall not make mine) this I am sure, that it was con∣stantly so reported, and believed here in Eng∣land, viz. that the English had set fire unto it; that unto this day the Bucaniers do believe it to be so; and consequence unto this be∣lief Mr. Ringrose, in these Papers saith plain∣ly in some place or other, that Panama was once burnt by Sir Henry Morgan; that the Spaniards themselves never believed nor re∣ported this Fact otherwise, neither will they easily be perswaded to the contrary unto this very day, as I am credibly informed by those persons who lived in Spain at the same time that the news of the taking of Panama was brought into Spain, and who have been resi∣dent there for these many years since. For Page  [unnumbered] what concerneth, what is now Published, that the Governour of Panama fired the Town him∣self, is rather believed by the Spaniards to be a sham of the Governours making, thereby to save his own Bacon, against whom they rail as the greatest Coward that ever was, for de∣serting the Town, and flying to the Moun∣tains, at the approach of the English. How then, say they, could he fire it himself, or give orders to have it fired, when we know he was upon the Spur, thirty or forty Miles distant from thence? Had he done it, he would have set fire unto every House, before he had left the Town, and not so many Hours after the English were in possession of the place, and he at such a distance from it. Thus both the English Nation, and the Spanish having agreed, to give the honour of this Action either truely or false∣ly, unto Sir Henry Morgan, I cannot but admire that those who pretend to be the greatest ad∣mirers of his merits, should endeavour to devest him of it.

What concerneth two or three points more, relating to Sir Henry Morgan in the History of the Bucaniers, I shall not undertake to Apolo∣gize for John Esquemeling, in case he hath mis∣represented them. All that I shall say, is this, that that worthy person is not the first General or Chief Commander, whose Actions have been Page  [unnumbered] misconstrued or misunderstood by the common Souldiers, and consequently ill represented by them at home. Neither is any thing in this World more subject to glosses, and false repre∣sentations, than the Heroick Actions of great men, by their Servants, or inferiours. If this be the case of John Esquemeling, and that he was Male-contented whith his Fortune at Panama, what is that to me? What fault was that of mine? I'th' mean while, why have not these persons, so zealous of the honour of Sir Henry Morgan, given us the true Journal of his huge Exploits, but rather suffer his famous Actions to lye dormient for so many years in England, at the same time that other Nations have Pub∣shed them abroad? And then why must I be blamed by these persons, his admirers, for doing for the renown of Sir Henry Morgan what I could, if I could not do so much, as I would willingly have done?

Page  [unnumbered]

READER, Correct these two places thus▪

PAge 1. Line 21. for plundered once, read taken once. p. 33. l. 14. blot out, by him.

Page  1

BUCANIERS OF AMERICA. The Second Volume. PART IV.

Containing the dangerous Voyage, and bold Assaults of Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and others, per∣formed in the South Sea, for the space of two years, &c.

CHAP. I. Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp, and others, set forth in a Fleet towards the Province of Darien, upon the Continent of America. Their designs to pillage and plunder in those parts. Number of their Ships, and strength of their Forces by Sea and Land.

AT a place called Boca del Toro,* was the gene∣ral Rendezvouz of the Fleet, which lately had taken and sackt Puerto Velo the second time; that rich place having been plundered once before, under the Conduct of Sir Henry Mor∣gan, as is related in the History of the Bucaniers. At this Page  2 place also were two other Vessels; the one belonging un∣to Captain Peter Harris, and the other unto Captain Ri∣chard Sawkins; both Englishmen and Privateers. Here therefore a report was made unto the Fleet, of a Peace concluded between the Spaniards and the Indians of the Land of Darien, who for the most part wage incessant Wars against one another. Also, that since the conclusion of the said Peace, they had been already tryed, and found very faithful unto Captain Bournano, a French Commander, in an attempt on a certain place called Chepo, nigh the South Sea. Further, that the Indians had promised to conduct him unto a great and very rich place, named Toca∣mora: upon which he had likewise promised them to re∣turn in three Months time with more Ships and Men. Hereupon we all agreed to go visit the said place, and thus dispersed our selves into several Coves,* (by the Spaniards called Cúèvas, or hollow creeks under the Coasts) there to careen and fit our Vessels for that purpose. In this place Boca del Toro, we found plenty of fat Tortoises; the plea∣santest meat in the world. When we had refitted our Ves∣sels, we met at an Island, called by us, the Water-key; and this was then our strength, as followeth.

  Tuns. Guns. Men.
Captain Coxon in a Ship of 80 8 97
Captain Harris in another of 150 25 107
Captain Bournáno 90 6 86
Captain Sawkins 16 1 35
Captain Sharp 25 2 40
Captain Cook 35 00 43
Captain Alleston 18 00 24
Captain Row 20 00 25
Captain Macket 14 00 20

*We sailed from thence March the 23. 1679. and in our way touched at the Islands called Zamblas. These are cer∣tain Islands reaching eight Leagues in extent, and lying fourteen Leagues Westward of the River of Darien. Being here at an Anchor, many of the Indians, both men and Page  3 women, came to see us. Some brought Plantans, others other Fruits, and Venison, to exchange with us for Beads, Needles, Knives, or any trifling bauble whereof they stand in need. But what they most chiefly covet are Axes and Hatchets to sell Timber withal. The men here go naked,* as having only a sharp and hollow tip, made either of Gold, Silver, or Bark, into which they thrust their Privy Mem∣bers; the which tip they fasten with a string about their middle. They wear as an ornament in their Noses, a gol∣den or silver Plate, in shape like unto a Half Moon; which when they drink, they hold up with one hand, mean while they lift the cup with the other. They paint themselves sometimes with streaks of black; as the women do in like manner, with red. These have in their Noses a pretty thick ring of Gold or Silver; and for cloathing, they cover themselves with a Blanket. They are generally well featu∣red women: among whom I saw several fairer than the fairest of Europe, with Hair like unto the finest flax. Of these it is reported, they can see far better in the dark, than in the light.

These Indians misliked our design for Tocamora,* and dis∣swaded us from it, asserting it would prove too tedious a march, and the way so mountainous, and uninhabited, that it would be extream difficult to get Provisions for our men. Withal, they proffered to guide us undiscryed, within few Leagues of the City of Panama, in case we were pleased to go thither; where we could not choose but know our selves, we should not fail of making a good Voyage. Up∣on these, and other reasons which they gave us, we con∣cluded to desist from the Journey of Tocamora, and to pro∣ceed to Panama. Having taken up these Resolutions, Captain Bournano and Captain Row's Vessels separated from us, as being all French, and not willing to go to Panama, they declaring themselves generally against a long march by Land. Thus we left them at the Zamblas. From thence an Indian Captain, or chief Commander,* named Andraeas, conducted us to another Island, called by the Eng∣lish,Page  4 the Golden Island▪ situated something to the westward of the mouth of the great River of Darien. At this Island we met, being in all seven Sail, on the third of April, 1680.

Here at the Golden Island, the Indians gave us notice of a Town called Sancta Maria,* situate on a great River, which beareth the same name, and which runneth into the South Sea, by the Gulf of San Miguèl. That in the Town was kept a Garrison of four hundred Souldiers; and that from this place much Gold was carried to Panama, which was ga∣thered from the Mountains thereabouts. That in case we should not find sufficient purchase there, we might from thence proceed by Sea to Panama, where we could not easi∣ly fail of our designs. This motion of the Indians we liked so well,* that we landed three hundred and thirty one men, on April the 5th 1680. leaving Captain Alleston, and Mackett, with a party of Seamen, to guard our Ships in our absence; with which we intended to return home.

*These men that were landed, had each of them three or four Cakes of Bread, (called by the English Dough-boy's) for their provision of Victuals; and as for drink, the Rivers afforded them enough. At that time of our Landing, Cap∣tain Sharp was very faint and weak, as having had a great it of sickness lately, which he had scarcely recovered. Our several Companies that marched, were distinguished as fol∣loweth. First, Captain Bartholomew Sharp with his Com∣pany had a red Flag, with a bunch of white and green Rib∣bons. The second Division led by Captain Richard Saw∣kins, with his men had a red Flag striped with yellow. The third and fourth, which were led by Captain Peter Harris, had two green Flags, his Company being divided into two several Divisions. The fifth and sixth, which be∣ing led by Captain John Coxon, who had some of Alleston's and Macketts men joyned unto his, made two Divisions or Companies, had each of them a red Flag. The seventh was led by Captain Edmond Cook with red Colours striped with yellow, with a Hand and Sword for his devise. All, or most of them, were Armed with Fuzee, Pistol, and Hanger.

Page  5

CHAP. II. They march towards the Town of Santa Maria with design to take it. The Indian King of Darien meeteth them by the way. Difficulties of this March, with other occurrences till they arrive at the place.

BEing landed on the Coast of Darien,* and divided into Companies, as was mentioned in the preceding Chap∣ter, we began our march towards Santa Maria, the Indians serving us for guides in that unknown Country. Thus we marched at first through a small skirt of a wood, and then over a bay almost a League in length. After that, we went two Leagues directly up a woody valley, where we saw here and there an old Plantation, and had a very good path to march in. There we came to the side of a River, which in most places was dry, and built us Houses, or ra∣ther Huts to lodge in.

Unto this place came unto us another Indian,* who was a chief Commander, and a man of great parts, named Captain Antonio. This Indian Officer encouraged us very much to undertake the Journey of Santa Maria, and pro∣mised to be our Leader; saying, he would go along with us now, but that his Child lay very sick. However, he was assured, it would dye by next day; and then he would most certainly follow and overtake us. Withal, he desired we would not lye in the grass, for fear of monstrous Adders, which are very frequent in those places. Breaking some of the stones that lay in the River, we found them shine with sparks of Gold. These stones are driven down from the neighbouring Mountains in time of floods.* This day four of our men tyred, and returned back unto the Ships. So Page  6 we remained in all 327 men, with six Indians to conduct us. That night some showers of rain fell.

*The next day of our march we mounted a very steep hill, and on the other side, at the foot thereof, we rested on the bank of a River, which Captain Andraeas told us, did run into the South Sea; being the same River on which the Town of Santa Maria was situated. Hence we continued our march until noon, and then ascended ano∣ther Mountain extreamly higher than the former. Here we ran much danger oftentimes, and in many places, the Mountain being so perpendicular, and the path so narrow, that but one man at a time could pass. We arrived by the dark of the evening to the other side of the Mountain, and lodged again by the side of the same River, having march∣ed that day, according to our reckoning, about eighteen miles. This night likewise some rain did fall.

*The next morning, being April the 7th, we marched all along the River aforementioned, crossing it often, almost at every half mile, sometimes up to the knees, and at other times up to the middle, in a very swift current. About noon we came to a place, where we found some Indian hou∣ses. Thse were very large and neat: the sides were built wih Cabbage-trees, and the roofs of wild Canes, being, over them,* thatcht with Palmito Royal, but far more neater than urs at Jamaica. They had many divisions into rooms, though no ascent by sairs into Chambers. At this place were four of these houses together, that is, within a stones throw one of another, each of them having a large Plan∣tane walk before it. At the distance of half a mile from this place, lived the King or chief Captain of these Indians of Darien, who came to visit us in Royal Robes, with his Queen and Family.* His Crown was made of small white 〈◊〉▪ which were curiously woven, having no other top than its lining, which was red silk. Round about the mid∣dle of it was a thin plate of gold, more than two inches broad,* laed behind; from whence did stick two or three Ostrich feathers. About this plae went also a row of gol∣den Page  7 beads, which were bigger than ordinary pease; under∣neath which the red lining of the Crown was seen. In his nose he wore a large plate of gold, in form of an half Moon; and in each ear a great golden ring, nigh four in∣ches in diameter, with a round thin plate of Gold of the same breadth, having a small hole in the center, and by that hanging to the ring. He was covered with a thin white cotton robe, reaching unto the small of his legs, and round its bottom a fringe of the same three inches deep. So that by the length of this Robe, our sight was impeded, that we could see no higher than his naked Ankles. In his hand he had a long bright Lance, as sharp as any knife. With him he had three Sons, each of them having a white Robe, and their Lances in their hands, but standing bare-headed be∣fore him; as also were eight or nine persons more of his Retinue, or Guard. His Queen wore a red Blanket,* which was closely girt about her wast: and another that came loosely over her head and shoulders, like unto our old fa∣shion striped hangings. She had a young Child in her arms, and two Daughters walked by her, both Mariageable, with their faces almost covered with stripes or streaks of red, and about their Neck and Arms, almost loaden with small Beads of several colours. These Indian women of the Province of Darien, are generally very free, airy, and brisk; yet withal very modest, and cautious in their Husbands presence, of whose jealousie they stand in fear. With these Indians we made an exchange, or had a truck, as it is called, for Knives, Pins, Needles, or any other such like trifles; but in our dealing with them we found them to be very cunning. Here we rested our selves for the space of one day; and withal, chose Captain Sawkins to lead the Forlorn, unto whom, for that purpose, we gave the choice of Fourscore men. The King ordered us each man to have three Plantans, with Sugar-canes to suck, by way of a Present. But when these were consumed, if we would not truck we must have starved; for the King himself did not refuse to deal for his Plantans. This sort of Fruit is first reduced to mash, then Page  8 laid between leaves of the same tree, and so used with wa∣ter; after which preparation they call it Miscelaw.

*On April the Ninth we continued our march along the banks of the River abovementioned, finding in our way here and there a House. The owners of the said Houses would most commonly stand at the door, and give, as we passed by, to every one of us, either a ripe Plantane, or some sweet Cazave-root. Some of them would count us by dropping a grain of Corn for each man that passed be∣fore them; for they know no greater number, nor can tell no farther then Twenty. That night we arrived at three great Indian Houses, where we took up our Lodgings, the weather being clear and serene all night.

*The next day Captain Sharp, Captain Coxon, and Cap∣tain Cook, with about threescore and ten of our men, embar∣ked themselves in fourteen Canoas upon the River, to glide down the stream. Among this number I did also embark; and we had in our company our Indian Captain Andraeas, of whom mention was made above; and two Indians more in each Canoa, to Pilot or guide us down the River. But if it was so that we were tired in travelling by Land before, certainly we were in a worser condition now in our Canoas. For at the distance of almost every stones cast, we were constrained to quit, and get out of our Boats, and hale them over either Sands or Rocks: at other times over Trees that lay cross and filled up the River, so that they hindred our Navigation; yea, several times over the very points of Land it self. That night we built our selves Huts to shelter in upon the River side, and rested our wearied Limbs until next morning.

*This being come, we prosecuted our Journey all day long with the same fatigue and toil, as we had done the day be∣fore. At night came a Tygre and looked on us for some while, but we dared not to fire at the Animal, fearing we should be descryed by the sound of our Fuzees: the Spa∣niards, as we were told, not being at much distance from that place.

Page  9But the next day, which was April the Twelfth,* our pain and labour was rather doubled than diminished; not only for the difficulties of the way, which was intolera∣ble, but chiefly for the absence of our main body of men, from whom we had parted the day before. For now hear∣ing no news of them, we grew extreamly jealous of the In∣dians and their Councels, suspecting it a design of those people thus to divide our Forces, and then cutting us off, betray us unto the Spaniards our implacable Enemies. That night we rested our selves by building of Huts, as we had done, and hath been mentioned before.

On Tuesday morning, the next ensuing day,* we conti∣nued our Navigation down the River, and arrived at a beachy point of Land; at which place another Arm joyn∣eth the same River. Here, as we understood, the Indians of Darien did usually Rendezvous, whensoever they drew up in a Body, with intention to fight their ancient Enemies the Spaniards. Here also we made a hault, or stayed for the rest of our Forces and Company, the Indians having now sent to seek them, as being themselves not a little concerned at our dissatisfaction and jealousies. In the af∣ternoon our Companions came up with us, and were huge∣ly glad to see us, they having been in no less fear for us, than we had been at the same time for them. We continued and rested there that night also, with design to fit our Arms for action, which now, as we were told, was nigh at hand.

We departed from thence early the next morning,* which was the last day of our march, being in all now, the num∣ber of threescore and eight Canoa's, wherein were imbar∣ked 327 of us Englishmen, and 50 Indians, who served us for Guides. Unto the point above-mentioned, the Indians had hitherto guided our Canoas with long Poles or sticks; but now we made our selves Oars and Paddles to row with∣al, and thereby make what speed we could. Thus we rowed with all hast imaginable, and upon the River hap∣ned to meet two or three Indian Canoas that were laded with Plantans.* About midnight we arrived and landed at Page  10 the distance of half a mile, more or less, from the Town of Santa Maria, whither our march was all along intended. The place where we landed was deeply muddy, insomuch, that we were constrained to lay our paddles on the mud to wade upon, and withal, lift our selves up by the boughs of the trees, to support our Bodies from sinking. Afterwards we were forced to cut our way through the woods for some space, where we took up our Lodgings for that night, for fear of being discovered by the Enemy, unto whom we were so nigh.

CHAP. III. They take the Town of Santa Maria with no loss of Men, and but small purchase of what they sought for. Description of the Place, Country, and River adjacent. They resolve to go and plunder the second time the City of Panama.

THe next morning, which was Thursday April the Fif∣teenth,* about break of day, we heard from the Town a small Arm discharged, and after that a Drum bea∣ting a travailler. With this we were roused from our sleep, and taking up our Arms, we put our selves in order and marched towards the Town. As soon as we came out of the Woods into the open ground, we were descryed by the Spaniards, who had received before-hand intelligence of our coming, and were prepared to receive us, having al∣ready conveyed away all their Treasure of Gold, and sent it to Panama. They ran immediately into a large Paliza∣da Fort, having each Pale or Post twelve foot high, and began to fire very briskly at us as we came. But our Vanguard ran up unto the place, and pulling down two or three of their Palizadas,* entred the Fort incontinently, Page  11 and made themselves Masters thereof. In this Action there were not fifty of our men that came up before the Fort was taken; and on our side only two were wounded, and not one killed. Notwithstanding within the place were found two hundred and threescore men, besides which number, two hundred others were said to be absent, being gone up into the Countrey unto the Mines to fetch down Gold, or rather to convey away what was already in the Town. This golden Treasure cometh down another branch of this River unto Santa Maria, from the neighbour∣ing Mountains, where are thought to be the richest Mines of the Indies, or, at least, of all these parts of the Western World. Of the Spaniards we killed in the assault twenty six, and wounded to the number of sixteen more. But their Governour, their Priest, and all, or most of their chief men, made their escape by flight.

Having taken the Fort,* we expected to find here a con∣siderable Town belonging unto it. But it proved to be only some wild houses made of Cane, the place being chief∣ly a Garrison designed to keep the Indians in subjection, who bare a mortal hatred, and are often apt to rebel against the Spaniards. But as bad a place as it was, our fortune was much worse. For we came only three days too late, or else we had met with three hundred weight of Gold,* which was carried thence to Panama in a Bark, that is sent from thence twice or thrice every year, to fetch what Gold is brought to Santa Maria from the Mountains. This Ri∣ver, called by the name of the Town, is hereabouts twice as broad as the River of Thames is at London, and floweth above threescore miles upwards, rising to the heighth of two fathom and a half at the Town it self. As soon as we had taken the place, the Indians who belonged to our com∣pany, and had served us for Guides, came up unto the Town. For mean while they heard the noise of the Guns, they were in a great consternation, and dared not approach the Palizadas, but had hidden themselves closely in a small hol∣low ground, insomuch that the bullets, while we were fighting flew over their heads.

Page  12*Here we found and redeemed the eldest Daughter of the King of Darien, of whom we made mention above. She had, as it should seem, been forced away from her Fathers house by one of the Garison, (which Rape had hugely in∣censed him against the Spaniards) and was with Child by him. After the Fight the Indians destroyed as many more of the Spaniards, as we had done in the assault, by taking them into the adjoyning Woods, and there stabbing them to death with their Lances. But so soon as we understood this their barbarous cruelty, we hindred them from taking any more out of the Fort, where we confined them every one Prisoners. Captain Sawkins with a small party of ten more,* put himself into a Canoa, and went down the River, to pursue and stop, if it were possible, those that had escaped, who were the chiefest of the Town and Garrison. But now our great expectations of making an huge pur∣chase of Gold at this place being totally vanished, we were unwilling to come so far for nothing, or go back empty-handed; especially, considering what vast riches were to be had at no great distance from thence. Hereupon, we resolved to go for Panama, which place if we could take, we were assured we should get Treasure enough, to satisfie our hungry appetite of Gold and Riches, that City being the receptacle of all the Plate, Jewels, and Gold that is dig∣ged out of the Mines of all Potost and Peru. Unto this effect therefore, and to please the humours of some of our com∣pany, we made choice of Captain Coxon to be our General, or Commander in chief.* Before our departure, we sent back what small booty we had taken here by some prisoners, and these under the charge of twelve of our men to con∣vey it unto the Ships.

*Thus we prepared to go forward on that dangerous en∣terprize of Panama. But the Indians who had conducted us having gotten from us what Knives, Sizars, Axes, Nee∣dles, and Beads they could obtain, would not stay any lon∣ger, but all, or the greatest part of them returned to their home.* Which notwithstanding, the King himself, Captain Page  13Andraeas, Captain Antonio, the Kings Son,* called by the Spa∣niards, Bonete de Oro, or King Golden-cap, as also his Kins∣man, would not be perswaded by their falling off to leave us, but resolved to go to Panama, out of the desire they had to see that place taken and sackt. Yea, the King pro∣mised, if there should be occasion, to joyn fifty thousand men unto our Forces. Besides which promises, we had al∣so another encouragement very considerable to undertake this journey. For the Spaniard who had forced away the Kings Daughter, as was mentioned above, fearing lest we should leave him to the mercy of the Indians, who would have had but little on him, having shewed them∣selves so cruel unto the rest of his Companions, for the safe∣ty of his life had promised to lead us, not only into the Town, but even to the very bed-chamber door of the Go∣vernour of Panama, and that we should take him by the hand, and seize both him and the whole City, before we should be discovered by the Spaniards, either before or after our arrival.

CHAP. IV. The Bucaniers leave the Town of Santa Maria, and proceed by Sea to take Panama. Extream diffi∣culties, with sundry accidents and dangers of that Voyage.

HAving been in possession of the Town of Santa Ma∣ria,* only the space of two days, we departed from thence on Saturday April the 17th 1680. We embarked all in Thirty five Canoas, and a Periagua, which we had taken here lying at anchor before the Town. Thus we sailed, or rather rowed down the River, in quest of the South Sea, upon which Panama is seated, towards the Gulf Page  14 of Belona, whereat we were to disembogue into that O∣cean. Our prisoners, the Spaniards, begged very earnestly they might be permitted to go with us, and not be left a∣bandoned unto the mercy of the Indians, who would shew them no savour, and whose cruelty they so much feared. But we had much ado to find sufficient number of boats for our selves, the Indians that left us, had taken with them, either by consent or stealth, so many Canoas. Yet not∣withstanding they found soon after either Bark Logs, or old Canoas, and by that means shifted so well for their lives, as to come along with us. Before our departure we burnt both the Fort,* the Church, and the Town, which was done at the request of the King, he being extreamly incensed a∣gainst it.

*Among these Canoas, it was my misfortune to have one that was very heavy, and consequently sluggish. By this means we were left behind the rest a little way, our number being only four men, besides my self, that were embarked therein. As the Tyde fell, it left several shoals of sand naked; and hence, we not knowing of the true Chan∣nel, amongst such variety of streams, hapned to steer with∣in a shoal, above two mile, before we perceived our error. Hereupon, we were forced to lye by until high water came; for to row in such heavy boats as those are against the Tide, is a thing totally impossible. As soon as the Tyde began to turn, we rowed away in prosecution of our Voyage, and withal, made what hast we could, but all our endeavours were in vain, for we neither could find, nor o∣vertake our Companions. Thus about ten of the clock at night, the Tyde being low water, we stuck up an Oar in the River, and slept by turns in our Canoa, several show∣ers of rain falling all the night long, with which we were throughly pierced to the skin.

But the next morning, no sooner day was come, when we rowed away down the River,* as before, in pursuit of our people. Having gon about the space of two Leagues, we were so fortunate as to overtake them. For they had lain Page  15 that night at an Indian Hut, or Embarcadero, that is to say, landing place, and had been filling of water till then i'th' morning. Being arrived at the place, they told us, that we must not omit to fill our Jars there with water, otherwise we should meet with none in the space of six days time. Hereupon we went every one of us the distance of a quar∣ter of a mile from the Embarcadero, unto a little Pond, to fill our water in Calabazas, making withal what hast we could back unto our Canoa. But when we returned, we found not one of our men, they all being departed, and al∣ready got out of sight. Such is the procedure of these wild men, that they care not in the least whom they loose of their company, or leave behind. We were now more troubled in our minds than before, fearing lest we should fall into the same misfortune we had so lately overcome.

Hereupon we rowed after them, as fast as we possibly could, but all in vain. For here are found such huge num∣bes of Islands, greater and lesser, as also Keys about the mouth of the River, that it was not difficult for us, who were unacquainted with the River, to loose our selves a se∣cond time amongst them. Yet notwithstanding, though with much trouble and toil, we found at last that mouth of the River, that is called by the Spaniards, Boca chica, or the Little mouth. But as it hapned, it was now young flood, and the stream ran very violent against us. So that though we were not above a stones cast, from the said mouth, and this was within a League broad, yet we could not by any means come near it. Hence we were forced to put ashoar, which we did accordingly, until the time of high-water. We haled our Canoa close by the bushes, and when we got out, we fastned our Rope unto a Tree, which the Tyde had almost covered, for it floweth here nigh four fathom deep.

As soon as the Tyde began to turn, we rowed away from thence unto an Island,* distant about a League and an half from the mouth of the River, in the Gulf of San Mi∣guel. Here in the Gulf it went very hard with us, when∣soever Page  16 any wave dashed against the sides of our Canoa, for it was nigh twenty foot in length, and yet not quite one foot and a half in breadth where it was at the broadest. So that we had just room enough to sit down in her, and a little water would easily have both filled and overwhelm∣ed us. At the Island aforesaid, we took up our resting place for that night, though for the loss of our company, and the great dangers we were in, the sorrowfullest night that until then, I ever experimented in my whole life. For it rained impetuously all night long, insomuch that we were wet from head to foot, and had not one dry thred about us; neither through the violence of the rain, were we able to keep any fire burning wherewith to warm or dry us. The Tide ebbeth here a good half mile from the mark of high water, and leaveth bare wonderful high, and sharp pointed rocks. We passed this heavy and tedious night without one sole minute of sleep, being all very sorrowful to see our selves so far and remote from the rest of our compani∣ons, as also totally destitute of all humane comfort. For a vast Sea surrounded us on the one side, and the mighty power of our Enemies the Spaniards on the other. Neither could we descry at any hand the least thing to relieve us, all that we could see being the wide sea, high Mountains and Rocks; mean while our selves were confined to an Egg-shell, instead of a Boat, without so much as a few cloaths to defend us from the injuries of the weather. For at that time none of us had a shooe to our feet. We searched the whole Key, to see if we could find any water, but found none.

Page  17

CHAP. V. Shipwrack of Mr. Ringrose the Author of this Nar∣rative. He is taken by the Spaniards, and mi∣raculously by them preserved. Several other ac∣cidents and disasters which befel him after the loss of his Companions till he found them again. Description of the Gulf of Vallona.

ON Munday April the Nineteenth, at break of day, we halled our Canoa into the water again,* and depart∣ing from the Island aforementioned: both wet and cold, as we were, we rowed away towards the Punta de San Lo∣renzo, or Point St. Lawrence. In our way we met with se∣veral Islands which lye stragling thereabouts. But now we were again so hard put to it, by the smalness of our ves∣sel, and being in an open sea, that it was become the work of one man, yea sometimes of two, to cast out the water, which came in on all sides of our Canoa. After strugling for some while with these difficulties, as we came near un∣to one of those Islands, a Sea came and overturned our Boat,* by which means we were all forced to swim for our lives. But we soon got unto the Shoar, and to the same place our Canoa came tumbling after us. Our Arms were very fast lashed unto the inside of the Boat, and our Locks as well cased and waxed down as was possible; so were al∣so our Catouche Boxes and powder-horns. But all our Bread and fresh water was utterly spoiled and lost.

Our Canoa being tumbled on shoar by the force of the waves, our first business was to take out and clear our Arms.* This we had scarcely done, but we saw another Canoa run the same misfortune at a little distance to Leeward of us, a∣mongst a great number of Rocks that bounded the Island. Page  18 The persons that were cast away proved to be six Spaniards of the Garison of Santa Maria, who had found an old Canoa, and had followed us to escape the cruelty of the Indians. They presently came unto us, and made us a fire; which being done, we got our meat and broyled it on the coals, and all of us eat amicably together. But we stood in great need of water, or any other drink to our Victuals, not knowing in the least where to get any. Our Canoa was thrown up by the waves to the edge of the water, and there was no great fear of its splitting, as being full six inches in thickness on the sides thereof. But that in which the Spa∣niards came, split it self against the Rocks, as being old and slender, into an hundred pieces. Though we were thus shipwrackt and driven ashoar, as I have related, yet other∣wise, and at other times, is this Gulf of San Miguel a meer Mill-pond for smoothness of water.

My company was now altogether for returning, and to proceed no farther,* but rather for living amongst the In∣dians, in case they could not reach the Ships we had left be∣hind us in the Northern Sea. But with much ado I pre∣vailed with them to go forward at least one day longer, and in case we found not our people the next day, that then I would be willing to do any thing which they should think fit. Thus we spent two or three hours of the day in con∣sulting about our affairs, and withal keeping a man to watch and look out on all sides, for fear of any surprizal by the Indians, or other Enemies. About the time that we were come to a conclusion in our debates, our watchman by chance spyed an Indian; who, as soon as he saw us, ran into the woods. I sent immediately two of my company after him, who overtook him, and found that he was one of our friendly Indians. Thus he carryed them unto a place not far distant from thence, where seven more of his company were, with a great Canoa which they had brought with them. They came unto the place where I was with the rest of my company, and seemed to be glad to meet us on that Island. I asked them by signs for the main bo∣dy Page  19 of our Company; and they gave me to understand, that in case we would go with them in their Canoa, which was much bigger than ours, we should be up with the Party by the next morning. This news, as may easily be supposed, not a little rejoyced our hearts.

Presently after this friendly invitation,* they asked who the other six men were, whom they saw in our company, for they easily perceived us not to be all of one and the same coat and lingua. We told them they were Wankers, which is the name they commonly give unto the Spaniards in their own Language. Their next question was, if they should kill those Spaniards? but I answered them, No, by no means, I would not consent to have it done. With which answer they seemed to be satisfied for that present. But a little while after, my back being turned, my com∣pany thinking that they should oblige thereby the Indians, beckned unto them to kill the Spaniards. With this, the poor Creatures perceiving the danger that threatned them, made a sad shreek and outcry, and I came time enough to save all their lives. But withal, I was forced to give way and consent, they should have one of them, for to make him their slave. Hereupon I gave the Canoa that I came in unto the five Spaniards remaining, and bid them get away and shift for their lives, lest those cruel Indians should not keep their word, and they run again the same danger they had so lately escaped. Having sent them away, mean while I rested my self, here I took a Survey of this Gulf, and the mouth of the River, the which I finished the same day, and do here present unto the view of the Reader.

Page  20

[illustration]
A Description of Laguna or Gulf of Ballona.

Page  21But now, thanks be to God,* joyning company with those Indians, we were got into a very large Canoa, the which for its bigness, was better able to carry twenty men, than our own that we had brought to carry five. The Indians had also fitted a very good Sail unto the said Canoa; so that having now a fresh and strong gale of wind, we set sail from thence, and made therewith brave way, to the in∣finite joy and comfort of our hearts, seeing our selves so well accommodated, and so happily rid of the miseries we but lately had endured. We had now a smooth and easie passage, after such tedious and laboursome pains as we had sustained in coming so far since we left Santa Maria. Un∣der the point of St. Lawrence, mentioned above, is a very great ripling of the Sea, occasioned by a strong current which runneth hereabouts, and which oftentimes almost filled our Boat with its dashes, as we sailed. This evening, after our departure from the Island where we were cast a∣way, it rained vehemently for several hours, and the night proved to be very dark. About nine of the clock that night we descryed two fires on the shoar of the Continent, over against us. These fires were no sooner perceived by the Indians of our Canoa, but they began to shout for joy, and cry out, Captain Antonio, Captain Andraeas, the names of their Indian Captains and Leaders; and to affirm, they were assured those fires were made by their Companions. Hence they made for the shoar towards those fires, as fast as they could drive. But so soon as our Canoa came a∣mongst the breakers, nigh the shoar, out came from the Woods above threescore Spaniards with Clubs and other Arms, and laying hold on our Canoa on both sides thereof, halled it out of the water quite dry. So that by this means we were all suddainly taken and made their prisoners. I laid hold of my Gun, thinking to make some defence for my self, but all was in vain; for they as suddainly seized me between four or five of them, and hindred me from acti∣on. I'th' mean while our Indians leaped over board, and got away very nimbly into the Woods; my Companions Page  22 standing amazed at what had hapned, and the manner of our surprizal. I asked them presently if any of them could speak either French or English: but they answered, No. Hereupon, as well as I could, I discoursed to some of them, who were more intelligent than the rest, in Latin, and by degrees came to understand their condition. These were Spaniards who had been turned here ashoar by our English party, who left them upon this Coast, left by car∣rying them nearer unto Panama, any of them should make their escape, and discover our march towards that City. They had me presently after I was taken into a small Hut which they had built, covered with boughs, and made there great shouts for joy, because they had taken us; de∣signing in their minds to use us very severely for coming into those parts, and especially for taking and plundering their Town of Santa Maria. But mean while the Captain of those Spaniards was examining me, in came the poor Spaniard that was come along with us, and reported how kind I had been to him, and the rest of his Companions, by saving their Lives from the cruelty of the Indians.

*The Captain having heard him, arose from his seat im∣mediately and embraced me, saying, that we Englishmen were very friendly Enemies, and good people, but that the Indians were very Rogues, and a treacherous Nation. With∣al, he desired me to sit down by him, and to eat part of such Victuals as our Companions had left them when they were turned ashoar. Then he told me, that for the kindness I had shewed unto his Countrymen, he gave us all our Lives and Liberties, which otherwise he would certainly have taken from us. And though he could scarcely be perswa∣ded in his mind to spare the Indians lives, yet for my sake he did pardon them all, and I should have them with me, in case I could find them. Thus he bid me likewise take my Canoa, and go in Gods name, saying withal, he wished us as fortunate as we were generous. Hereupon I took my leave of him, after some little stay, though he invited me to tarry all night with him. I searched out, and at last Page  23 found my Indians, who for fear had hid themselves in the bushes adjoyning to the neighbouring woods, where they lay concealed. Having found them, the Captain led me very civilly down unto the Canoa, and bidding my Com∣panions and the Indians get in after me; as they at first halled us ashoar, so now again they pushed us off to Sea, by a suddain and strange vicissitude of fortune. All that night it rained very hard, as was mentioned above; neither durst we put any more ashoar at any place, it being all along such, as by Mariners is commonly called an Iron Coast.

The next morning being come, we sailed, and padled,* or rowed, till about ten of the clock. At which time we es∣pied a Canoa making towards us with all speed imaginable. Being come up with us, and in view, it proved to be of our own English Company, who mistaking our Canoa for a Spanish Periagua, was coming in all hast to attack us. We were infinitely gladded to meet them, and they presently conducted us to the rest of our Company, who were at that instant coming from a deep Bay, which lay behind a high point of Rocks, where they had lain at Anchor all that night and morning. We were all mutually rejoyced to see one another again, they having given both me and my Companions for lost.

CHAP. VI. The Bucaniers prosecute their Voyage, till they come within sight of Panama. They take seve∣ral Barks and Prisoners by the way. Are des∣cryed by the Spaniards before their arrival. They order the Indians to kill the Prisoners.

FRom the place where we rejoyned our English Forces,* we all made our way towards a high hammock of Land, as it appeared at a distance, but was nothing else Page  24 then an Island seven Leagues distant from the Bay afore∣mentioned. On the highest part of this Island the Spani∣ards keep a watch, or Look-out, (for so it is termed by the Sea-men) for fear of Pyrates, or other Enemies. That evening we arrived at the Island, and being landed, went up a very steep place, till we came to a little Hut where the watchman lodged. We took by surprizal the old man who watched in the place, but hapned to see us not, till we were got into his Plantane walk before the Lodge. He told us in his examination, that we were not as yet descryed by the Spaniards of Panama, or any others that he knew; which relation of the old fellow much encouraged us to go for∣wards with our design of surprizing that rich City. This place, if I took its name rightly, is called Farol de Planta∣nos, or in English, Plantane-watch.

*Here, not long before it was dark that evening, a cer∣tain Bark came to an anchor at the outward side of the I∣sland, which instantly was descryed by us. Hereupon, we speedily Manned out two Canoas, who went under the shoar and surprized the said Boat. Having examined the persons that were on board, we found she had been absent the space of eight days from Panama, and had landed Sol∣diers at a point of Land not far distant from this Island, with intention to fight and curb certain Indians and Ne∣groes, who had done much hurt in the Country therea∣bouts. The Bark being taken, most of our men endea∣voured to get into her, but more especially those who had the lesser Canoas. Thus there embarked thereon to the number of one hundred thirty and seven of our company, together with that Sea-Artist, and valiant Commander, Captain Bartholomew Sharp. With him went also on board Captain Cook, whom we mentioned at the beginning of this History. The remaining part of that night we lay at the Key of the said Island, expecting to prosecute our Voy∣age the next day.

*Morning being come, I changed my Canoa and embark∣ed my self on another, which though it was something Page  25 lesser than the former, yet was furnished with better com∣pany. Departing from the Island, we rowed all day long over shoal water, at the distance of about a League from land, having sometimes not above four foot water, and white ground. In the afternoon we descryed a Bark at sea, and instantly gave her chace. But the Canoa wherein was Captain Harris hapned to come up the first with her, who after a sharp dispute took her. Being taken, we put on board the said Bark thirty men. But the wind would not suffer the other Bark in chacing to come up with us. This pursuit of the Vessel did so far hinder us in our Voy∣age, and divide us asunder, that night coming on presently after, we lost one another, and could no longer keep in a bo∣dy together. Hereupon we laid our Canoa ashoar, to take up our rest for that night, at the distance of two miles, more or less, from high water mark, and about four Leagues to Leeward of the Island of Chepillo, unto which place our course was then directed.

The next morning,* as soon as the water began to float us, we rowed away for the fore-mentioned Island Chepillo, where by assignation our general Rendezvous was to be. In our way as we went, we espyed another Bark under sail, as we had done the day before. Capt. Coxons Canoa was now the first that came up with this vessel. But a young breese freshning at that instant, she got away from him after the first onset, killing in the said Canoa one Mr. Bull, and wound∣ing two others. We presently conjectured that this Bark would get before us unto Panama, and give intelligence of our coming unto those of the Town; all which hapned as we had foreseen. It was that day two of the clock in the afternoon, before all our Canoas could come together, and joyn one another as it was assigned at Chepillo.* We took at that Island fourteen prisoners, between Negros and Mulatos; also great store of Plantans, and good water, together with two fat hogs. But now believing that ere this we had been already descryed at Panama, by the Bark afore-mentioned, we resolved among our selves to wast no time, but to hasten Page  26 away from the said Island, to the intent we might at least be able to surprize and take their Shipping, and by that means make our selves masters of those Seas, in case we could not get the Town, which now we judged almost im∣possible to be done. At Chepillo we took also a Periagua, which we found at anchor before the Island,* and present∣ly we put some men on board her. Our stay here was only of few hours; so that about four of the clock in the evening, which now was coming on, we rwed away from thence, designing to reach Panama before the next morn∣ing; unto which place we had now only seven Leagues to go, it being no farther distant from Chepillo. But before we departed from the said Island, it was judged convenient by our Commanders, for certain reasons, which I could not dive into, to rid their hands of the prisoners which we had taken.* And hereupon orders were given unto our Indians, who they knew would perform them very wil∣lingly, to fight, or rather to murther and slay the said Pri∣soners upon the shoar, and that in the view of the whole Fleet. This they instantly went about to do, being glad of this opportunity to revenge their hatred against their ene∣mies, though in cold blood. But the prisoners, although they had no Arms wherewith to defend themselves, forced their way through those barbarous Indians, in spight of their Lances, Bows, and Arrows, and got into the Woods of the Island, one only man of them being killed. We rowed all night long, though many showers of rain ceased not to fall.

Page  27

CHAP. VII. They arrive within sight of Panama. Are encoun∣tred by Three small men of War. They fight them with only sixty eight men, and utterly de∣feat them, taking two of the said Vessels. De∣scription of that bloody fight. They take seve∣ral Ships at the Isle of Perico before Panama.

THe next morning,* which was on April the 23. 1680. that day being dedicated unto St. George, our Patron of England, we came before Sun-rise within view of the City of Panama, which maketh a pleasant shew unto the Vessels that are at sea from off the shoar. Soon after we saw also the Ships belonging to the said City, which lay at Anchor at an Island called Perico, distant only two Leagues from Panama. On the aforesaid Island are to be seen seve∣ral Store-houses which are built there, to receive the Goods delivered out of the Ships. At that present there rid at Anchor at Perico five great ships, and three pretty big Barks, called Barcos de la Armadilla, or little men of War; the word Armadilla signifying a Little Fleet.* These had been suddainly Manned out, with design to fight us, and prevent any farther attempts we should make upon the City, or Coasts of those Seas. As soon as they espied us, they instantly weighed Anchor, and got under sail, coming directly to meet us, whom they expected very shortly, ac∣cording to the intelligence they had received of our com∣ing. Our two. Periaguas being heavy, could not row so fast as we that were in the Canoas, and hence we were got pretty far before them. In our five Canoas (for so many we were now in company) we had only thirty six men, and these but in a very unfit condition to fight, as Page  28 being tyred with so much rowing, and so few in number, in comparison of the enemy that came against us.* They sailed towards us directly before the wind, insomuch that we feared lest they should run us down before it. Here∣upon we rowed up into the winds eye, as the Seamen term it, and got close to windward of them. Mean while we were doing this, our lesser Periagua came up with us, in which were thirty two more of our Company. So that we were in all sixty eight men that were engaged in the fight of that day;* the King himself being one of our num∣ber, who was in the Periagua aforementioned. In the vessel that was Admiral of these three small men of war, were fourscore and six Biscayners, who have the repute of being the best Mariners, and also the best Souldiers amongst the Spaniards.* These were all Voluntiers, who came de∣signedly to shew their Valour, under the Command of Don Jacinto de Barahona, who was High Admiral of those Seas. In the second were seventy seven Negro's, who were commanded by an old and stout Spaniard, Native of An∣dalusia in Spain, named Don Francisco de Peralta. In the third and last were sixty five Mestizos, or Mulato's, or Tawny∣mores, Commanded by Don Diego de Carabaxal. So that in all they made the number of two hundred twenty & eight men. The Commanders had strict orders given them, and their resolutions were to give quarters to none of the Pi∣rats or Bucaniers. But such bloody Commands as these seldom or never do happen to prosper.

The Canoa of Captain Sawkins, and also that wherein I was,* were much to Leeward of the rest. So that the ship of Don Diego de Carabaxal came between us two, and fired presently on me to Windward, and on him to Leeward, wounding with these broad sides, four men in his Canoa, and one in that I was in. But he paid so dear for his passage between us, that he was not very quick in coming about again and making the same way. For we killed with our first volly of shot, several of his men dead upon the decks. Thus we also got to Windward, as the rest were before. Page  29 At this time the Admiral of the Armadilla, or Little Fleet, came up with us suddainly, scarce giving us time to charge, and thinking to pass by us all with as little or less damage, as the first of his Ships had done. But as it hapned, it fell out much worse with him, for we were so fortunate, as to kill the man at the Helm. So that his Ship ran into the wind, and her Sails lay a back, as is usually said in Marine∣ry. By this means we had time to come all up under his stern, and firing continually into his Vessel, we killed as many as came to the Helm. Besides which slaughter, we cut asunder his main sheet and brace with our shot. At this time the third vessel, in which Captain Peralta was, was coming up to the aid of their General. Hereupon Captain Sawkins, who had changed his Canoa, and was gone into the Periagua, left the Admiral to us four Canoas, (for his own was quite disabled) and met the said Peralta. Be∣tween him & Captain Sawkins the dispute, or fight, was very hot, lying board on board together, and both giving and re∣ceiving death unto each other as fast as they could charge. In the mean while that we were thus engaged, the first ship tackt about, and came up to relieve the Admiral. But we perceiving that, and foreseeing how hard it would go with us, if we should be beaten from the Admirals stern, de∣termined to prevent his design. Hereupon two of our Canoas, to wit, Captain Springers and my own, stood off to meet him. He made up directly towards the Admiral, who stood upon the quarter deck, waving unto him with a Handkerchief so to do But we engaged him so closely, in the middle of his way, that had he not given us the Helm,* and made away from us, we had certainly been on board him. We killed so many of the men, that the vessel had scarce men enough left alive, or unwounded, to carry her off. Yet the wind now blowing fresh, they made shift to get away from us, and hereby save their lives.

The Vessel which was to relieve the Admiral being thus put to slight, we came about again upon the Admiral,* and all together gave a loud hallow, which was answered by Page  30 our men in the Periagua, though at a distance from us. At that time we came so close under the stern of the Admi∣ral, that we wedged up the Rudder; and withal, killed both the Admiral himself, and the chief Pilot of his ship; so that now they were almost quite disabled and dis-heart∣ned likewise,* seeing what a bloody Massacre we had made among them with our shot. Hereupon, two thirds of their men being killed, and many others wounded, they cryed for Quarter, which had several times been offered unto them, and as stoutly denyed until then. Captain Coxon entred on board the Admiral, and took with him Captain Harris, who had been shot through both his Legs, as he boldly adventured up along the side of the ship.* This vessel being thus taken, we put on board her also all the rest of our wounded men, and instantly manned two of our Canoas to go and aid Captain Sawkins, who now had been three times beaten from on board Peralta, such valiant defence had he made. And indeed, to give our Enemies their due, no men in the world did ever act more bravely than these Spaniards.

*Thus coming up close under Peralta's side, we gave him a full volley of shot, and expected to have the like return from him again. But on a suddain we saw his men blown up that were abast the Mast; some of them falling on the deck, and others into the Sea. This disaster was no sooner perceived by their valiant Captain Peralta, but he leaped over board, and in spight of all our shot, got several of them into the ship again; though he was much burnt in both his hands himself. But as one misfortune seldom cometh alone, mean while he was recovering these men to reinforce his ship withal, and renew the fight, another Jar of powder took fire forward, and blew up several others upon the Fore-castle. Among this smoak, and under the opportunity thereof, Captain Sawkins laid them on board, and took the ship. Soon after they were taken, I went on board Captain Peralta, to see what condition they were in. And indeed, such a miserable sight I never saw in my life. Page  31 For not one man there was found, but was either killed, desperately wounded, or horribly burnt with Powder. In∣somuch, that their black skins were turned white in several places, the powder having torn it from their flesh and bones. Having compassionated their misery,* I went after∣wards on board the Admiral, to observe likewise the con∣dition of his Ship and men. Here I saw what did meer∣ly astonish me, and will scarcely be believed by others than our selves who saw it. There were found on board this ship but twenty five men alive, whose number before the fight had been fourscore and six, as was said above. So that three∣score and one, out of so small a number, were destroyed in the Battle. But what is more, of these twenty five men, only eight were able to bear Arms, all the rest being des∣perately wounded, and by their wounds totally disabled to make any resistance, or defend themselves. Their blood ran down the decks in whole streams, and not scarce one place in the ship was found that was free from blood.

Having possessed our selves of these two Armadilla ves∣sels, or Little men of War,* Captain Sawkins asked the pri∣soners, how many Men there might be on board the grea∣test ship that we could see from thence, lying in the Har∣bour of the Island of Perico above-mentioned, as also in the others that were something smaller. Captain Peralta hearing these questions, disswaded him as much as he could from attempting them; saying, that in the biggest alone there were Three hundred and fifty men, and that he would find the rest too well provided for defence against his small number. But one of his men, who lay a dying upon the deck, contradicted him as he was speaking, and told Cap∣tain Sawkins, there was not one man on board any of those ships that were in view; for they had all been taken out of them to fight us in these three vessels called the Armadilla, or Little Fleet. Unto this relation we gave credit, as pro∣ceeding from a dying man; and steering our course unto the Island, we went on board them, and found, as he had said, not one person there. The biggest ship of these, which Page  32 was called La Santissima Trinidad, or the Blessed Trinity, they had set on fire, made a hole in her, and loosened her fore-sail. But we quenched the fire with all speed, and stopt the leak. This being done, we put our wounded men on board her, and thus constituted her for that pre∣sent to be our Hospital.

*Having surveyed our own loss and damages, we found that eighteen of our men had been killed in the fight, and twenty two were wounded. These three Captains against whom we fought, were esteemed by the Spaniards to be the valiantest in all the South Seas. Neither was this repu∣tation undeservedly conferred upon them, as may easily be inferred from the relation we have given of this bloody Engagement. As the third ship was running away from the fight, she met with two more that were coming out to their assistance; but withal, gave them so little encourage∣ment, that they returned back, and dared not engage us. We began the Fight about half an hour after Sun-rise, and by noon had finished the Battle, and quite overcome them. Capt. Peralta, mean while he was our Prisoner, would often break out into admirations of our Valour, and say, surely, We Englishmen were the valiantest men in the whole world, who designed always to fight open, whilst all other Nations invent∣ed all the ways imaginable to barricade themselves, and fight as close as they could. And yet notwithstanding, we killed more of our Enemies than they of us.

*Two days after our Engagement, we buryed Captain Peter Harris, a brave and stout Souldier, and a valiant Eng∣lishman, born in the County of Kent; whose death we ve∣ry much lamented. He dyed of the wounds he received in the Battel, and besides him, only one man more; all the rest of our wounded men recovered. Being now come before Panama, I here enquired of Don Francisco de Peral∣ta, our Prisoner, many things concerning the state and con∣dition of this City, and the Neighbouring Country; and he satisfied me in manner following.

Page  33

CHAP. VIII. Description of the State and Condition of Panama, and the parts adjacent. What Vessels they took while they blocked up the said Port. Captain Coxon with seventy more returneth home. Saw∣kins is chosen in chief.

THe famous City of Panama is situate in the latitude of nine degrees North. It standeth in a deep Bay,* belonging to the South Sea. It is in form round, except∣ing only that part where it runs along the Sea-side. For∣merly it stood four miles more Easterly, when it was ta∣ken by Sir Henry Morgan, as is related in the History of the Bucaniers. But by him then being burnt, and three times more since that time by casualty, they removed it to the place where it now standeth. Yet notwithstanding, some poor people there are still inhabiting at the old Town, and the Cathedral Church is still kept there, the beautiful building whereof maketh a fair shew at a distance, like un∣to that of St. Pauls at London. This new City, of which I now speak, is much bigger than the old one was, and is built for the most part of brick, the rest being built of stone, and tiled. As for the Churches belonging thereunto, they are not as yet finished. These are eight in number, where∣of the chiefest is called Santa Maria. The extent of the City comprehendeth better than a mile and a half in length, and above a mile in breadth. The Houses for the most part are three stories in heighth. It is well walled round about, with two Gates belonging thereunto, excepting on∣ly where a Creek cometh into the City, the which at high-water letteth in Barks, to furnish the Inhabitants with all sorts of Provisions and other Necessaries. Here are al∣ways Page  34 Three hundred of the Kings Souldiers to Garrison the City; besides which number, their Militia of all colours, are one thousand one hundred. But at the time that we arrived there, most of their Souldiers were out of Town; insomuch, that our coming put the rest into great conster∣nation, they having had but one nights notice of our be∣ing in those Seas▪ Hence we were induced to believe, that had we gone ashoar, instead of fighting their ships, we had certainly rendred our selves masters of the place; especial∣ly considering, that all their chief men were on board the Adiral; I mean, such as were undoubtedly the best Soul∣diers. Round about the City, for the space of seven Leagues, more or less, all the adjacent Country is Savana, as they call it in the Spanish Language, that is to say, plain and level ground, as smooth as a sheet; for this is the signifi∣cation of the word Savana. Only here and there is to be seen a small spot of woody Land; and every where this level ground is full of Vacadas, or Beef Stantions, where whole droves of Cows and Oxen are kept, which serve as well as so many Look-outs, or Watch-Towers, to descry if an Enemy is approaching by land. The ground whereon the City standeth, is very damp and moist, which rendreth the place but of bad repute for the concern of health. The water is also very full of worms, and these are much prejudi∣cial to shipping; which is the cause that the Kings Ships lye always at Lima, the Capital City of Peru, unless when they come down to Panama to bring the Kings Plate; which is only at such times, as the Fleet of Galeones cometh from Old Spain to fetch and convey it thither. Here in one night after our arrival, we found Worms of three quarters of an inch in length, both in our Bed-cloaths and other Appa∣rel.

* At the Island of Perico above-mentioned, we seized in all five ships. Of these, the first and biggest was named, as was said before, the Trinidad, and was a great ship, of the burthen of four hundred Tuns.* Her lading consisted of Wine, Sugar, Sweet-meats, (whereof the Spaniards in those Page  35 hot Countreys make infinite use) Skins, and Soap. The second ship was of about Three hundred Tuns burthen, and not above half laded with bars of Iron, which is one of the richest Commodities that are brought into the South Sea. This vessel we burned with the lading in her, because the Spaniards pretended not to want that Commodity, and therefore would not redeem it. The third was laden with Sugar, being of the burthen of one hundred and fourscore Tuns, more or less. This vessel was given to be under the Command of Captain Cook. The fourth was an old ship of sixty Tuns burthen, which was laden with slower of Meal. This ship we likewise burnt with her lading; esteem∣ing both bottom and Cargo, at that time, to be useless unto us. The fifth was a ship of Fifty Tuns, the which, with a Periagua, Captain Coxon took along with him when he left us.

Within two or three days after our arrival at Panama,* Captain Coxon being much dissatisfied with some reflections which had been made upon him by our company, deter∣mined to leave us, and return back to our ships in the Nor∣thern Seas, by the same way he came thither. Unto this effect, he perswaded several of our company, who sided most with him, and had had the chiefest hand in his Electi∣on, to fall off from us, and bear him company in his jour∣ney, or march over-land. The main cause of those re∣flexions, was the backwardness in the last Engagement with the Armadilla; concerning which point, some stick∣ed not to defame, or brand him, with the note of Cowar∣dize. He drew off with him, to the number of threescore and ten of our men, who all returned back with him in the Ship and Periagua above-mentioned, towards the mouth of the River of Santa Maria. In his company also went back the Indian King, Captain Antonio, and Don Andraeas, who being old, desired to be excused from staying any longer with us. However, the King desired we would not be less vigourous in annoying their enemy and ours, the Spaniards, than if he were personally present with us. Page  36 And to the intent we might see how faithfully he did in∣tend to deal with us, he at the same time recommended both his Son and Nephew unto the care of Captain Saw∣kins* who was now our newly chosen General, or Comman∣der in chief, in the absence of Captain Sharp. The two Armadilla Ships which we took in the Engagement we burnt also, saving no other thing of them both, but their Riggng▪ and Sails With them also we burnt a small Bark, which came into the Port laden with Fowls and Poul∣try▪

On Sunday, whih was April the 25th, Captain Sharp with his Bark and Company came in and joyned us again.* Hs absence was occasioned by want of water, which forced him to bear up to the Kings Islands. Being there, he found a new Bark,* which he presently took, and burnt his old one. This vessel did sail excellently well. Within a day or two after the arrival of Captain Sharp, came in likewise the people of Captain Harris, who were still absent. These had also taken another Bark,* and cut down the Masts of their old one by the board, and thus without Masts or Sails turned away the Prisoners they had taken in her. The next day we took in like manner another Bark,* which ar∣rived from Nata, being laden with Fowls, as before. In this Bark we turned away all the meanest of the Prisoners we had on board us.

*Having continued before Panama for the space of ten days, being employed in the affairs afore-mentioned, on May the second we weighed from the Island of Perico, and stood off to another Island, distant two Leagues farther from thence, called Tavoga. On this Island standeth a Town which beareth the same name, and consisteth of a hundred houses, more or less. The people of the Town were all sled, seeing our vessels to arrive. Mean while we were here, some of our men being drunk on shoar, hapned to set ire unto one of the Houses, the which consumed twelve houses more before any could get ashoar to quench it. Unto this Island came several Spanish Merchants from Page  37Panama, and sold us what Commodities we needed, buying also of us much of the goods we had taken in their own vessels. They gave us likewise two hundred pieces of Eight for each Negro we could spare them of such as were our prisoners. From this Island we could easily see all the Vessels that went out, or came into the Port of Panama; and here we took likewise several Barks that were laden with Fowls.

Eight days after our arrival at Tavoga, we took a ship that was coming from Truxillo, and bound for Panama.* In this vessel we found two thousand Jars of Wine, fifty Jars of Gunpowder, and fifty one thousand pieces of Eight. This money had been sent from that City, to pay the Sol∣diers belonging to the Garison of Panama. From the said Prize we had information given us, that there was another ship coming from Lima with one hundred thousand pieces of Eight more; which ship was to sail ten or twelve days after them, and which they said could not be long before she arrived at Panama. Within two days after this intelligence,* we took also another ship laden with Flower from Truxillo, belonging unto certain Indians, Inhabitants of the same place, or thereabouts. This Prize confirmed what the first had told us of that rich ship, and said, as the others had done before, that she would be there in the space of eight or ten days.

Mean while we lay at Tavoga, the President, that is to say, the Governour of Panama,* sent a Message by some Merchants unto us, to know what we came for into those parts? Unto this Message Captain Sawkins made answer, That we came to assist the King of Darien, who was the true Lord of Panama, and all the Country thereabouts.*And that since we were come so far, it was no reason but that we should have some satisfaction. So that if he pleased to send us five hundred pieces of Eight for each man, and one thousand for each Commander, and not any farther to annoy the Indians, but suffer them to use their own power and liberty, as became the true and natural Lords of the Country, that then we would Page  38 desist from all farther Hostilities, and go away peaceably; other∣wise that we should stay there, and get what we could, causing unto them what damage was possible. By the Merchants also that went and came to Panama, we understood, there lived then us Bishop of Panama, one who had been formerly Bi∣shop of Santa Martha, and who was Prisoner unto Captain Sawkins, when he took the said place about four or five years past. The Captain having received this intelligence, sent two loaves of Sugar unto the Bishop as a present. On the next day the Merchant who carryed them, returning to Tavoga, brought unto the Captain a golden ring for a reta∣liation of said present. And withal, he brought a mes∣sage to Captain Sawkins from the President above-mentio∣ned, to know farther of him, since we were Englishmen, from whom we had our Commission, and to whom he ought to complain for the damages we had already done them? Unto this Message Captain Sawkins sent back for an answer, That as yet all his company were not come together; but that when they were come up we would come and visit him at Panama, and bring our Commissions on the muzzles of our Guns, at which time he should read them as plain as the flame of Gunpowder could make them.

*At this Island of Tavoga, Captain Sawkins would sain have stayed longer, to wait for the rich Ship above-men∣tioned, that was coming from Peru; but our men were so importunate for fresh Victuals, that no reason could rule them, nor their own interest perswade them to any thing that might conduce unto this purpose. Hereupon, on May the 15th we weighed Anchor, and sailed from thence unto the Island of Otoque. Being arrived there, we lay by it, mean while our Boat went ashoar, and fetcht off Fowls, and Hogs, and other things necessary for sustenance. Here at Otoque I finished a draught, comprehending from point Garachine, unto the Bay of Panama, &c. Of this I may dare to affirm, that it is in general more correct and true, than any the Spaniards have themselves. For which cause I have here inserted it, for the satisfaction of those that are curious in such things.

Page  39From Otoque we sailed to the Island of Cayboa,* which is a place very famous for the fishery of Pearl thereabouts; and is at the distance of eight Leagues from another place called Puebla Nueba, on the Main. In our way to this Island, we lost two of our Barks, the one whereof had fifteen men in her, and the other seven. Being arrived, we cast anchor at the said Island.

Page  40

[illustration]
The Bay of Panama and Gulf of Ballona

Page  41

CHAP. IX. Captain Sawkins, chief Commander of the Bucani∣ers, is killed before Puebla Nueba. They are repulsed from the said place. Captain Sharp chosen to be their Leader. Many more of their company leave them, and return home over land.

MEan while we lay at Anchor before Cayboa,* our two chiefest Commanders, Captain Sawkins and Captain Sharp, taking with them to the number of threescore men, more or less, went in the Ship of Captain Cook unto the mouth of the River where Puebla Nueba is situated. The day of this action, as I find it quoted in my Journal, was May 22. 1680. When they came unto the Rivers mouth, they put themselves into Canoas, and were piloted up the River towards the Town by a Negroe, who was one of our Prisoners. I was chosen to be concerned in this action, but hapned not to land, being commanded to remain in Cap∣tain Cooks ship, while they went up to assault the Town. But here at Puebla Nueba, the Inhabitants were too well provided for the reception of our party. For at the di∣stance of a mile below the Town, they had cut down great Trees, and laid them cross the River, with design to hinder the ascent of any Boats. In like manner on shoar before the Town it self, they had raised three strong breast-works, and made other things for their defence. Here therefore Captain Sawkins running up to the breast-works, at the head of a few men, was killed; a man who was as valiant and couragious as any could be,* and likewise next unto Captain Sharp, the best beloved of all our company, or the most part thereof. Neither was this love undeserved by him; for we ought justly to attribute unto him the greatest honour Page  42 we gained in our Engagement before Panama, with the Spa∣nish Armadilla, or Little Fleet. Especially, considering that as hath been said above, Captain Sharp was by accident ab∣sent at the time of that great and bloody fight.

We that remained behind on board the Ship of Captain Cook,* carryed her within the mouth of the River of Puebla Nueba, and entred close by the East shoar, which here is crowned with a round hill. Here within two stones cast of shoar, we had four fathom water. Within the Point openeth a very fine and large River, which falleth from a sandy Bay, at a small distance from thence. But as we were getting in, being strangers unto the place, we unwittingly ran our ship on ground, nigh unto a Rock which lyeth on the westward shoar: for the true Channel of the said Ri∣ver is nearer to the East than West shoar. With Captain Sawkins, in the unfortunate assault of this place, there dyed two men more, and three were wounded in the Retreat, which they performed unto the Canoas in pretty good or∣der. In their way down the River, Captain Sharp took a Ship,* whose lading consisted of Indigo, Otto, Manteca, or Butter and Pitch; and likewise burnt two vessels more, as being of no value. With this he returned on board our ships, being much troubled in his mind, and grieved for the loss of so bold and brave a partner in his Adventures, as Sawkins had constantly shewed himself to be. His death was much lamented, and occasioned another party of our men to mutiny, and leave us returning over land, as Cap∣tain Coxon and his company had done before.

Three days after the death of Captain Sawkins, Captain Sharp,* who was now Commander in chief, gave the ship which he had taken in the River of Puebla Nueba, and which was of the burthen of one hundred Tuns, more or less, unto Captain Cook, to Command and Sail in. Order∣ing withal, that the old vessel which he had, should go with those men that designed to leave us; their Mutiny, and our Distraction being now grown very high. Hereupon Cap∣tain Sharp coming on board La Trinidad, the greatest of Page  43 our ships, asked our men in full Councel, who of them were willing to go or stay, and prosecute the design Captain Sawkins had undertaken, which was to remain in the South Sea, and there to make a compleat Voyage; after which, he intended to go home round about America, through the Straights of Magallanes. He added withal, that he did not as yet fear, or doubt in the least, but to make each man who should stay with him, worth one thousand pound, by the fruits he hoped to reap of that Voyage. All those who had remained after the departure of Captain Coxon, for love of Captain Sawkins, and only to be in his company, and under his Conduct, thinking thereby to make their fortunes, would stay no longer, but pressed to depart. Among this number I acknowledge my self to have been one,* as being totally desirous in my mind, to quit those hazardous ad∣ventures, and return homewards in company of those who were now going to leave us. Yet being much afraid and averse to trust my self among wild Indians any farther, I chose rather to stay, though unwilling, and venture on that long and dangerous Voyage. Besides which danger of the Indians, I considered that the Rains were now already up, and it would be hard passing so many Gullies, which of ne∣cessity would then be full of water, and consequently cre∣ate more than one single peril unto the undertakers of that Journey. Yet notwithstanding, sixty three men of our company were resolved to encounter all these hardships, and to depart from us. Hereunto they took their leave of us, and returned homewards, taking with them the Indian Kings Son, and the rest of the Indians for their guides over∣land. They had, as was said above, the ship wherein Cap∣tain Cook sailed to carry them: and out of our Provision as much as would serve for treble their number.

Thus on the last day of May they departed,* leaving us employed about taking in water, and cutting down wood, at the Island of Cayboa afore-mentioned, where this mutiny hapned. Here we caught very good Tortoise, and Red Deer. We killed also Alligators of a very large size, some Page  44 of them being above twenty foot in length. But we could not find but that they were very fearful of a Man, and would fly from us very hastily when we hunted them. This Island lyeth S. S. E. from the mouth of the River a∣bove-mentioned. On the South-East side of the Island is a shoal, or spit of sand, which stretcheth it self the space of a quarter of a League into the Sea. Here therefore, just within this shoal, we anchored in the depth of fourteen fa∣thom water. The Island on this side thereof maketh two great Bays, in the first of which we watered, at a certain pond not distant above the cast of a stone up from the Bay. In this pond, as I was washing my self, and standing under a Manzanilla-tree, a small shower of rain hapned to fall on the tree, and from thence dropped on my skin. These drops caused me to break out all over my body into red spots, of which I was not well for the space of a week af∣ter. Here I eat very large Oysters,* the biggest that ever eat in my life; insomuch, that I was forced to cut them into four pieces; each quarter of them being a good mouth∣ful.

Three days after the departure of the Mutineers, Captain Sharp ordered us to burn the ship that hitherto had sai∣led in, only out of design to make use of the Iron-work belonging to said Vessel. Withal, we put all the Flour that was her lading into the last Prize, taken in the River of Puebla Nova;* and Captain Cook, as was said before, was ordered to command her. But the men belonging to his company would not sail any longer under his command. Hereupon, he quitted his vessel and came on board our Ad∣miral, the great Ship above-mentioned, called La Trinidad, determining to rule over such unruly company no longer. In his place was put one,* whose name was John Cox, an In∣habitant of New-England, who forced Kindred, as was thought, upon Captain Sharp, out of old acquaintance, in this conjuncture of time, only to advance himself. Thus he was made, as it were, Vice-Admiral unto Captain Sharp. The next day three of our Prisoners, viz. an Indian, who Page  45 was Captain of a ship, and two Mulatos, ran away from us, and made their escape.

After this it was thought convenient to send Captain Peralta prisoner in the Admiral,* on board the Ship of Mr. Cox. This was done, to the intent he might not hinder the endeavours of Captain Juan, who was Commander of the Money-ship we took, as was mentioned at the Island of Ta∣voga. For this man had now promised to do great things for us, by Piloting and conducting us unto several places of great Riches. But more especially to Guayaquil, where he said we might lay down our Silver, and lade our vessels with Gold. This design was undertaken by Captain Saw∣kins, and had not the head-strongness of his men brought him to the Island of Cayboa, where he lost his life, he had certainly effected it before now. That night we had such thunder and lightning,* as I never had heard before in all my life. Our Prisoners told us, that in these parts it very of∣ten causeth great damages both by Sea and Land. And my opinion gave me to believe, that our Main-mast re∣ceived some damage in this occasion. The rainy season being now entred, the wind for the most part was at N. W. though not without some calms.

CHAP. X. They depart from the Island of Cayboa unto the Isle of Gorgona, where they Careen their Ves∣sels. Description of this Isle. They resolve to go and plunder Arica, leaving their design of Guayaquil.

HAving got in all things necessary for Navigation,* we were now in a readiness to depart, on Sunday June the 6th 1680. That day we had some rain fell, which Page  46 now was very frequent in all places. About five of the clock in the evening we set sail from the Island of Cayboa, with a small breez, the wind being at S. S. W. Our course was E. S. by E and S. E. having all night a very small, or little wind. The same calmness of weather continued all the next day; insomuch, that we lay and drove only as the current horsed us to N. W.

Little better then a calm we had also the third day of our Navigation. Mean while a current drove us to the West∣ward. About Sun-rising we descryed Quicara, which at that time bore N.W. by W. from us; at the distance of five Leagues▪ more or less. With the rising of the Sun an easie gale of wind sprung up, so that at noon we had altered our bearing, which was then N. by E. being six Leagues di∣stant, and appearing thus, as is underneath demonstrated.

[illustration]
QVICARA Lat. 7 Deg. 40. N.

These are two several Islands, whereof the least is to the Southward of the other.* The Land is a low table Land: these Islands being more than three Leagues in length. About six of the clock that evening, we were nigh ten Leagues distant W.S.W. from them. Much like unto the former weather we had the fourth day of our Sailing, with little wind in the forenoon, and rather less than more in the afternoon. I judged about the middle of the day, we were at the distance of twenty Leagues S. S. W. from the said Islands.

Thursday June the Tenth, we had very small and varia∣ble winds. This day I reckoned that we had made hither∣to Page  47 a S. by E. way, and a S. by W. from our departure; be∣ing driven by a current, according to the observation I made, into the Latitude of six degrees and thirty minutes.

This day we saw much Tortoise floating upon the Sea.* Hereupon, we hoisted out our Boat, and came to one of them, who offered not to stir until she was struck; and even then not to sink to the bottom, but rather to swim away. The sea hereabouts is very full of several sorts of Fish, as Dolphins, Bonitos, Albicores, Mullets, and Old Wives, &c. which came swimming about our ship in whole shoals. The next day, which was Friday, we had likewise very lit∣tle wind; which was no more than we had all Thursday night, with some showers of rain. That day we had an observation, which was six deg. N. latitude. In the even∣ing a fresh wind came up at S. W. our course being S. S. E. On Saturday we had in like manner, about seven in the morning, a fresh breeze at South. So we stood W. S. W. with cloudy weather, and several showers of rain. This day our Spanish prisoners informed us, we must not expect any setled wind,* until we came within the Latitude of three degrees. For all along the Western shoar of these seas, there is little wind; which is the cause that those ships that go from Acapulco unto the Islands called de las Philippinas, do coast along the shoar of California,* until they get into the heighth of forty five degrees; yea sometimes of fifty de∣grees latitude. As the wind varyed, so we tacked several times, thereby to make the best of our way that was possi∣ble to the Southward.

As our Prisoners had informed us,* so we found it by ex∣perience. For on the next day, which was Sunday June the 13th, we had very little wind, and most commonly none, for the space of twenty four hours. 〈…〉 we tryed the current of the sea, and found it very strong to the Eastward. The same day we had much rain, and in the afternoon a small breeze at West, and West South West, but mostly at West. Yet notwithstanding all this calmness of weather, the next day in the morning very early, by a sud∣dain Page  48 gale of wind which arose, we made shift to split our main top-ail. We had all the night before, and that day, continual and incessant showers of rain, and made a S. W. and by south way; seeing all along as we went a multitude of Dolphins, Bonitos, and several other sorts of fish floating upon those Seas, whereof in the afternoon we caught ma∣ny, the weather being now changed from stormy to calm again;* insomuch that we could fish as we sailed along, or rather as we lay tumbling in the calm.

*Tuesday June the 15th, the morning continued calm, as the day efore; and this day also we saw multitudes of fish of several sorts, whereof we caught some for our Ta∣ble as we were wont to do. By an observation which was made this day, we found our selves to be now in the lati∣tude of four degrees and twenty one minutes. At this time the course of our Navigation,* and our whole design was to go and careen our Vessels at the Islands commonly called by the Spaniards, de los Galapagos, that is to say, of the Tortoises, being so denominated from the infinite num∣ber of those Animals swarming and breeding thereabouts. These Islands are situated under the Aequinoctial Line, at the distance of a hundred Leagues more or less from the main Continent of America, in the South Sea. In the af∣ternoon of this day we had a small breeze to push us for∣wards.

June the 16th being Wednesday, we made our way this day,* and for the four and twenty hours last past, E.S. E. with much rain, which ceased not to fall, as in all this Voyage, since our departure from Cayboa. This day likewise we caught several Dolphins, and other sorts of fish. But in the evening we had again a fresh breeze at S. by W. our course being, as was just now said, E. S. E.

*The next day, which was June the 17th, about five in the morning we descryed Land, which appeared all along to be very low, and likewise full of Creeks and Bays. We instantly asked our Pilot what Land that was before us? But he replyed, he knew it not. Hereupon, being doubt∣ful Page  49 of our condition, we called Mr. Cox on board us, who brought Captain Peralta with him. This Gentleman be∣ing asked, presently told us, the Land we saw was the Land of Barbacoa, being almost a wild Country all over. With∣al, he informed us, that to Leeward of us, at the distance of ten Leagues, or thereabouts, did lye an Island called by the name of Gorgona; the which Island, he said,* the Spaniards did shun, and very seldom come nigh unto, by reason of the incessant and continual rains there falling; scarce one day in the year being dry at that place. Captain Sharp having heard this information of Captain Peralta, judged the said Island might be the fittest place for our company to careen at; considering, that if the Spaniards did not frequent it,* we might in all probability lye there undiscryed, and our Enemies the Spaniards, in the mean time might think, that we were gone out of those Seas. At this time it was, that I seriously repented my staying in the South Seas, and that I did not return homewards in company of them that went before us. For I knew, and could easily perceive, that by these delays the Spaniards would gain time, and be able to send advice of our coming to every Port all along the Coast, so that we should be prevented in all, or most of our at∣tempts and designs wheresoever we came. But those of our company, who had got money by the former Prizes of this Voyage, overswayed the others who had lost all their booty at gaming. Thus we bore away for the Island afore∣said of Gorgona, and at the distance of six Leagues and an half, at S.W. I observed it to make the appearance following.

Page  50

[illustration]
GORGONA. Lat. 1.00. N.

On the main Land over against this Island of Gorgona, we were told by our prisoners,* that up a great Laguna, or Lake, is seated an Indian Town, where they have great quan∣tity of sand grains of Gold. Moreover, that five days journey up a River, belonging to the said Laguna, do dwell four Spanish Superintendents, who have each of them the charge of overseeing fifty or sixty Indians, who are em∣ployed in gathering that Gold which slippeth from the chief Collectors, or finders thereof These are at least three∣score and ten, or fourscore Spaniards, with a great number of slaves belonging unto them, who dwell higher up then these four Superintendents, at the distance of twenty five or thirty days Journey on the said River. That once eve∣ry year, at a certain season, there cometh a vessel from Li∣ma, the Capital City of Peru, to fetch the Gold that here is gathered; and withal, to bring unto these people such Ne∣cessaries as they want. By Land it is nothing less than six weeks travel from thence to Lima.

The main Land to windward of this Island is very low, and full of Rivers. All along the Coast it raineth most desperately. The Island is distant from the Continent ••ly the space of four Leagues. Mean while we lay at it, I took the whole circumference thereof, which is accor∣ding to what is here underneath described.

Page  51

[illustration]
Isla. de la Gorgôna or Capt: Sharpes Isle

Page  52Captain Sharp gave unto this Island the name of Sharps Isle, by reason we careened at this place. We anchored on the South side of the Island, at the mouth of a very ine River, which there disgorgeth it self into the Sea. There belong unto this Island about thirty Rivers and Rivolets, all which fall from the Rocks on the several sides of the Island. The whole circumference thereof is about three Lagues and an half round, being all high and mountai∣nous land, excepting only on that side where we cast An∣chor. Here therefore we moor'd our ship in the depth of eighteen or twenty fathom water, and began to unrig the vessel. But we were four or five days space before we could get our Sails dry,* so as to be able to take them from the yards, there falling a shower of rain almost every hour of the day and night. The main Land to the East of the Island, and so stretching Northward, is extream high and towering, and withal perpetually clouded, excepting only at the rising of the Sun, at which time the tops of those hills are clear. From the South side of this Island where we Ankored, as was said above, we could see the low-land of the main; at least a point thereof which lyeth nearest unto the Island. The appearance it maketh, is as it were of Trees growing out of the water.

Friday July the second, as we were heaving down our ship, our Main-mast hapned to crack. Hereupon our Car∣penters were constrained to cut out large fishes, and fish it, as the usual terms of that art do name the thing.

On the next day after the mischance of our Main-mast, we killed a Snake which had fourteen inches in circumfe∣rence,* and was eleven foot in length. About the distance of a League from this Island, runneth a ledge of Rocks, over which the water continually breaketh; the ledge be∣ing about two miles, more or less, in length. Had we an∣cho'd but half a mile more Northerly, we had rid in much smoother water; for here where we were, the wind came n upon us in violent gusts. Mean while we were there, from June the thirtieh, to July the third, we had dry wea∣ther, Page  53 which was esteemed as a rarity by the Spaniards our prisoners. And every day we saw Whales and Grampusses,* who would often come and drive under our ship. We fi∣red at them several times, but our Bullets rebounded from their bodies. Our choice and best provisions here, were Indian Conies, Monkeys, Snakes, Oysters, Cunks, Periwinkles, and a few small Turtle, with some other sorts of good fish. Here in like manner we caught a Sloath,* a beast well deser∣ving that name, given it by the Spaniards, by whom it is called Pereza, from the Latin word Pigritia.

At this Island dyed Josephe Gabriel, a Spaniard,* born in Chile, who was to have been our Pilot unto Panama. He was the same man who had stolen and married the Indian Kings Daughter, as was mentioned above. He had all a∣long been very true and faithful unto us, in discovering se∣veral Plots and Conspiracies of our prisoners, either to get away or destroy us. His death was occasioned by a Ca∣lenture, or Malignant Feaver, which killed him after three days sickness, having lain two days senceless. During the time of our stay at this Island, we lengthned our top-sail-yards, and got up top gallant masts; we made two stay-sails, and refitted our ship very well. But we wanted Provisions extreamly, as having nothing considerable of any sort, but flower and water. Being almost ready to depart, Captain Sharp our Commander, gave us to understand,* he had changed his resolution concerning the design of going to Guayaquil, for he thought it would be in vain to go thi∣ther, considering, that in all this time we must of necessity be descried before now. Yet notwithstanding he himself before had perswaded us to stay. Being very doubtful a∣mong our selves what course we should take, a certain old man, who had long time sailed among the Spaniards, told us, he could carry us to a place called Arica. Unto which Town, he said, all the Plate was brought down from Potosi, Chuquisaca, and several other places within the Land,* where it was dgged out of the Mountains and Mines. And that he doubted not, but that we might get there of purchase Page  54 at least two thousand pound every man. For all the Plate of the South Sea lay there as it were in store; being de∣posited at the said place, until such time as the ships did fetch it away. Being moved with these reasons, and ha∣ving deliberated thereupon, we resolved in the end to go unto the said place. At this Island of Gorgona afore-men∣tioned, we likewise took down our Round-house coach, and all the high carved work belonging to the stern of the ship. For when we took her from the Spaniards before Panama, she was high as any Third-Rate ship in England.

CHAP. XI. The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Gorgona, with design to plunder Arica. They loose one ano∣ther by the way. They touch at the Isle of Plate, or Drakes Isle, where they meet again. Des∣cription of this Isle. Some Memoirs of Sir Francis Drake. An account of this Voyage, and the Coasts all along. They sail as far in a fort-night, as the Spaniards usually do in three months.

*ON Sunday July the 25th, in the afternoon, all things being now in a readiness for our departure, we set sail, and stood away from the Island of Gorgona, or Sharps I••e, with a small breez which served us at N. W. But as the Sn went down that day, so our breez dyed away by degrees. Yet already we could begin to experiment, that our ship sailed much better, since the taking down her round house, and the other alterations which we made in 〈◊〉.

The next day about two of the clock in the morning, Page  55 we had a land breez to help us, which lasted for the space of six hours, more or less. So that at noon we found our selves to be five Leagues and a half distant to the South West from Gorgona. This day the Spaniards our prisoners, told us, in common discourse,* that in most part of this low-land Coast, they find threescore fathom water. In the af∣ternoon we had from land a very strong breez: mean while we continued making short trips off and in. That night we had much rain for the greatest part of the night, which occasioned the next morning, being the third day of our Navigation, to be very cloudy until ten of the clock. About that hour it cleared up, and then we saw the Island of Gorgona at E. N. E. being distant about twelve Leagues more or less from us. We had the wind all this day at S.W. where it continued, seldom varying above two points of the Compass to the Westwards. Night being come, a∣bout ten of the clock, Captain Sharp ordered me to speak unto Captain Cox, and bid him go about and stand off from the shoar, for he feared least Cox should come too nigh unto it. But he replyed, he knew well, that he might stand in until two of the clock.* The next day very early in the morning, we saw him not, the morning being clou∣dy and stark calm. Yet notwithstanding at eight of the clock it cleared up, and neither then could we see him. From hence we concluded, and so it proved, that we had lost him in the obscurity of the night, through his obstina∣cy in standing in too long, and not coming about when we spoke unto him. Thus our Admirals ship was left alone, and we had not the company of Captain Cox any longer in this Voyage, till we arrived at the Isle of Plate, where we had the good fortune to find him again, as shall be mentio∣ned hereafter. The weather being clear this morning, we could see Gorgona, at the distance of at least fifteen or six∣teen Leagues to the E. N. E. All this day it continued calm, till about four in the afternoon, at which time we had a W. S. W. wind, which continued to blow all that night.

Page  56*Thursday July the 29th 1680. This day the wind con∣tinued pretty fresh all day long. About four in the after∣noon we came within sight of the Island del Gallo, which I guessed to be nigh twenty eight Leagues distant from that of Gorgona, the place of our departure S. W. It is about nine Leagues distant to East from the Main. So that the Island with the Main Land S.W. from it appeareth thus.

[illustration]
GALLO. Lat. 2.12. N.

All this day the weather continued clear, and the wind W. S. W.

The next day being July the 30th, the wind blew very fresh and brisk; insomuch, that we were in some fear for the heads of our low Masts, as being very sensible that they were but weak. About three or four in the afternoon, we saw another Island, six or seven Leagues distant from Gallo, called Gorgonilla.* At E. by S. from us it made the appea∣rance which I have here adjoyned. All the Main-Land hereabouts lyeth very low and flat, and is in very many places overflown and drowned every high-water.

[illustration]
GORGONILLA.

On Saturday July the thirty first in the morning, the I∣sland Page  57del Gallo, at E.N.E. being distant about eight Leagues, gave us this appearance.

[illustration]
GALLO, Another Prospect thereof.

The point of Mangroves is a low and level point, run∣ning out S. S. W. This day, and the night before it, we lost by our computation three Leagues of our way.* Which I believe hapned, by reason we stood out too far from the Land, as having stood off all night long.

August the first, which was Sunday, we had a very fresh wind at W. S. W. This was joyned also with several small showers of rain which fell that day. In the mean while we got pretty well to windward with it, by making small trips to and fro; which we performed most commonly, by standing in three glasses, and as many out.

The next day, August the second in the morning,* we came up unto the high-land of San Tiago, where beginneth the high-land of this Coast. We kept at the distance of ten Leagues from it, and making continual short trips, as was mentioned before. The next day likewise we continued to do the same. But the weather was cloudy, and for the most part full of rain.

Wednesday August the fourth,* we continued still turn∣ing in the winds eye, as we had done for two days before. This day in the afternoon we discovered three Hills at E. N. E. of our ship. These Hills make the Land of San Matteo, which giveth this following appearance.

Page  58

[illustration]
San MATTEO.

*All the Coast along hereabouts is high land. That eve∣ning also we saw the Cape of San Francisco. At first this Cape appeared like unto two several Islands. But two hours after, at the distance of twelve Leagues, at S. by W. it looked thus.

[illustration]
Cape of San FRANCISCO.

Thursday August the fifth, we being then about the Cape, it looked very like unto Beachy-head in England. It is full of white Cliffs on all sides. The land turneth off here to the Eastward of the South, and maketh a large and deep Bay, the circumference whereof is full of pleasant Hills. In the bite of the Bay are two high and rocky Islands, the which represent exactly two ships with their Sails full. We were now come out of the rainy Countreys, into a plea∣sant and fair Region, where we had for the most part a clear sky, and dry weather. Only now and then we could here find a small mist, which soon would vanish away. In the mean while, every night a great dew used to fall, which supplied the defect of rain.

The two next days following, we continued plying to Page  59 windward with fair weather, nothing else remarkable hapning in them which might deserve any notice to be ta∣ken thereof.

On Sunday August the eighth, we came close under a wild and mountainous Country. This day likewise we saw Cape Passao,* at the distance of ten Leagues more or less to windward of us. Ever since we came on this side Man∣grove point, we observed a windward Current did run all along as we sailed. Under shoar the Land is full of white Cliffs and Groves; lower towards the pitch of the Cape.

The next day we had both a fair day, and a fresh wind to help us on our Voyage. We observed that Cape Passao maketh three points, between which are two Bays. The Leeward-most of the two, is of the length of three Leagues, and the other of four. Adjoyning to the Bays is seen a pleasant valley. Our prisoners informed us, that North∣ward of these Capes live certain Indians, who sell Maiz, and other Provisions to any ships that happen to come in there. The Cape it self is a continued Cliff, covered with several sorts of shrubs and low bushes. Under these Cliffs lyeth a sandy Bay of the depth of forty feet. The Spa∣niards say, that the wind is always here between the S.S.W. and W.S.W. The Cape representeth with much likely∣ness the brow of an Alligator or Cayman. At South Cape Passao appeareth thus.

[illustration]
Cape PASSAO. Lat. 1.30. S.

Tuesday August the Tenth. This morning the sky was so thick and hasey, that we could not see the high-land; Page  60 though it were just before us, and not altogether two Leagues distant from us. But as soon as it cleared up, we stood in towards the Land, until we came within a mile of the shoar. Here having sounded, we found seven fathom and a half water, under which was a light and clayey ground. The Coast all along is very mountainous, and likewise full of high and towring Cliffs. When we soun∣ded, the Tyde was almost at low-water. Here it ebbeth and floweth nigh four fathom perpendicular. From this Cape the land runneth along S. E. for the space of three or four Leagues, with huge high-land Cliffs, like unto those of Callis over against England. Being past this Cape, high-land South from us, is Cape St. Lawrence.

August the 11th, we found our selves N. N. W. from Monte de Christo,* being a very high and round hill. From thence to windward is seen a very pleasant Country, with spots here and there of woody land; which causeth the Country all over to look like so many enclosures of ripe Corn fields. To Leeward of the said Hill, the Land is all high and hilly, with white Cliffs at the sea-side. The Coast runneth S. W. till it reacheth unto a point of Land, within which is the Port of Manta, as it is called. This Port of Manta,* is nothing else than a settlement of Spa∣niards and Indians together, where ships that want Provi∣sions do call in, and are furnished with several necessaries. About six or seven Leagues to windward of this Port is Cape St. Lawrence, butting out into the Sea, being in form like unto the top of a Church. Monte de Christo giveth this appearance at Sea.

Page  61

[illustration]
Monte de CHRISTO. Lat. 50. S.

The Cape riseth higher and higher from the Port of Manta.* As we sailed along we saw multitudes of Gram∣pusses every day; as also Water-Snakes of divers colours. Both the Spaniards, and Indians too are very fearful of these Snakes, as believing there is no cure for their bitings. At the distance of eight Leagues, or thereabouts, to Leeward of Cape St. Laurence, it appeareth thus.

[illustration]
Cape St. LAVRENCE. Lat. 55. S.

This day before night we came within sight of Manta. Here we saw the Houses of the Town belonging to the Port, which were not above twenty or thirty Indian houses, lying under the windward and the Mount. We were not willing to be descryed by the Inhabitants of the said place, and hereupon we stood off to sea again.

On Thursday August the 12th, in the morning, we saw the Island of Plate at S. W. at the distance of five Leagues more or less. It appeared unto us to be an even land.* Ha∣ving made this Island, we resolved to go thither and resit our rigging, and get some Goats which there run wild up Page  62 and down the Country. For as was said before, at this time we had no other provision than flour and water. The Island it self is indifferent high land, and off at sea, looketh thus, as is here described.

[illustration]
Isle of PLATE. Lat. 2.42. S.

But the high-land of Cape Passao, of which we have spo∣ken before,* at the distance of fifteen Leagues to North, giveth in several hamocks this appearance.

[illustration]
High-land of Cape PASSAO.

*The Land of Cape Lorenzo is all white Cliffs; the head of the Cape running N. and S. This day several great Whales came up to us, and dived under our ship. One of these Whales followed our ship, from two in the afternoon till dark night.

*The next morning very early, about six of the clock, we came under the aforesaid Isle of Plate, and here unex∣pectedly, to our great joy, we found at anchor the ship of Captain Cox, with his whole company, whom we had lost at sea for the space of a whole fortnight before. We found they had reached this Island, and had been there at an an∣chor four days before us, being now just ready to depart from thnce. About seven we came to an anchor, and then the other vessel sent us a live Tortoise, and a Goat, to feast upon that day; telling us withal, of great store of Tortoise to be found ashoar upon the Bays; and of much Page  63 fish to be caught hereabouts.* The Island is very steep on all sides; insomuch, that there is no landing, but only on the N. E. side thereof; where is a Gully, nigh unto which we anchored in twelve fathom water. Here at the di∣stance of a furlong, or little more from the shoar, as you go to land, you will see on the left side hill a Cross still standing, being there erected in former times. No Trees are to be found on the whole Island, but only low shrubs, on which the Goats feed; which Cattle is here very nu∣merous. The shoar is bold and hard; neither is there any water to be found upon it, excepting only on the S. W. side of the Island, where likewise it cannot be come at, as lying so much enclosed by the Rocks, and too great a Sea hindring the approach unto it in boats.

This Island received it's name from Sir Francis Drake,* and his famous Actions. For here it is reported by tradi∣tion, that he made the dividend, or sharing of that vast quantity of Plate, which he took in the Armada of this Sea, distributing it unto each man of his company by whole bowles full. The Spaniards affirm unto this day, he took at that time twelve score Tuns of Plate, and six∣teen Bowles of Coyned Money a man; his number being then forty five men in all. Insomuch, that they were for∣ced to heave much of it over board, because his ship could not carry it all. Hence was this Island called by the Spa∣niards themselves the Isle of Plate, from this great Divi∣dend, and by us Drakes Isle.

All along as we sailed,* we found the Spanish Pilots to be very ignorant of the Coasts. But they plead thus much for their ignorance, that the Merchants their employers, either of Mexico, Lima, Panama, or other parts, will not entrust one penny worth of Goods on that mans Vessel that corketh her, for fear lest she should miscarry. Here our Prisoners told us likewise, that in the time of Oliver Cromwel, or the Common-wealth of England,* a certain ship was fitted out of Lima, with seventy brass Guns, ha∣ving on board her no less thn thirty Millions of Dollers, Page  64 or pieces of Eight. All which vast sum of money was given by the Merchants of Lima, and sent as a Present unto our gracious King or rather his Father) who now reigneth, to supply him in his Exile and distress. But that this great and rich ship was lost by keeping the shoar along in the Bay of Manta above-mentioned, or thereabouts. What truth there may be in this History, I cannot easily tell. At least, it seemeth to me as scarce deserving any credit.

*At this Island we took out of Mr. Cox's ship the old Moor, (for of that Nation he was) who pretended he would be our Pilot unto Arica. This was done, lest we should have the misfortune of loosing the company of Cox's ves∣sel, as we had done before, our ship being the biggest in burthen, and having the greatest number of men. Captain Peralta admired oftentimes that we were gotten so far to windward in so little space of time; whereas they had been, he said, many times three or four months in reaching to this distance from our departure. But their long and te∣dious Voyages, he added, were occasioned by their keep∣ing at too great a distance from the shoar. Moreover, he told us, that had we gone unto the Islands of Galapagos, as we were once determined to do, we had met in that Voy∣age with many Calms, and such Currents, that many ships have by them been lost, and never heard of to this day. This Island of Plate is about two Leagues in length, and very full of both deep and dangerous Bays, as also such as we call Gully's in these parts. The circumference and description of the said Island is exactly thus.

Page  65

[illustration]
S. Fran: Drakes Isle or Isla de la Plata

Page  66*We caught at this Island, and salted good number of Goats and Tortoises. One man standing here on a little Bay, in one day turned seventeen Tortoises; besides which number our Mosquito strikers brought us in several more. Captain Sharp our Commander shewed himself very in∣genious in striking them, he performing it as well as the Tortoise strikers themselves. For these creatures here are so little fearful, that they offer not to sink from the fisher∣men, but lye still until such time as they are struck. But we experimented that the Tortoises on this side, were not so large nor so sweet unto the tast, as those on the North side of the Island. Of Goats we have taken, killed, and salted above a hundred in a day, and that without any la∣bour. In the mean while we stayed here, we made a square main top-sail yard. We cut also six foot of our bolt-sprit, and three foot more of our head. Most of the time that we remained here, we had hasey weather. Only now and then the Sun would happen to break out, and then to shine so hot, that it burnt the skin of the necks of several of our men. As for me, my lips were burnt in such manner, that they were not well in a whole week after.

Page  67

CHAP. XII. Captain Sharp and his company depart from the Isle of Plate, in prosecution of their Voyage towards Arica. They take two Spanish Vessels by the way, and learn intelligence from the enemy. Eight of their company destroyed at the Isle of Gallo. Tediousness of this Voyage, and great hardship they endured. Description of the Coast all a∣long, and their sailings.

HAving taken in at the Isle of Plate,* what Provisions and other Necessaries we could get, we set sail from thence on Tuesday the 17th of August, 1680. in prosecu∣tion of our Voyage and designs above-mentioned, to take and plunder the vastly rich Town of Arica. This day we sailed so well, and the same we did several others afterwards, that we were forced to lye by several times, besides reising our top-sails, to keep our other ship company, least we should loose her again.

The next morning about break of day,* we found our selves to be at the distance of seven or eight Leagues to the Westward of the Island from whence we departed, standing W. by S. with a S. by W. wind. About noon that day we had laid the land. After dinner the wind came at S.S.W. at which time we were forced to stay more than once for the other vessel belonging to our company.

On the following day we continued in like manner a west course all the day long. Sometimes this day the wind would change, but then in a quarter of an hour it would return to S.S. W. again as before. Hereabouts where we now were, we observed great riplings of the Sea.

Page  68August the twentieth, yesterday in the afternoon about six of the clock, we stood in S. E. But all night and all this day, we had very small winds. We found still that we gained very much of the small ship, which did not a little both perplex and hinder us in our course.*

The next day likewise we stood in S. E. by S. though with very little wind, which sometimes varyed, as was men∣tioned above. That day I finished two Quadrants; each of which were two foot and a half radius.* Here we had in like manner, as hath been mentioned on other days of our sailings, very many Dolphins, and other sorts of fish swimming about our ship.

On the morning following we saw again the Island of Plate at NE. of our ship, giving us this appearance at that distance of Prospect.

[illustration]
Isle of PLATE.

The same day at the distance of six Leagues more or 〈◊〉 from the said Island, we saw another Island, called 〈◊〉* Ths 〈◊〉 lyeth close in by the Main-land. In the 〈◊〉 we observed it to bare E. N. E. from us. Our 〈…〉 by S. and had the wind at SW. by S. This 〈…〉 we found that our lesser ship was full a great hindrance to our sailing, as being forced to lye by, and stay for her two or three hours every day. We experi∣mented likewise, that the farther from shoar we were, the less wind we had all along; and that under the shoar we were always sure of a 〈◊〉 gale, though not so favourable unto us as we could wish it to be. Hitherto we had used to stand 〈◊〉 forty Leagues, and yet notwithstanding, in the sae of six days, we had not got above ten Leagues on our voyage, from the place of our departure.

Page  69August the twenty third, this day the wind was S. W. by S. and S. S. W. In the morning we stood off. The Island Solango, at N.E. by N. appeareth thus:

[illustration]
Isle of SOLANGO.

At S. by W. and about six Leagues distance from us,* we descryed a long and even hill. I took it to be an Island, and conjectured it might be at least eight Leagues distant from the Continent. But afterwards we found it was a point of Land joyning unto the Main, and is called Point St. Helena, being continued by a piece of Land which lyeth low, and in several places is almost drowned from the sight; so that it cannot be seen at two Leagues distance. In this low-land the Spaniards have convenience for ma∣king Pitch, Tar, Salt, and some other things, for which purpose they have several houses here, and a Fryar, who serveth them as their Chaplain. From the Island of Solan∣go, unto this place, are reckoned eleven leagues, more or less. The Land is hereabouts indifferent high, and is like∣wise full of Bays. We had this day very little wind to help us in our Voyage, excepting what blasts came now and then in snatches. These sometimes would prove pret∣ty fair unto us, and allow us for some little while a South course. But our chiefest course was S.E. by S. The point of St. Helen at South half East, and about six Leagues di∣stance, giveth exactly this appearance as followeth.

Page  70

[illustration]
Punta de Santa HELENA.

Here we found no great current of the Sea to move any way. At the Isle of Plata, afore described, the Sea ebbeth and sloweth nigh thirteen foot perpendicular. About four Leagues to Leeward of this Point is a deep Bay, ha∣ving a Key at the mouth of it, which taketh up the bet∣ter part of its wideness. In the deepest part of the Bay on shoar, we saw a great smoak, which was at a Village be∣longing to the Bay; unto which place the people were re∣moved from the Point above-mentioned. This afternoon we had a small Westerly wind, our course being S. S. W. Hereabouts it is all along a very bold shoar. At three of the clock after noon, we tackt about to clear our selves of the Point.* Being now a little way without the Point, we espied a sail, which we conceived to be a Bark. Hereupon, we hoisted out our Canoa, and sent in pursuit of her, which made directly for the shoar. But the sail proved to be no∣thing else, then a pair of Bark-Logs, which arriving on shoar, the men spread their sail on the sand of the Bay to dry. At the same time there came down upon the shoar an Indian on horseback, who hallowed unto our Canoa, which had followed the Logs. But our men fearing to discover who we were, in case they went too near the shoar, l••t the design and returned back unto us. In these parts the Indians have no Canoas,* nor any wood indeed that may be thought fit to make them of. Had we been descryed by these poor people, they would in all probability have been very fearful of us. But they offered not to stir, which gave us to understand, they knew us not. We could perceive from the ship a great path leading unto the Hills. So that Page  71 we believed this place to be a look-out, or watch-place, for the security of Guayaquil. Between four and five we dou∣bled the point, and then we descryed the Point Chandy, at the distance of six Leagues S. S. E. from this point. At first sight it seemed like unto a long Island, but withal, lower then that of St. Helena.

Tuesday August the 24th,* this day at noon we took the other ship wherein Captain Cox sailed into a Tow, she be∣ing every day a greater hinderance than before unto our Voyage. Thus about three in the afternoon we lost sight of land, in standing over for Cape Blanco. Here we found a strong current to move unto the S. W. The wind was at S.W. by S. our course being S. by E. At the upper end of this Gulf, which is framed by the two Capes afore∣mentioned, standeth the City of Guayaquil,* being a very rich place, and the Embarcadero, or Sea-port unto the great City of Quito. Unto this place likewise, many of the Mer∣chants of Lima do usually send the Money they design for Old Spain in Barks, and by that means save the Custom that otherwise they should pay unto the King by carrying it on board of the Fleet. Hither cometh much Gold from Quito, and very good and strong broad-cloath, together with Images for the use of the Churches, and several o∣ther things of considerable value. But more especially Cacao-nut, whereof Chocolate is made,* which is supposed here to be the best in the whole Universe. The Town of Guayaquil consisteth of about one hundred and fifty great houses, and twice as many little ones. This was the Town unto which Captain Sawkins intended to make his Voyage, as was mentioned above. When ships of greater burthen come into this Gulf, they anchor without Lapina, and then put their lading into lesser Vessels to carry it un∣to the Town. Towards the evening of this day, a small breez sprung up, varying from point to point. After which, about nine of the clock at night we tacked about, and stood off to Sea, W. by N.

Page  72*As soon as we had tackt, we hapned to espy a Sail N.N.E. from us. Hereupon, we instantly cast off our other Vessel, which we had in a Tow, and stood round about after them. We came very near unto the vessel before they saw us, by reason of the darkness of the night. As soon as they espied us, they immediately clapt on a wind, and sailed very well before us; insomuch, that it was a pretty while before we could come up with them, and within call. We halled them in Spanish, by means of an Indian prisoner, and commanded them to lower their top-sails. They an∣swered, they would soon make us to lower our own. Here∣upon, we fired several Guns at them, and they as thick at us again with their Harquibusses. Thus they fought us for the space of half an hour, or more, and would have done it longer, had we not killed the man at the Helm; after whom, none of the rest dared to be so hardy as to take his place. With another of our shot we cut in pieces and disabled their main-top halliards. Hereupon, they cryed out for Quarter, which we gave them, and entred their ship. Being possessed of the Vessel, we found in her five and thirty men: of which number twenty four were Natives of Old Spain. They had one and thirty fire arms on board the ship for their defence. They had not fought us, as they declared afterwards, but only out of a bravado, having promised on shoar so to do, in case they met us at Sea. The Captain of this Vessel was a person of Quali∣ty, and his Brother, since the death of Don Jacinto de Ba∣rahona, killed by us in the Engagement before Panama, was now made Admiral of the Sea Armada. With him we took also in this Bark, five or six other persons of Qua∣lity. They did us in this fight, though short, very great damage in our Rigging, by cutting it in pieces. Besides which, they wounded two of our men. And a third man was wounded by the negligence of one of our own men, occasioned by a Pistol which went off unadvisedly. About eleven of the clock this night we stood off to the West.

Page  73The next morning about break of day,* we hoisted out our Canoa, and went aboard the Bark which we had taken the night before. We transported on board our own ship more of the Prisoners taken in the said vessel, and began to examine them, to learn what intelligence we could from them. The Captain of the vessel, who was a very civil and meek Gentleman, satisfyed our desires in this point very exactly, saying unto us: Gentlemen, I am now your pri∣soner at War by the over-ruling providence of fortune; and moreover, am very well satisfyed that no money whatsoever can procure my ransom, at least for the present at your hands. Hence I am perswaded, it is not my interest to tell you a Lye; which if I do, I desire you to punish me as severely as you shall think fit. We heard of your taking and destroying our Ar∣madilla, and other ships at Panama, about six weeks after that Engagement, by two several Barks which arrived here from thence. But they could not inform us whether you designed to come any farther to the Southward; but rather, desired we would send them speedily all the help by Sea that we could. Hereupon, we sent the noise and rumour of your being in these Seas, by land unto Lima, desiring they would expedite what succours they could send to joyn with ours. We had at that time in our Harbour two or three great ships, but all of them very unfit to sail. For this reason, at Lima, the Vice-Roy of Peru pressed three great Merchant ships, into the biggest of which he put Fourteen brass guns; into the second, Ten; and in the other Six. Vnto these he added two Barks, and put seven hundred and fifty Souldiers on board them all. Of this number of men they landed eightscore at Point St. Helena; all the rest being carryed down to Panama, with design to fight you there. Besides these Forces, two other men of War, bigger than the afore-mentioned, are still lying at Lima, and fitting out there in all speed to follow and pursue you. One of these men of war is equipped with thirty six brass guns, and the o∣ther with thirty. These ships, beside their complement of sea∣men, have four hundred Souldiers added unto them by the Vice-Roy. Another man of war belonging to this number, Page  74 and lesser than the afore-mentioned, is called the Patache. This ship consisteth of twenty four guns, and was sent to Arica to fetch the Kings Plate from thence. But the Vice-Roy ha∣ving received intelligence of your exploits at Panama, sent for this ship back from thence with such hast, that they came away and left the Money behind them. Hence the Patache now lyeth at the Port of Callao, ready to sail on the first occa∣sion, or news of your arrival thereabouts: they having for this purpose sent unto all parts very strict orders to keep a good look-out on all sides, and all places along the Coasts. Since this, from Manta they sent us word, that they had seen two Ships at sea pass by that place. And from the Goat Key al∣so we heard, that the Indians had seen you, and that they were assured, one of your vessels was the ship called la Trinidad, which you had taken before Panama, as being a ship very well known in these Seas. From hence we concluded that your de∣sign was to ply, and make your Voyage thereabouts. Now this Bark wherein you took us prisoners being bound for Panama, the Governour of Guayaquil sent us out before her departure, if possible to discover you. Which if we did, we were to run the Bark on shoar and get away, or else to fight you with these Souldiers and fire arms that you see. As soon as we heard of your being in these Seas, we built two Forts, the one of six Guns, and the other of four, for the defence of the Town. At the last Muster taken in the Town of Guayaquil, we had there eight hundred and fifty men, of all colours; but when we came out, we left only two hundred men that were actually under Arms. Thus ended the Relation of that worthy Gentleman. About noon that day we unrigged the Bark which we had taken, and after so doing sunk her. Then we stood S.S.E. and afterwards S. by W. and S.S.W. That evening we saw Point St. Helena at North half East, at the distance of nine Leagues more or less.

The next day, being August the 26th, in the morning we stood S.* That day we cryed out all our pillage, and found that it amounted unto 3276 Pieces of Eight, which was accordingly divided by shares amongst us. We also Page  75 punished a Fryar,* who was Chaplain to the Bark afore∣mentioned, and shot him upon the deck, casting him over∣board before he was dead. Such cruelties though I ab∣horred very much in my heart, yet here was I forced to hold my tongue and contradict them not, as having not authority to oversway them. About ten of the clock this morning we saw Land again, and the Pilot said we were sixteen Leagues to leeward of Cabo Blanco. Hereup∣on we stood off and in, close under the shoar; the which all appeared to be barren land.

The morning following we had very little wind;* so that we advanced but slowly all that day. To windward of us we could perceive the Continent to be all high land, being whitish clay, full of white Cliffts. This morning in common discourse, our Prisoners confessed unto us, and acknowledged the destruction of one of our little Barks, which we lost in our way to the Island of Cayboa. They stood away, as it appeared by their information, for the Goat-key, thinking to find us there, as having heard Cap∣tain Sawkins say, that he would go thither. On their way they hapned to fall in with the Island of Gallo, and understanding its weakness by their Indian Pilot, they ventured on shoar, and took the place, carrying away three white women in their company. But after a small time of Cruising, they returned again to the aforesaid Island, where they stayed the space of two or three days: after which time they went out to sea again. Within three or four days they came to a little Key four Leagues distant from this Isle. But mean while they had been out and in thus several times, one of their prisoners made his escape unto the Main, and brought off from thence fifty men with fire-arms. These placing themselves in Ambuscade, at the first volly of their shot, they killed six of the seven men that belonged unto the Bark. The other man that was left took quarter of the enemy; and he it was that discovered unto them our design upon the Town of Guay∣aquil. By an observation which we made this day, we Page  76 found our selves to be in the latitude of 3 d. 50. S.* At this time our prisoners told us, there was an Embargo laid on all the Spanish ships, commanding them not to stir out of the Ports, for fear of their falling into our hands at Sea.

Saturday August the 28th, this morning we took out all the water,* and most part of the flower that was in Cap∣tain Cox's vessel. The people in like manner came on board our ship. Having done this, we made a hole in the ves∣sel, and left her to sink, with a small old Canoa at her stern. To Leeward of Manta, a League from shoar, in eighteen fathom water, there runneth a great current outwards. About eleven in the forenoon we weighed Anchor, with a wind at W.N. W. turning it out. Our number now in all being reckoned, we found our selves to be one hundred and forty men, two boys, and fifty five prisoners, being all now in one and the same bottom.* This day we got six or seven Leagues in the winds eye.

All the day following we had a very strong S. S. W. wind;* insomuch, that we were forced to sail with two riffs in our main-top sail, and one also in our fore-top sail. Here Captain Peralta told us, that the first place which the Spaniards settled in these parts, after Panama, was Tumbes, a place that now was to Leeward of us, in this Gulph where we now were.* That there a Priest went ashoar with a Cross in his hand, while ten thousand Indians stood gazing at him. Being landed on the strand, there came out of the woods two Lyons; that he laid the Cross gent∣ly on their backs, and they instantly fell down and wor∣shipped it: and moreover, that two Tigres following them, did the same; whereby these Animals gave unto the Indians to understand the excellency of the Christian Religion, which they soon after embraced. About four in the eve∣ning we came abreast the Cape, which is the highest part of all. The Land hereabouts appeareth to be barren and rocky.* At three Leagues distance East from us, the Cape shewed thus:

Page  77

[illustration]
Cape BLANCO.

Were it not for a windward Current which runneth un∣der the shoar hereabouts, it were totally impossible for any ships to get about this Cape; there being such a great current to Leeward in the offing. In the last Bark which we took, of which we spoke in this Chapter, we made Prisoner one Nicolas Moreno, a Spaniard by Nation, and who was esteemed to be a very good Pilot of the South Sea. This man did not cease continually to praise our ship for her sailing, and especially for the alterations we had made in her. As we went along, we observed many Bays to lye between this Cape and Point Parina, of which we shall soon make mention hereafter.

In the night the wind came about to S. S.E. and we had a very stiff gale of it.* So that by break of day the next morning, we found our selves to be about five Leagues di∣stance to windward of the Cape afore mentioned. The Land hereabouts maketh three or four several Bays, and groweth lower and lower, by how much the nigher we come unto Punta Parina. This Point sheweth it self at first sight thereof like unto two Islands. Between four and five of the clock that evening, we were West from the said Point.

The next day likewise, being the last day of August, the wind still continued S. S. E. as it had done the whole day before. This day we thought it convenient to stand far∣ther out to sea, for fear of being descryed at Paita,* which Page  78 now was not very far distant fromus. The morning proved to be hasey. But about eleven we espied a Sail, which stood then just as we did, E. by S. Coming nearer unto it, by degrees we found her to be nothing else than a pair of Bark-logs under a sail, which were going that way. Our Pilot advised us not to meddle with those Logs, nor mind them in the least,* for it was very doubtful whether we should be able to come up with them or not; and then by giving chace unto them, we should easily be descryed and known to be the English Pirates, as they called us. These Bark-logs sail excellently well for the most part, and some of them are of such a bigness, that they will carry two hun∣dred and fifty packs of Meal from the Valleys unto Pana∣ma, without wetting any of it. This day by an observation made, we found our selves to be in four degrees fifty five Latitude South. Point Parina at N.E. by E. and at the di∣stance of six Leagues more or less, giveth this following appearance.

[illustration]
Punta PARINA.

Page  79At the same time la Silla de Paita bore from us S.E. by E. being distant only seven or eight Leagues. It had the form of a high Mountain, and appeared thus unto us.

[illustration]
La Silla de PAITA.

The Town of Paita it self is situated in a deep Bay, a∣bout two Leagues to Leeward of this Hill. It serveth for an Embarcadero, or Port Town, unto another great place which is distant from thence about thirteen Leagues higher in the Country, and is called Piura, being seated in a very barren Country.*

On Wednesday the first of September, our course was S. by W. The midnight before this day we had a land-wind that sprung up. In the afternoon La Silla de Paita, at the distance of seven Leagues, at E. by N. appeareth thus.

[illustration]
La Silla de PAITA.

All along hereabouts is nothing but barren land, as was said before. Hereabouts likewise for three or four days last past, we observed along the Coasts many Seales.

That night as we sailed, we saw something that appea∣red unto us to be as it were a light. And the next morn∣ing Page  80 we espyed a sail,* from whence we judged the light had come. The vessel was at the distance of six Leagues from us, in the winds eye, and thereupon we gave her chace. She stood to windward as we did. This day we had an observation, which gave us the Lat. 5 d. 30 S. At night we were about four Leagues to Leeward of her; but so great a Mist fell, that we suddainly lost sight of her. At this time the weather was as cold with us as in England in November. Every time we went about with our ship, the other did the like.* Our Pilot told us, that this ship set forth from Guayaquil eleven days before they were taken. And that she was laden with Rigging, Woollen, and Cot∣ton Cloath, and other Manufactures made at Quito. More∣over, that he had heard that they had spent a Mast, and had put into Paita to resit it.

The night following; they shewed us several lights through their negligence, which they ought not to have done, for by that means we steered directly after them. The next morning she was more than three Leagues in the winds eye distant from us. Had they suspected us, it could not be doubted, but they would have made away to∣wards the Land; but they seemed not to fly nor stir for our chace. The Land here all along is level, and not ve∣ry high. The weather was hasey, so that about eleven of the clock that morning we lost sight of her. At this time we had been for the space of a whole week,* at an allow∣ance of only two draughts of water each day, so scarce were Provisions with us. That afternoon we saw the ves∣sel again, and at night we were not full two Leagues distant from her, and not more than half a League to Leeward. We made short trips all the night long.

On Saturday, September the Fourth, about break of day, we saw the ship again, at the distance of a League, more or less, and not above a mile to windward of us. They stood out assoon as they espied us, and we stood directly after them. Having pursued them for several hours, about four of the clock in the Afternoon, we came up within the di∣stance Page  81 of half our small Arms shot, to windward of them. Hereupon they perceiving who we were, presently lower'd all their Sails at once, and we cast dice among our selves for the first entrance. The lot sell to larboard; so that twenty men belonging to that watch, entred her. In the Vessel were found Fifty packs of Cacao-nut, such as Choco∣late is made of, many packs of Raw-silk, Indian cloth,* and Thred-stockings; these things being the principal part of her Cargo. We stood out S. W. by S. all the night follow∣ing.

The next day being come, we transported on board our ship the chiefest part of her lading. In her hold we found some Rigging, as had been told us by Nicholas Moreno our Pilot, taken in the former Vessel off of Guayaquil: but the greatest part of the Hold was full of Timber. We took out of her also some Osenbriggs, of which we made Top-gallant sails, as shall be said hereafter. It was now nine∣teen days, as they told us, since they set sail from Guyaquil; and then they had onely heard there of our Exploits be∣fore Panama, but did not so much as think of our coming so far to the Southward, which did not give them the least suspicion of us, though they had seen us for the space of two or three days before at Sea, and always steering after them; otherwise they had made for the land, and endea∣voured to escape our hands.

The next morning likewise we continued to take in the remaining part of what goods we desired out of our Prize.* When we had done, we sent most of our Prisoners on board the said vessel, and left only their sore-mast standing, all the rest being cut down by the board. We gave them a fore-sail to sail withal; all their own water, and some of our flour to serve them for Provisions; and thus we tur∣ned them away, as not caring to be troubled or encum∣bred with too many of their company. Notwithstanding we detained still several of the chiefest of our prisoners. Such were Don Thomas de Argandona, who was Comman∣der of the vessel taken before Guayaquil; Don Christoval,Page  82 and Don Baltazar, both Gentlemen of Quality taken with him; Captain Peralta, Captain Juan Moreno, the Pilot, and twelve slaves, of whom we intended to make good use, to do the drudgery of our ship. At this time I recko∣ned that we were about the distance of thirty five Leagues, little more or less from Land. Moreover, by an observa∣tion made this day, we found Lat. 7. d. 1. S. Our plun∣der being over, and our Prize turned away, we sold both Chests, Boxes, and several other things at the Mast, by the voice of a Cryer.

On the following day we stood S. S. W. and S. W. by S. all day long.* That day one of our company dyed, named Robert Montgomery, being the same man who was shot by the negligence of one of our own men with a Pistol through the leg, at the taking of the vessel before Guaya∣quil, as was mentioned above. We had an observation al∣so this day, by which we now found Lat. 7. d. 26. S. On the same day likewise we made a dividend, and shared all the booty taken in the last Prize.* This being done, we hoisted into our ship the Lanch which we had taken in her, as being useful unto us. All these days last past, it was ob∣served,* that we had every morning a dark cloud in the sky; the which in the North Sea would certainly fore∣tell a storm; but here it always blew over.

Wednesday September the eighth in the morning, we threw our dead man above-mentioned into the Sea,* and gave him three French Volleys for his Funeral-Ceremony. In the night before this day, we saw a light belonging to some vessel at sea. But we stood away from it, as not de∣siring to see any more sails to hinder us in our voyage to∣wards Arica, whither now we were designed. This Light was undoubtedly from some ship to Leeward of us; but on the next morning we could descry no sail. Here I judged we had made a S. W. by S. way from Paita, and by an observation found 8. d. 00▪ S.

Page  83

CHAP. XIII. A continuation of their long and tedious Voyage to Arica, with a description of the Coasts and Sailings thereunto. Great hardship they endu∣red for want of Water and other Provisions. They are descryed at Arica, and dare not land there; the Country being all in Arms before them. They retire from thence, and go unto Puerto de Hilo, close by Arica. Here they land, take the Town with little or no loss on their side, refresh themselves with Provisions; but in the end are cheated by the Spaniards, and forced shamefully to retreat from thence.

ON September the Ninth we continued still to make a S. W. by S. way, as we had done the day before. By a clear and exact observation taken the same day, we found now Lat. 8. d. 12 S. All the twenty four hours last past afforded us but little wind,* so that we advanced but as lit∣tle on our Voyage, and were forced to tack about every four or five hours.

The next day by another observation taken, we found then Lat. 9 d. 00. Now the weather was much warmer than before;* and with this warmth we had small and mi∣sty rains that frequently fell. That evening a strong breeze came up at S. E. by E.

The night following likewise we had a very great dew that fell, and a fresh wind continued to blow. At this time we were all hard at work to make small sails of the Osenbrigs we had taken in the last Prize,* as being much Page  84 more convenient for its lightness. The next morning be∣ing Saturday, September the 11th, we lay by to mend our rigging. These last twenty four hours we had made a S. by W. way. And now we had an observation that gave us Lat. 10. D. 9. S. I supposed this day that we were West from Cosmey about the distance of eighty nine leagues and an half.

September the 12th. This day we reckoned a S. S. W. way; and that we had made thirty four leagues and three quarters or thereabouts. Also that all our Westing from Pa••a was eighty four leagues. We supposed our selves now to be in Lat. 11. D. 0. S. But the weather being ha∣sey, no observation could be made.

September the 13th, yesterday in the Afternoon we had a great Eclipse of the Sun,* which lasted from one of the clock till three after dinner. From this Eclipse I then took the true judgment of our longitude from the Canary I∣slands, and found my self to be 285 D. 35. in Lat. 11 D. 45 S. The wind was now so fresh, that we took in our Top sails; making a great way under our Courses and Sprit-sail.

September the 14th we had a cloudy morning, which continued so all the first part thereof.* About eight it clea∣red up, and then we set our fore-top-sail; and, about noon, our main-top-sail likewise. This was observable, that all this great wind precedent did not make any thing of a great Sea. We reckoned this day that we had run by a S. W. by W. way, twenty six Leagues, and two thirds.

The next day, in like manner, we had close weather, such as the former morning. Our reckoning was Twenty four Leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by W. way. But, by observation made, I found my self to be 23 D. South∣ward of my reckoning, as being in the Lat. of 15 D. 17 South.

On the 16th, we had but small and variable winds. For the twenty four hours last past we reckoned twenty Page  85 four leagues and two thirds, by a S. W. by S. way. By ob∣servation we had Lat. 16. D. 41. That evening we had a gale at E. S. E. which forced us to hand our top-sails.

The 17th likewise, we had many gusts of wind at seve∣ral times, forcing us to hand our top-sails often. But in the forenoon, we set them with a fresh gale at E. S. E. My reckoning this day was thirty one leagues by a S.S. W. way. All day long we stood by our top-sails.

On the 18th, we made a S. by W. way. We reckoned our selves to be in Lat. 19. D. 33. S. The weather was hasey; and the wind began to dye this day by degrees.

The next day, being the 19th, we had very small wind. I reckoned thirteen leagues and an half, by a S. W. by S. way; and our whole Westing from Paita to be 164 leagues in Lat. 20. D. 06. S. All the afternoon we had a calm, with drizling rain.

Monday, September the 20th. Last night we saw the Magallan Clouds,* which are so famous among the Mariners of these Southern Seas. The least of these clouds was a∣bout the bigness of a mans hat. After this sight, the morn∣ing was very clear. We had run at noon at E. S. E thir∣teen leagues and an half: and, by an observation then made, we found Lat. 20. D. 15. S. This day the wind be∣gan to freshen at W. by S. Yet notwithstanding we had a very smooth Sea.

But on the next morning, the wind came about to S.W. and yet slacken by degrees. At four this morning it came to S. by E. And at ten the same day, to S. E. by S. We had this day a clear observation, and by it Lat. 20. D. 25. S. We stood now E by N. with the wind at S. E.

September the 22d. This morning the wind was at E. S. E. By a clear observation we found Lat 19. D. 30 S. Likewise on a N. E. by E. way,—and two leagues and two thirds.

September the 23d we had a fresh wind, and a high 〈◊〉. This morning early the wind was at E. and about 〈◊〉 E. N. E. From a clear observation we found our latitude Page  86 to be 20 D. 35 S. The way we made was S. by W. That morning we hapned to split our Sprit-sail.

Next morning the wind was variable and inconstant, and the weather but hasey. We reckoned a S. by E. way: this day we bent a new main-top-sail; the old one serving for a fore-top-sail. In the afternoon we had but little wind, whereupon we lowered our top-sails; having, in like man∣ner, a very smooth sea.

The following day likewise brought us calm and warm weather; which occasioned us to set up our shrouds both fore and aft. An observation taken this day afforded us Lat. 21. D. 57. That evening we bent a sprit-sail.

On September the 26th, an observation gave us Lat. 22. D. 05. S. At noon we had a breez at N. N. E. our course being E. S. E. In the afternoon we set up a larboard top-sail studden-sail. In the evening the wind came about at North pretty fresh.

The next day we had a smooth sea, and took in four studden-sails. For yesterday in the afternoon we had put out, besides that above-mentioned, another studden-sail, and two main studden-sails more. This day we had by observation 22 D. 45 S. having made by an E. S. E. way, thirty five leagues and an half. Our whole Merid. differ. sixty eight leagues and an half.

September the 28th, all the forenoon we had very little wind, and yet withal a great Southern sea. By observati∣on we had Lat. 22 D. 40 S.

September the 29th. All the night past we had much wind, with three or four fierce showres of rain. This was the first that we could call rain,* ever since that we left Cape Francisco above-mentioned. This day our allowance was shortned, and reduced unto three pints and a half of water, and one cake of boyled bread to each man for a day.* An observation this day gave us Lat. 21 D. 59 S. by a N. E. by E. way.

On September the 30th we had a cloudy day, and the wind very variable, the morning being fresh. Our way Page  87 was N. E. half N. wherein we made eighteen leagues.

October the First. All the night past and this day we had a cloudy sky, and not much wind. We made a N. E. by E. way, and by it seventeen leagues and two miles.* This day we began at two pints and a half of water for a day.

The Second, we made a E.N. E. way, and by it twenty six leagues, more or less. Our observation this day gave us Lat. 20 D. 29 S. I reckoned now that we were ten leagues and an half to East of our Meridian, the Port of Paita; so that henceforward our departure was Eastward. The wind was this day at S. E. by S.

On the Third we had both a cloudy morning, a high sea, and drizling weather. An observation which we had this day, gave us Lat. 19 D. 45 S. In the afternoon the wind blew so fresh, as that we were forced to hand our top-sails and sprit-sail.

The 4th likewise we had a high sea and a cold wind. At break of day we set our top-sails. An observation made afforded us Lat. 19 D. 8 S. Here we supposed our selves fifty nine leagues D. M.

The 5th we had still a great sea, and sharp and cold winds, forcing us to our low sails. By a N. E. by E way, we reckoned this day twenty six leagues and an half.

But on the 6th we had great gusts of wind. Insomuch, that this morning our ring-bolts gave way which held our Main-stay, and had like to have brought our Main-mast by the board.* Hereupon we ran three or four glasses West before the wind. By an observation we found Lat. 19 D. 4 S.

On the 7th of October the wind was something fallen. We had both a cloudy day and variable winds.

The 8th of the said Month we had again a smooth sea, and small whistling winds.* This morning we saw a huge shoal of fish, two or three Water-snakes, and several Seals.

On the next day we had in like manner a very smooth sea, and withal a cloudy day. Our course was East.

Page  88October the Tenth, we had likewise a cloudy day, with small and variable winds▪ and what is consequent unto these, a smooth Sea. Our way was S. by E. This day we espied sloating upon the Sea,* several Tufts of Sea-grass, which gave us good hopes that we were not far from shoar. In the afternoon we had a N. E. by E. wind that sprang up▪ the night was very cold and cloudy.

On the eleventh we had a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S.E. together with a cloudy day; such as we had experimented for several days before. We reckoned this day thirty two Leagues by a N. E. by E. way. Here our Pilot told us, that the sky is always hasey nigh the shoar upon these Coasts where we now were.*

On October the 12th we had a clear day, and a North-East way.

The 13th we had but little wind. This day we saw a Whale,* which we took for an infallible token that we were not far distant from Land, which now we hoped to see in a few days. We made an E.S.E. way, and by it we recko∣ned nineteen Leagues. All the evening was very calm.

Thursday October the 14th we had both a calm, and close day until the afternoon. Then the weather became very hot and clear. This day we saw several land-Fowls, being but small Birds.* Concerning which our Pilot said, that they use to appear about one or two days sail from the Land. Our reckoning was eleven Leagues by an E.S.E. way. In the evening of this day we thought that we had seen Land; but it proved to be nothing else than a foggy bank.

October the 15th, both the night past, and this day, was very clear. We made an observation this day, which gave us Lat. 18 d. 00 South.

The 16th, last night and this day were contrary to the former, both cloudy. Our way was N.E. by E. whereof we reckoned thirteen Leagues.

Sunday October the 17th the wind blew very fresh, our course being E. N. E.* About five that morning we saw Page  89 Land; but the weather was so hasey, that at first we could scarce perceive whether it was Land or not. It was distant from us about eight Leagues, and appeared as a high and round hill, being in form like unto a Sugar-loaf. We saw Land afterwards all along to the S. E. by E. from it. In the evening, we being then within five Leagues of the shoar, the Land appeared very high and steep.

October the 18th, all the night last past we stood off to sea with a fresh wind. This morning we could just see Land at N. N. E. We reckoned a S. E. by E. way; and by observation we found Lat. 17 d. 17 South.

Tuesday October the 19th, we had very cloudy weather, finding what our Pilot had told us to be very true,* con∣cerning the haseyness of this shoar. We saw all along as we went very high Land, covered with Clouds; insomuch, that we could not see its top.

On Wednesday the next day, we had likewise cloudy weather, and for the most part calm. The same weather being very cloudy, as before, continued in like manner on Thursday.

Friday October 22. this morning we saw the Land plain before us. Our Pilot being asked what Land that was,* an∣swered, it was the Point of Hilo. At N.N.E. and about six or seven Leagues distance it appeared thus unto us.

[illustration]
Punta de HILO. Lat. 18. d. 4. S.

There is every morning and evening a brightness over the Point, which lasteth for two or three hours, being caused by the reflection of the Sun on the barren land, as Page  90 it is supposed. This day we had but little wind; and the huge want of water we were now under,* occasioned much disturbance among our men. As for my part, I must ac∣knowledge I could not sleep all night long through the greatness of my drougth. We could willingly have lan∣ded here to seek for water; but the fear of being disco∣vered and making our selves known, hindred us from so do∣ing. Thus we unanimously resolved to endure our thirst for a little longer space of time. Hereabouts is a small Current that runneth under the shoar. This morning we had but little wind at South, our course being E S. E. The Point at the distance of five leagues N. E. looketh on the following side, thus:

[illustration]
Punta de HILO.

Our wind continued to blow not above six hours each day. We reckoned the difference of our Meridian to be this day one hundred and eighty leagues. Very great was our affliction now for want of water;* we having but half a pint a day to our allowance.

October the 23d. This day we were forced to spare one measure of water, thereby to make it hold out the longer; so scarce it became with us. At three this afternoon the Point looked thus:

Page  91

[illustration]
Punta de HILO. Mora de SAMA.

Here the Point looketh like unto an Island. And Mora de Sama, to the Southward thereof, giveth this appearance:

[illustration]
Mora de SAMA.

About nine of the clock at night we had a land wind, and with it we stood S. E. by S. But all the night after we had but little wind.

October the 24th. All the night past we had very clou∣dy and dark weather, with mizling rain. The morning being come, it cleared up; but all the land appeared cove∣red with clouds. Yet notwithstanding in the afternoon it gave us again this appearance.

Page  92

[illustration]
Mora de SAMA. Lat. 18 d. 29 S.

Under the Hill of Mora de Sama are eighteen or nine∣teen white cliffs; which appear in the form above descri∣bed.* This day we resolved that One hundred and twelve men should go ashoar. And about eight this evening, we sent our Lanch and four Canoas, with fourscore men, to take three or four Fisher-men at a certain River, close by Mora de Sama, called el Rio de Juan Diaz, with intent to gain what intelligence we could how affairs stood at pre∣sent on the Coast and Country thereabouts.

Munday October the 25th. Last night being about the distance of one league and an half from shoar, we sounded, and found forty five fathom water, with an hard ground at the bottom. This morning our people and Canoas that were sent to take the Fishermen,* returned, not being able to find either their houses or the River. They reported withal, they had had a very fresh wind all the night long un∣der shoar, whereas we had not one breath of wind all night on board.

Tuesday October the 26th. Last night, being the night before this day, about six of the clock, we departed from the ship to go to take Arica, resolving to land about the distance of a league to windward of the Town.* We were about six leagues distant from the Town when we left our ship▪ whereby we were forced to row all night, that we might reach before day the place of our landing. Towards morning, the Canoas l••t the Lanch, which they had had all Page  93 night in a Tow, and wherein I was; and made all the speed they possibly could for the shoar, with design to land be∣fore the Lanch could arrive. But being come nigh the place where we designed to land, they found, to our great sorrow and vexation, that we were descryed; and that all along the shoar, and through the Country, they had certain news of our arrival. Yet notwithstanding our discovery, we would have landed, if we could by any means have found a place to do it in. But the sea ran so high, and with such a force against the rocks, that our boats must needs have been staved each in one thousand pieces, and we in great danger of wetting our arms, if we should adventure to go on shoar. The Bay all round was possessed by several parties of horse; and likewise the tops of the hills, which seemed to be gathered there by a general alarm through the whole Country, and that they waited onely for our landing, with design to make a strong opposition against us. They fired a gun at us, but we made them no answer, but rather re∣turned to our ship, giving over this enterprize until a fairer opportunity. The hill of Arica is very white, being occa∣sioned by the dung of multitudes of Fowls that nest them∣selves in the hollow thereof.* To Leeward of the said Hill lyeth a small Island, at the distance of a mile, more or less, from the shoar. About half a league from that Island, we could perceive six ships to ride at anchor: four of which had their Yards taken down from their Masts; but the o∣ther two seemed to be ready for sail. We asked our Pilot concerning these ships, and he told us that one of them was mounted with six guns, and the other with onely four. Being disappointed of our expectations at Arica, we now resolved to bear away from thence to the Village of Hilo,* there to take in Water and other Provisions; as also to learn what intelligence we could obtain. All that night we lay under a calm.

On October the 27th in the morning, we found our selves to be about a league to windward of Mora de Sama. Yet notwithstanding the weather was quite calm, and we Page  94 onely drived with the current at Leeward. The land be∣tween Hilo and Mora de Sama formeth two several Bays, and the Coast runneth along N.W. and S.E. as may appear by the following demonstration. Over the land we could see from our ship, as we drove the coming or rising of a very high land, at a great distance far up in the Country.

October the 28th. The night before this day, we sent away our four Canoas with fifty men in them,* to seize and plunder the Town of Hilo. All the day was very calm, as the day before.

The next morning about break of day, we had a fair breeze sprang up, with which we lay right in with the Port.* About one in the afternoon we anchored, and the Port lyeth thus, as is here described.

[illustration]
Port of HILO.

We cast anchor at the distance of two miles from the Village: and then we perceived two flags, which our men had put out,* having taken the Town, and set up our Eng∣lish Colours. The Spaniards were retreated unto the hills, and there had done the same. Being come to an anchor, our Commander Captain Sharp sent a Canoa on board of us, and ordered that all the men our ship could spare, should come ashoar. Withal they told us, that those of our par∣ty that landed the morning before, were met by some horsemen on the shoar, who onely exchanged some few volly's of shot with our men, but were soon put to slight. That hereupon our forces had marched directly to the Town, where the Spaniards expecting we would have lan∣ded at first, made a breast-work, thirty paces long, of clay Page  95 and banks of sand. Here, in a small skirmish, we hapned to kill an Indian, who told us before he dy'd, that they had received news of our coming, nine days ago, from Li∣ma, and but one day before from Arica. Having taken the Town, we found therein great quantity of Pitch, Tar, Oyl, Wine and Flower, with several other sorts of provisi∣ons. We endeavoured to keep as good a watch as the Spa∣niards did on the hills, fearing lest they should suddainly make any attempt to destroy us.

On the next day, being October the 30th, we chose out threescore men of them who were the fittest to march,* a∣mong the rest; and ordered them to go up and search the valley adjoyning and belonging to the Town. We found the said valley to be very pleasant, being all over set with Fig-trees, Olive-trees, Orange, Lemmon, and Lime-trees, with many other fruits agreeable to the Palat. About four miles up within the valley, we came to a great Sugar-work, or Ingenio de azucar, as it is called by the Spaniards, where we found great store of Sugar, Oyl, and Molossus. But most of the Sugar, the owners had hidden from us in the cane it self. As we marched up the vally, the Spaniards mar∣ched along the hills, and observed our motion. From the tops of the hills they often tumbled down great stones up∣on us, but with great care we endeavoured to escape those dangers, and but the report of one Gun would suddainly cause them all to hide their heads. From this house, I mean the Sugar-work above-mentioned, Mr. Cox, my self, and one Cannis a Dutchman (who was then our Interpre∣ter) went unto the Spaniards with a flag of Truce. They met us very civilly,* and promised to give us fourscore Beeves for the Ransom of the Sugar-work, and upon con∣dition that it should not be spoilt nor demolished. With them we agreed, that they should be delivered unto us at the Port, the next day at noon. Hereupon Captain Sharp in the evening sent down unto the Port twenty men, with strict orders that our forces there should offer no violence in the least unto those that brought down the Beeves.

Page  96Sunday, October the 31st. This day being employed in casting up some accounts belonging to our Navigation, I reckoned that Hilo was to the Eastward of Paita, one hun∣dred eighty and seven leagues. This morning the Cap∣tain of the Spaniards came unto our Commander Captain Sharp, with a flag of Truce; and told him, that sixteen Beeves were already sent down unto the Port, and that the rest should certainly be there the next morning. Here∣upon we were ordered to prepare our selves to retreat, and march back unto the Port, and there embark our selves on board our ship. My advice was to the contrary, that we should rather leave twenty men behind to keep the house of the Sugar-work, and that others should possess them∣selves of the Hills, thereby to clear them of the Spaniards and their look out. But my counsel not being regarded, each man took away what burthen of Sugar he pleased, and thus we returned unto our vessel.* Being come there, we found no Beeves had been brought down at all, which oc∣casioned us much to suspect some double dealing would in the latter end be found in this case.

The next morning being November the first, our Cap∣tain went unto the top of the Hills afore-mentioned, and spoke with the Spaniards themselves,* concerning the per∣formance of their agreement. The Spaniards made an∣swer, that the Cattle would certainly come down this night. But in case it did not, that the Master or Owner of the Sugar-work was now returned from Potosi, and we might go up and treat with him, and make, if we pleased, a new bargain for the preservation of his House and Goods; whose interest it was, more than theirs, to save it from being demolished. With this answer our men returned unto us, and we concluded to expect until the next day for the delivery of the Beeves.

On the following day about eight in the morning, there came in unto us a Flag of Truce from the enemy, telling us,* that the winds were so high, that they could not drive the Cattle, otherwise they had been delivered before now. Page  97 But withal, that by noon we should in no manner ail to have them brought unto us. Noon being come, and no Cattle appearing, we now having filled our water, and finished other concerns, resolved to be revenged on the Enemy, and do them what mischief we could; at least, by setting fire on the Sugar-work. Hereupon, threescore men of us marched up the valley,* and burnt both the House, the Canes, and the Mill belonging to the Ingenio. We broke likewise the Coppers, Coggs, and multitudes of great Jars of Oyl that we found in the house. This being done, we brought away more Sugar, and returned unto the Port over the Hills or Mountains; the which we sound to be very pleasant, smooth, and level after once we had as∣cended them. It fell out very fortunately unto us that we returned back this way we did, for otherwise our men at the Sea-side had inevitably been cut off and torn in pieces by the enemy, they being at that time dispersed and strag∣ling up and down by two and three in a Party. For from the Hills we espied coming from the Northward of the Bay, above three hundred horsemen,* all riding at full speed towards our men, who had not as yet descryed them, and little thought of any such danger from the enemy so nigh at hand. Being alarumed with this sight, we threw down what Sugar we had, and ran incontinently to meet them▪ thereby to give our other men time to rally, and put them∣selves into a posture of defence. We being in good rank and order, fairly proffered them Battle upon the Bay; but as we advanced to meet them, they retired and rid towards the Mountains to surround us, and take the Rocks from us if possibly they could. Hereupon, perceiving their in∣tentions, we returned back and possest our selves of the said Rocks, and also the lower Town; as the Spaniards them∣selves did of the upper Town (at the distance of half a mile from the lower) the Hills and the Woods adjoyning there∣unto. The Horsemen being now in possession of these Quar∣ters, we could perceive, as far as we could see, more and more men resort unto them, so that their Forces encreased Page  98 hourly to considerable numbers. We fired one at another as long as we could reach, and the day would permit. But in the mean while we observed, that several of them rid unto the Watch-hill, and looked out often to the Sea-board. This gave us occasion to fear, that they had more strength and Forces coming that way, which they expected every minute. Hereupon, least we should speed worse than we had done before, we resolved to imbark silently in the dark of the night,* and go off from that Coast where we had been so early descryed, and the enemy was so much prepa∣red against us. We carryed off a great Chest of Sugar, whereof we shared seven pound weight and a half each man;* thirty Jars of Oyl, and great plenty of all sorts of Garden Herbs, Roots, and most excellent Fruit.

CHAP. XIV. The Bucaniers depart from the Port of Hilo, and sail unto that of Coquimbo. They are descry∣ed before their arrival. Notwithstanding they land: are encountred by the Spaniards, and put them to flight. They take, plunder, and fire the City of la Serena. A description thereof. A Stratagem of the Spaniards in endeavouring to fire their ship, discovered and prevented. They are deceived again by the Spaniards, and forced to retire from Coquimbo, without any Ransom for the City, or considerable pillage. They re∣lease several of their chiefest Prisoners.

THe next morning (being Wednesday November the thrd,* 1680) about seven of the clock we set sail from Hilo, standing directly off to Sea, with a small land-wind. Page  [unnumbered]

[illustration]
A Description of Hilo
Page  [unnumbered]Page  99 Upon the shoar we could not discover this morn∣ing, above fifty men of our Enemies Forces, which caused us to suspect the rest were run away from their Colours, and had deserted in the dark of the night. If this were so, we were equally afraid of each other, and as we quitted the Land, being jealous of their multitudes, so they aban∣doned their stations for fear of our Encounters. All the while we lay in the Port of Hilo, we had a fresh wind but now being come out from thence, we found it was almost stark calme. Hereabouts runneth a great Sea all along this Coast, as we experimented at Arica; insomuch, that there is no landing except under the favour of some Rock or other.

November the fourth in the morning, we saw the Port of Hilo at E.N.E. at the distance of nine Leagues,* more or less from the Land. The white sand giveth a bright re∣flection over the land; the which we could see after we had lost the sight of the land it self.

The next day unto this, we had an indifferent fresh wind at S.S.E. We reckoned a S. W. half west way, and by it, that we had made twenty Leagues. The day was very fair and sun-shiny, and the sea very smooth

November the 6th, we had a clear night the last past, and the day proved very fair and clear, like unto the former. We reckoned by a S. W. by W. way, about twenty one leagues. In the afternoon it was almost stark calme.

On the following day we had in like manner very little wind, no more than the last twenty four hours.* We were now about this time many of us very much troubled and diseased with the Survey. It proceeded as we judged, from the great hardship and want of Provisions which we had endured for several Months past, as having had only bread and water, as was mentioned above. Only at Hilo we killed a Mule,* which gave unto those who would eat of the flesh, a very good meal, as we esteemed it, the Spani∣ards having swept away with them all other provisions of flesh. But there we had plundered some small quantity of Page  100 good Chocolate,* whereof the Spaniards make infinite use. So that now we had each morning a dish of that pleasant liquor, containing almost a pint.

Next day likewise we had very little wind, as before. We made an observation this day, and found Lat. 20. d. 05. South.

November the Ninth we had still very little wind, and that variable. We took almost every hour an observation, and found our selves to be in the Lat. of 20 d. 18. South.

The 10th we had in like manner but little wind, as for so many days before. We observed an E.S.E. current, or nearest unto it, to run hereabouts. This day we saw the homing of a very high land, which much admired us, for at this time I conceived we could not be less than thirty five or forty leagues distant from land.* We supposed it to be Mora Tarapaca. That day we set up our shrouds.

Upon the 11th an indifferent gale of wind sprang up at S. W. by S. by which we made twenty five Leagues,* and one third. We had now a great S.S.W. sea. In the night the wind as we experimented, came one or two points from the land. This morning we saw the like homing of land, whereby we were made sensible it was no land, that which we had seen the day before.

On the 12th we had several mists of rain, with windy weather. We made by a S. S. W. half S. way, twenty five leagues and one third. We had likewise a great and row∣ling S. S. W. sea, as the day before.

The 13th of the said Month, we had both cloudy and misty weather. We made a S. S. W. and one quarter S. way; by which we ran fifty leagues.

But the next day, fair and clear weather came about a∣gain. We had likewise an ••sie gale of wind, by which we made a S. W. way, and advanced twenty two leagues and an half.

On the 15th of November, we had also clear weather, and an indifferent gale of wind. Our way was S. W. by W. by which we reckoned eighteen leagues. Likewise that our Page  101 Westing from Hilo, from whence we set forth, was one hundred and fourteen leagues, and one third. Our lati∣tude by observation we found to be 23 D. 25 S.* I tok now the Declination-Table used and made by the Cosmo∣grapher of Lima.

Tuesday, November the 16th. In the night last past, we had a shower or two of rain. This day we made an observation, by which we found Lat. 23 D. 35 S.

The 17th we made a S. W. by W. half S. way. By ob∣servation we found Lat. 23 D. 46 S. with very little wind.

The 18th, upon a S. W. by W. way, we made twenty one leagues. By observation we found Lat. 24 D. 20 South.

Friday, Nov. the 19th, 1680. This morning, about an hour before day, we observ'd a Comet to appear,* a degree N. from the bright in Libra. The body thereof seemed dull; and its tail extended it self eighteen or twenty degrees in length, being of a pale colour, and pointing directly N. N. W. Our prisoners hereupon reported unto us,* that the Spaniards had seen very strange sights▪ both at Lima, the capital City of Peru, Guayaquil, and other places, much a∣bout the time of ur coming into the South Seas. I reckoned this day we had ran twenty leagues by a S. W. way.

The following day, unto the appearance of the Comet, we had many storms of wind at S.S.E. and at E. S. E.* Our reckoning by a S. W. by W. way, was twenty two leagues.

Sunday, November the 21th, we had likewise many gusts of wind, such as the day before, with frequent showers of rain. The wind varyed to and fro, according as the Clouds drew it here and there. We reckoned a S. S. W. way, and by it twenty one leagues and a half. In all. West from Hilo, we judged our selves to be one hundred seven∣ty eight leagues and two thirds. We had this day a great S. W. Sea, and cloudy weather. I supposed our Latitude to be 26 D. 53 S.

Page  102November the 22d we had in like manner cloudy weather, and now but little wind. We reckoned a S. way, and fifty one leagues.

The 23d we had very little wind, all the storm, after the appearance of the Comet,* being now quite allayed. We reckoned we had made a S. E. by E. way; and found our latitude, by observation, to bare 27 D. 46 S.

Wednesday, November the 24th. All the twenty four hours last past, we had a N. W. wind. Our way was S E. half S. by which we reckoned thirty one leagues and one third.

The 25th. Last night the wind blew at W. S. W. but this morning it came about again at N. W. as the day be∣fore. Our reckoning this day was a S. E. and one quarter E. way, twenty nine leagues and one third Our Latitude now, by observation made this day, was 39 D. 57 S. Our difference of Merid. 13 5⅓.

November the 26th. In the night the wind started to S. S. W. But this day at noon we had little better than a calm. I reckoned an E.S.E. half E. way, and by it twenty three leagues.

Saturday the 27th. Yesterday in the evening the wind came to S. I reckoned an East, and something Southerly way, and by that, twenty three leagues, as the day before this.

November the 28th. All the twenty four hours last past we enjoyed a fresh wind at S. S E. having a high S. W. sea. Our reckoning was an E. by N. and half N. way, and with∣al twenty four leagues. By observation, we found Lat. 30 D. 16 S. and Meridian distance eighty eight leagues. At noon the wind came at S. half E.

On the 29th we had a very great S. W. sea; and with∣al cloudy weather. My reckoning was by an E. one third S. way, twenty leagues and one third. This day we hap∣ned to see two or three great fowls flying in the air.* Con∣cerning which our Pilot told us, that they used to appear seventy or eighty leagues off from the Island, called of Juan Page  103 Fernandez. The day before this, Captain Peralta our pri∣soner, was taken very much frantick,* his distemper being occasioned, as we thought, through too much hardship and melancholy. Notwithstanding, this present day he became indifferent well again.

The following day we had likewise cloudy weather. We made, according to our account, an E. half N. way, and by it sixteen leagues and two thirds. Our Meridian difference fifty two leagues.

The first of December we had hasey weather, and with∣al an indifferent good wind at S. yea, sometimes S. by W. Our way was E. by S. by which we reckoned twenty two leagues. The night before this day, we sailed over white water like banks, of a mile in length, or more. But these banks, upon examination,* we found to be onely great shoals of Anchovas.

On December the second, very early in the morning, we espied Land,* the which appeared to be very high About noon this day we were at six leagues distance from it. All the preceding night we had so much wind, that we were forced to make use only of a pair of courses. By an ob∣servation made this day, we found Lat. 30. d. 35. South. We went away largely, driving better than nine leagues every watch. With this wind we made all the Sail we possi∣bly could, designing by this means to get into Coquimbo,* upon which Coast we now were before night. But the wind was so high, that sometimes we were forced to lower all our sail, it blowing now a meer fret of wind. Towards the evening it abated by degrees; insomuch, that at mid∣night it was stark calme ag•••. At that time we hoisted out our Lanch and Canoas, and putting into them one hundred men, we rowed away from the ship, with design to take by surprizal a considerable City, situated nigh un∣to the Coast, called by the Spaniards, la Ciudad de la Se∣rena.

Page  104Friday December the third, 1680. when we departed from the ship,* we had above two leagues, more or less, to row unto the shoar. But as it hapned, the Lanch (wherein I was) rowed so heavy, in comparison to the Canoas, that we could not keep pace with the said Boats. For this rea∣son▪ and no other, it was broad day before we got unto a certain Store-house, situate upon the shoar; the which we found our men had passed by in the dark of the night, without perceiving it. They being landed, immediately marched away from their Canoas, towards the City afore∣mentioned of la Serena. But they had not proceeded far on their march, when they found, to the great sorrow and chagrin of us all, that we were timely discovered here al∣so, as we had been at the other two places before, to wit, Arica and Hilo. For as they marched in a body together, being but thirty five men in all, who were all those that were landed out of the Canoas, they were suddainly en∣countred and engaged by a whole Troop of an hundred Spanish horse. We that were behind hearing the noise of the dispute,* followed them at their heels, and made all the hast we possibly could to come up to their relief. But before we could reach the place of the Battle, they had al∣ready routed the Spaniards, and forced them to fly away towards the Town.

Notwithstanding this rout given unto the horse, they rallyed again,* at the distance of about a mile from that place, and seemed as if they did wait for us, and would engage us anew. But as soon as all our Forces were come together, whereof we could make but fourscore and eight men in all, the rest being left behind to guard the Boats, we marched towards them and offered them Battle. As we came nigh unto them we clearly found they design∣ed no such thing; for they instantly retired and rid away before us, keeping out of the reach of our guns. We fol∣lowed them as they rid, being led by them designedly clear out of the road that went unto the Town, that we might not reach nor find it so soon. In this engagement Page  105 with the horse, our company had killed three of their chie∣fest men, and wounded four more; killing also four of their horses. When we found that we had been led by this stratagem of the enemy, out of the way of the Town, we left the Bay, and crossed over the green fields to find it; wading oftentimes over several branches of water, which there serve to enclose each plot of ground. Upon this march we came unto several houses, but found them all empty, and swept clean both of inhabitants and provisi∣ons. We saw likewise several horses and other heads of cattel in the fields, as we went along towards the City. This place of la Serena,* our Pilot had reported unto us to be but a small Town; but being arrived there, we found in it no fewer than seven great Churches and one Chappel belonging thereunto. Four of these Churches were Mo∣nasteries or Convents, and each Church had its Organs for the performance of Divine Service. Several of the houses had their Orchards of Fruit, and Gardens, belong∣ing unto them; both Houses and Gardens being as well and as neatly furnished, as those in England. In these Gar∣dens we found Strawberries as big as Walnuts,* and those verg delicious to the taste. In a word, every thing in this City of la Serena, was most excellent and delicate, and far beyond what we could expect in so remote a place. The Town was inhabited by all sorts of Tradesmen, and be∣sides them, had its Merchants, some of which were accoun∣ted to be very rich.

The Inhabitants of la Serena, upon our approach and dis∣covery, were all fled,* carrying with them whatsoever was most precious of their goods and jewels, or less cumbersome unto them. Much of their valuable things they had like∣wise concealed or buryed, as having had time since we were first discovered, so to do. Besides that they had had fore∣warning enough how to beware of us, sent them over land from Arica, and several other places where we had landed or been descryed at Sea. Notwithstanding, we took in the Town one Fryer, and two Chileno's, or Spaniards natives Page  106 of the Kingdom of Chile, which adjoyneth unto that of Peru, towards the Streight of Magallanes. These Priso∣ners related unto us, that the Spaniards, when they heard of our coming, had killed most of their Chilean slaves, fea∣ring lest they should run or revolt from them unto us. Moreover, that we had been descryed from their Coasts four days before our arrival, or descent upon land; all the which time they had employed in carrying away their Plate and Goods.* Unto this information they added, that for their defence they had received a supply of sixty men from Arica. Having taken possession of the Town, that evening there came a Negro unto us, running away from the Spaniards. He likewise informed us, that when we were before Panama, we had taken a Negro, who was e∣steemed to be the best Pilot in all the South-sea; but more especially for this place, and all the Coasts of Coquimbo. Moreover, that if the Spaniards had not sent all the Ne∣gro's belonging unto this City farther up into the Coun∣try, out of our reach and communication, they would all undoubtedly have revolted unto us.

That night about midnight our Boatswain, being accom∣panied by forty men,* and having a Chilean for their guide, went out of the Town some miles within the Country, with design to find out the places where the Spaniards lay concealed, and had hid their goods and plate. But before they came, the Spaniards had received intelligence thereof from some secret spies they had in the Town, and both the men and their women were all fled to places that were more occult and remote. So that by this search, they on∣ly found an old Indian woman and three children; but no gold nor plate, nor yet any other prisoners. This morn∣ing our ship came to an anchor, by the Store-house above-mentioned, named Tortuga, at the distance of a furlong from shoar, in the depth of seven fathom water. Mean while we were quartered in the Town, I took this follow∣••g ground-plat thereof.

Page  107

[illustration]
The City of 〈◊〉. Serena. Altitude 30. d. 00. South.

Page  108The next morning, being Saturday, December the 4th, came into the Town a flag of Truce from the Enemy.* Their message was to proffer a ransom for the Town to preserve it from burning; for now they began to fear we would set fire unto it, as having found no considerable booty nor pillage therein. The Captains, or chief Com∣manders of both sides, met about this point, and agreed betwixt them for the sum of 95000 pieces of eight to be the price of the whole ransom.* In the afternoon of this day, I was sent down unto the Bay of Coquimbo, with a party of twenty men, to carry thither both goods taken in the Town, and provisions for the ship. It is two leagues and a half from the Town unto the Port; one league on the Bay, the rest being a very great road, which leadeth from the Bay unto the City. The Spaniards promised that the Ransom should be collected and paid in by the next day. This day also there dyed one of our Negro slaves on board the ship.

The following day in the morning, I returned back unto the Town, with the men I had brought down the day be∣fore. Onely six of them I left behind, to look after our Canoa's at the end of the Bay. When I came up into the City,* I found that the Spaniards had broken their promise, and had not brought in the Ransom they had agreed for; but had begged more time until to morrow at eight in the forenoon. This evening another party of our men went down unto the ship, to carry goods, such as we had pillaged in the Town. Moreover, that night about nine of the clock,* hapned an Earthquake, the which we were very sensible of, as we were all together in the Church of San Juan, where our chief rendezvous and Corps du garde was kept. In the night the Spaniards opened a sluyce, and let the water run in streams about the Town, with intent ei∣ther to overflow it, and thereby force us out of the place, or at least that they might the easier quench the flame, in case we should fire the Town.

Page  109On the next morning we set fire to the Town, percei∣ving it to be overflown,* and that the Spaniards had not performed, or rather that they never designed to perform their promise. We fired, as nigh as we could, every house in the whole Town, to the intent it might be totally re∣duced into ashes. Thus we departed from la Serena, car∣rying with us what plunder we could find, having sent two parties before loaded with goods unto the ship, as was men∣tioned above. As we marched down unto the Bay, we beat up an Ambuscade of two hundred and fifty horse,* which lay by the way in private, with an intent to fall on our men, in case we had sent down any other party again with goods unto the ship. When we came to the Sea-side, being half way unto our ship, we received advice that the Spaniards had endeavoured, by an unusual stratagem,* to burn our ship, and by these means destroy us all. They acted thus: They up blew a horses hide like unto a bladder, and upon this float a man ventured to swim from shoar, and come under the stern of our ship. Being arrived there, he crammed Okeham and Brimstone, and other combusti∣ble matter, between the Rudder and the Stern-post. Having done this, he fired it with a match, so that in a small time our Rudder was on fire, and all the ship in a smoak. Our men both alarmed and amazed with this smoak, ran up and down the ship, suspecting the prisoners to have fired the vessel, thereby to get their liberty and seek our destructi∣on. At last they found it out where the fire was, and had the good fortune to quench it, before its going too far. As∣soon as they had put it out, they sent the boat ashoar, and found both the hide afore-mentioned, and the match bur∣ning at both ends, whereby they came acquainted with the whole matter. When we came unto the Store-house on the shoar-side, we set at liberty the Fryar our prisoner, and another Gentleman who was become our Hostage for the performance of the Ransom. Moreover,* when we came a∣board, we sent away and set at liberty Captain Peralta, Don Thomas de Argandona, Don Baltazar, Don Christoval,Page  110 Captain Juan, the Pilots Mate, the old Moor, and several o∣thers of our chiefest prisoners. Unto this releasment of our prisoners we were moved, partly because we knew not well what to do with them, and partly because we feared lest by the example of this stratagem▪ they should plot our destruction in earnest, and by the help of so many men, e∣specially persons of Quality, be able to go through it.

CHAP. XV. The Bucaniers depart from Coquimbo for the Isle of Juan Fernandez. Anexact account of this Voyage. Misery they endure, and great dangers they escape very narrowly there. They mutiny among them∣selves, and choose Watling to be their chief Com∣mander. Description of the Island. Three Spa∣nish Men of War meet with the Bucaniers, at the said Island; but these outbrave them on the one side, and give them the slip on the other.

BEing all embarked again, as was mentioned in the pre∣cedent Chapter, the next morning, which was Tues∣day, December the 7th, twenty of us were sent ashoar to ob∣serve the motion of the Enemy. We went unto the look-out, or watch-hill, but from thence could learn nothing. Here∣upon▪ about noon we returned on board the ship, and at two in the afternoon, we weighed anchor, and set sail, di∣ecting our course for the Isle of Juan Fernandez, not far di∣stant from the Coast of Coquimbo. At night we were five 〈◊〉 distant from thence at N. W. by N. The Souther∣•••• Island of those which are called de los Paxaros, or the Islands of Birds,* was then N. N. W. from us. Before our departure, I took this following draught of the Bay of Coquimbo, and City of la Serena.

Page  111

[illustration]
Coquimbo Bay described

Page  112December the 28th we had but very little wind, and a leeward current here, which we could perceive did heave us to the Northward. The afore-mentioned Island de los Paxaros, at three in the afternoon, bore N. E of us. At the distance of three leagues, more or less, it appeared thus.

[illustration]
Isla de los PAXAROS.

It is distant from the main Continent four leagues, and from the next Island of the same name, about two. The Main is extream high and mountainous hereabouts. At evening we were West from the said Island five leagues. About eight or nine leagues to Windward of Coquimbo, are certain white cliffs, which appear from the shoar to those that are off at Sea.*

On the 9th of December we had likewise but little wind, as the day before. I supposed my self this day to be about thirteen leagues West from the Island above-mentioned. The weather was cloudy, with misling rain, so that no ob∣servation could be taken.* However, this day it was thought convenient to put us to an allowance of water; for we had taken in little or none at Coquimbo. The same wea∣ther, or very like unto it, we had the next day, being the 10th; that is to say, stark calm and cloudy.

On the 11th of December, we had some small rain in the forepart of the day.* But in the afternoon it cleared up, so Page  113 that the weather was very hot. We had still but little wind.

The next day, December the 12th, we had very fair weather, and by a clear observation made this day, we found Lat. 30 D. 06 S.

December the 13th. By a W. S. W. way, we made for∣ty two leagues. By observation we found Lat. 30 D. 45 S. D. M. four leagues and two thirds.

On the 14th in the morning, we had a handsom shower of rain, which continued for some while. Then, about eight of the clock, there sprang up a S. S. W. breeze. My reckoning was by an E. S. E. way, fourteen leagues. And by observation, we found this day 30 D. 30 S.* In the af∣ternoon of this day, dyed one of our men, whose name was William Cammock. His disease was occasioned by a furfeit, gained by too much drinking on shoar at la Serena; the which produced in him a Calenture, or Malignant Fea∣ver, and an Hicup. Thus in the evening we buryed him in the Sea, according to the usual custom of Mariners, gi∣ving him three French Vollies for his Funeral.

The following day, we had an indifferent fresh wind on both tacks. Our way was W. S. W. and by it we reckon∣ed thirty four leagues. So likewise by an observation we had Lat. 30 D. 42 S. All the afternoon blew a S. by W. wind very fresh, with a short topping S. W. Sea.

But on the next ensuing day, we had no small breez, but rather hard gusts of wind. These grew so high, that they forced us to take in our top-sails. We made a S. W. half S. way, and forty five leagues.

On the 17th we had likewise high winds, and withal a S. W. sea. Our way W. by S. By observation taken this day, we found Lat. 30 D. 51 S. In the afternoon we had a S. S. E. wind, our course being S. W.

December the 18th. This day we had the same high winds as before, at S. S. E. We reckoned by a W. S. W. way forty five leagues. At noon the wind was something fallen, and then we had some rain.

Page  114The 19th we had both cloudy and windy weather. My reckoning was a S. W. by S. way, and here upon fifty eight miles. Yesterday we were assured by our Pilot, that we were now in the Meridian of the Island of Juan Fernandez, whither our course was directed for that present. What occasioned him to be so positive in his assertion, was the seeing of those great birds,* of which we made mention in the foregoing Chapter.

On the 20th, we had cloudy weather in the morning on both tacks. We made a S. W. and half S. way, and by it fifty two leagues. By observation we found this day Lat. 32 D. 20 S. Difference of Meridian was now one hundred and twenty three leagues.

The next day likewise we had cloudy weather; yet by observation we found a W. way. On the 22d by obser∣vation we found and E. way proved.

Thursday, December the 23d. All the night past we had a fresh wind. But in the morning, from top-mast head,* we descryed a hammock of land. In the evening we saw it again. We found afterwards that what we had seen, was the Westermost Island of Juan Fernandez; which is nothing else but a meer rock, there being no riding, nor scarce landing, near unto it.

Fryday, December the 24th. This morning we could descry the Island it self,* of Juan Fernandez, S. by E. it be∣ing at sixteen leagues distance when we saw it yesterday. At seven this morning the Island stood E. the wind being at N. W. by N. At eight the same morning, the Island, at the distance of five leagues, little more or less, appeared thus.

Page  115

[illustration]
Isla de JUAN FERNANDEZ.

Here my observation was, that I could see neither fowl nor fish nigh unto this Island;* both which things are usu∣ally to be seen about other Islands. Having told my ob∣servation unto our Pilot, he gave me for answer, that he had made many Voyages by this Island, and yet never saw any either fowl or fish more than I. Our reckoning this day was an E. S. E. way, and hereby thirty six leagues. Our latitude by observation was found to be 33 D. 30 S.

Saturday, December the 25th. Yesterday in the after∣noon, at three of the clock, we saw the other Island, making two or three hammocks of land. This morning we were about eight leagues distant from it, the Island bearing E. S. E. from us. At eight the same morning, we were right at breast with it. Here therefore are two Islands together, the biggest whereof is three leagues and an half in length,* nearest N. W. and S.E. the other, and lesser, is almost one league, and no more in circumference. At ten of the clock we sent off from the ship one of our Canoa's, to seek for the best landing and anchoring for our Vessel. As we ap∣proached, both Islands seemed unto us nothing but one en∣tire heap of rocks. That which lyeth more unto the N. is the highest, though we could not now see the tops there∣of for the clouds which covered it. In most places it is so steep, that it becometh almost perpendicular.

Page  116This day being Christmas-day, we gave in the morning early three Vollies of shot,* for solemnization of that great Festival. I reckoned an E. by S. way. By a clear obser∣vation from the middle of the Island, I found here Lat. 33 D. 45 S. and M. D. to be ninty nine leagues. In the e∣vening of this day, we came to an anchor at the South end of the Island, in a stately Bay that we found there, but which lyeth open from the South, to the South-East winds. We anchored in the depth of eleven fathom water, and at the distance of onely one furlong from the shoar. Here we saw multitudes of Seals covering the Bay every where, in∣somuch that we were forced to kill them,* to set our feet on shoar.

Sunday, December the 26th. This day we sent a Ca∣noa to see if we could find any riding secure from the Sou∣therly winds; these being the most constant winds that blow on these Coasts. The Canoa being gone, our Com∣mander sent likewise what men we could spare on shoar, to drive Goats,* whereof there is great plenty in this Island. They caught and killed that day to the number of three∣score, or thereabouts. The Canoa returning unto the ship, made report that there was good riding in another Bay, si∣tuate on the North side of the Island, in fourteen fathom water, and not above one quarter of a mile from the shoar. Moreover that there was much wood to be had, whereas in the place where we had first anchored, not one stick of wood nor tuft of grass was to be found.

The next day, being the 27th, between two and four of the clock in the morning,* we had a tempest of violent winds and fierce showers of rain. The same day we got in two hundred jars of water, bringing them the full distance of a league from the place of our riding.* In the mean while, o∣thers were employed to catch Goats, as they had done the day before.

On the 28th of the said month, in the morning I went with ten more of our company, and two Canoas, to fetch water from the land. Being come thither, and having fil∣led Page  117 our jars, we could not get back unto the ship, by rea∣son of a Southerly wind that blew from off the Ocean,* and hindred our return. Thus we were forced to lie still in a water-hole, and wait till the wind were over for a safer opportunity. Mean while, the violence of the wind en∣creasing, our ship was forced to get under sail, and make a∣way, not without danger of being forced ashoar. Here∣upon she sailed out of the harbour, to seek another place of anchoring. At noon I ventured out, to try if I could fol∣low the ship, but was forced in again by the wind and a ra∣ging sea. Thus we lay still for some while longer, till the evening came on. This being come, we ventured out a∣gain both Canoa's together: but the winds were then so high, that we were forced to throw all our jarrs of water over-board to lighten our boats, otherwise we had inevita∣bly perished. I ought to bless and praise God Almighty for this deliverance; for in all humane reason, the least wave of that tempest must have sunk us. Notwithstan∣ding, we came that night to our place or harbour, where we expected to have found our ship (called False wild har∣bour) but found her not. Hereupon not knowing what to do, we went ashoar, and halled up our Canoa's dry. Ha∣ving done this, we ascended higher within the Island, along a Gulley, for the space of half a mile, there to clear our selves of the noise and company of the Seals which were very troublesome on the shoar. Here we kindled a fire,* and dryed our clothes, and rested our selves all night, though with extream hungry bellies, as having eaten very litte or nothing all the day before. In the sides of the hill, under which we lay, we observed many holes like Coney-holes. These holes are the nests and roosting-places of multitudes of birds that breed in this Island, called by the Spaniards, Pardelas. One of these birds, as we lay drying and warming our selves, fell down into our fire.*

The next morning being come, very early before Sun∣rise, we went farther to the Northward, to seek for our ship which we feared we had lost. But we were not gone far, Page  118 when we soon espied her at sea. Hereupon we passed a point of land, and entered a certain Bay, which was about a mile deep, and not above half a league over. Into this Bay we put, and instantly made a fire, thereby to shew the ship whereabouts we were. Here we found good watering and wooding close unto the shoar. In this Bay also we saw a∣nother sort of amphibious Animal, the which I imagined to be the same, that by some Authors is called a Sea-Lyon. These Animals are six times bigger than Seals.* Their heads are like unto that of a Lyon, and they have four fins not unlike unto a Tortoise. The hinder parts of these Crea∣tures are much like fins, but are drawn after them, as being useless upon the shoar. They roared as if they had been Lyons, and were full of a certain short and thick hair, which was of a Mouse colour; but that of the young ones was something lighter. The old ones of these Sea-Lyons are between twelve and fourteen foot long, and about eleven or twelve foot in thickness, or circumference. A Seal is very easily killed, as we often experimented, but two of our men with great stones could not kill one of these Ani∣mals.

That day in the afternoon there came a Canoa from on board the ship with Provision for us,* they fearing least we should be starved. In like manner the Lanch came with men to cut wood. They told us that the ship came to an Anchor in the other Bay, but that within half an hour the Cable broke, and they were forced to leave their Anchor behind them and get out to Sea again. Night be∣ing come, we made our beds of Fern, whereof there is huge plenty upon this Island; together with great multitudes of Trees like unto our English Box, the which bore a sort of green Berries, smelling like unto Pimiento, or Pepper. All this day the ship was forced to ply off at Sea, not being able to get in.

December the thirtieth. The morning of this day we employed in filling water, and cutting down wood. But in the afternoon, eight of us eleven, went aboard the ship, Page  119 all in one and the same Canoa, sending her ashoar again with Provisions for the men that were there. This day in like manner we could not get into the Harbour, for no sooner the ship came within the parts of Land, but the wind come∣ing out of the Bay, blew us clear out again. Thus we were forced to ply out all that night, and great part of the fol∣lowing day.

On the next day having overcome all difficulties,* and many dangers, we came to an Anchor in the afternoon, in fifteen fathom water, at the distance of a Cable length from shoar. Here it was observable, that we were forced to keep men ashoar on purpose to beat off the Seals, mean while our men filled water at the Sea side, at high-water mark, for as much as that the Seals covet hugely to lye in fresh water. About this Island fish is so plentiful, that in less then one hours time, two men caught enough for all our whole company.

Saturday January the first, 1680.* This day we put up a new Main-top, larger then the old one; and we caught Craw-fish that were bigger than our English Lobsters.

The next day being January the second, dyed a chief man of our company, whose name was John Hilliard.* This man until our weighing Anchor from the Port of Coquim∣bo, had been our Master all the space of this Voyage. But from that time we chose John Cox for the Starboard, and John Fall for the Larboard watch. The disease whereof he dyed was the Dropsie. That evening we buryed our dead Companion, and gave him a Volley for his Funeral, according to the usual custom.

On the third of January we had terrible gusts of wind from the shoar every hour.* This day our Pilot told us, that many years ago a certain ship was cast away upon this Island, and onely one man saved, who lived alone upon the Island five years before any ship came this way to car∣ry him off. The Island hath excellent Land in many Val∣leys belonging thereunto. This day likewise we fetched our Anchor which we left in the other Bay when the ship broke her Cable.

Page  120*Tuesday January the fourth, 1680. This day we had such terrible flaws of wind, that the Cable of our ship brake, and we had undoubtedly been on shoar, had not the other held us fast. At last it came home and we drove outward. By the way it caught hold of a Rock, and held some time, but at last we haled it up, and the wind came with so much violence,* that the waves slew as high as our Main-top, and made all the water of a foam.

January the fifth, the same huge gusts of wind continu∣ed all the night last past,* which notwithstanding this day at noon it was brave and calme. But in the morning the Anchor of our ship gave way again, and we drove to the Eastward more than half a mile, till at last we hapned to fasten again in the depth of sixty fathom water. Here in this Bay where we rid at Anchor, did run a violent current, sometimes into, and at other times out of the Bay; so that all was uncertain with us. But our greatest discomfort was, that our men were all in a mutiny against each other, and much divided among themselves.* Some of them be∣ing for going home towards England, or our Forreign Plan∣tations, & that round about America through the Straights of Magallanes, as Captain Sawkins had designed to do; others of them being for staying longer, and searching farther into those Seas, till such time as they had got more Money. This day at noon our Anchor drove again; where∣upon to secure our selves from that dangerous place,* we sailed from thence into the West Bay, and anchored there in twenty five fathom water, and moored our ship one quarter of a mile from shoar.

On Thursday January the sixth, our dissentions being now grown unto a great heighth,* the Mutineers made a new Election of another person to be our chief Captain and Commander, by vertue whereof they deposed Cap∣tain Sharp, whom they protested they would obey no longer. They chose therefore one of our company, whose name was John Watling, to command in chief, he having been an old Privateer, and gained the esteem of being a Page  121 stout Seaman. The election being made, all the rest were forced to give their assent unto it, and Captain Sharp gave over his command, whereupon they immediately made Articles with Watling, and signed them.

The following day being the seventh,* we burnt and tal∣lowed the star-board side of our ship. In this Bay where we now anchored, we found a Cross cut in the Bark of a Tree, and several Letters besides. Hereupon, in another Tree up the Gulley, I engraved the two first Letters of my name, with a Cross over them. This day likewise Willi∣am Cook, servant unto Captain Edmund Cook, confessed that his Master had oft times Buggered him in England, leaving his Wife and coming to bed to him the said William. That the same crime he had also perpetrated in Jamaica; and once in these Seas before Panama. Moreover, searching his Writings, we found a paper with all our names written in it, the which it was suspected he designed to have given unto the Spanish prisoners. For these reasons, this eve∣ning our Captain thought it convenient to put him in Irons, which was accordingly done. The next day unto the a∣bove-mentioned in this Paragraph, we finished the other side of our ship.

Sunday January the ninth, this day was the first Sun∣day that ever we kept by command and common consent,* since the loss and death of our valiant Commander Cap∣tain Sawkins. This generous spirited man threw the dice over board, finding them in use on the said day.

January the Tenth,* this day the weather was very clear and setled again. We caught every day in this Bay, where we now were, great plenty of fish; and I saw the same day a shoal of fish a mile and more long.

On the next day being the eleventh, we filled our wa∣ter, and carryed our wood on board the ship. Moreover,* our two Canoas went to the other side of the Island to catch Goats, for on the barren side thereof are found and caught the best; and by Land it is impossible to go from one side of the Island to the other.

Page  122*Wednesday January the twelfth, this morning our Ca∣noas returned from catching of Goats, firing of Guns as they came towards us to give us warning. Being come on board, they told us, they had espied three sail of ships, which they conceived to be men of War coming about the Island. Within half an hour after this notice given by our Boats, the ships came in sight to Leeward of the Island. Here∣upon we immediately slipt our Cables, and put to Sea, ta∣king all our men on board that were ashoar at that time. Onely one William a Mosquito Indian, was then left behind upon the Island, because he could not be found at this our suddain departure. Upon the Island of Juan Fernandez do grow certain Trees that are called by the name of Bilby∣trees.* The tops of these trees are excellent Cabbage, and of them is made the same use that we do of Cabbage in England. Here fish aboundeth in such quantity▪ that on the surface of the water I have taken fish with a bare and naked hook, that is to say, unbaited. Much fish is taken here of the weight of twenty pound; the smallest that is taken in the Bay being almost two pound weight. Very good Timber for building of Houses and other uses, is like∣wise found upon this Island. It is distant from the Main Continent the space of ninety five Leagues, or thereabouts, being situate in 33 d. 40 South. The plats of the Islands lye N.W. and S.E.

Being got out of the Bay we stood off to Sea, and kept to windward as close as we could. The biggest of these Spanish men of War,* for such they proved to be, was of the burthen of eight hundred Tuns, and was called El San∣to Christo, being mounted with twelve Guns. The second named San Francisco, was of the port of six hundred Tuns, and had ten guns. The third was of the carriage of three hundred and fifty Tuns, whose name I have forgot. As soon as they saw us, they instantly put out their bloody flags, and we, to shew them that we were not as yet daun∣ted, did the same with ours. We kept close under the wind, and were, to confess the truth, very unwilling to Page  123 fight them, by reason they kept all in a knot together, and we could not single out any one of them, or separate him from the rest. Especially considering, that our present Commander Watling had shewed himself at their appea∣rance to be faint hearted. As for the Spaniards themselves, they might have easily come unto us, by reason we lay by several times: but undoubtedly they were cowardly gi∣ven, and peradventure as unwilling to engage us, as we were to engage them.

The following day being January the thirteenth, in the morning we could descry one of the fore-mentioned men of war, under the Leeward side of the Island; and we be∣lieved that the rest were at Anchor thereabouts. At W. by S. and at the distance of seven Leagues the Island appea∣reth thus.

[illustration]
Isle of Juan Fernandez. Lat. 33 d. 40 South.

At noon that day we stood in towards the Island,* ma∣king as if that we intended to be in with them. But in the afternoon our Commander propounded the question unto us, whether we were willing now that the Fleet was to windward, to bare away from them? Unto this we all a∣greed with one consent. And hereupon, night being come, with a fresh wind at S.S.E. we stood away N.E. by N. and thus gave them handsomly the slip, after having out bra∣ved them that day, and the day before.

Page  124

[illustration]
Isla de Juan Fernandez.

Page  125

CHAP. XVI. The Bucaniers depart from the Isle of Juan Fer∣nandez, unto that of Yqueque. Here they take several Prisoners, and learn intelligence of the posture of affairs at Arica. Cruelty committed upon one of the said prisoners, who had rightly informed them. They attempt Arica the second time, and take the Town, but are beaten out of it again before they could plunder, with great loss of men, many of them being killed, wounded, and made Prisoners. Captain Watling their chief Commander is killed in this Attacque, and Captain Sharp presently chosen again, who lea∣deth them off, and through Mountains of diffi∣culties, maketh a bold Retreat unto the ship.

HAving bid our enemies adieu, after the manner as was said in the precedent Chapter,* the next morning being January the 14th. we bore N. E. We reckoned this day a N.N.E. one quarter South way, and by it, thirty Leagues. We were four Leagues Eastward from the Isle of Juan Fernandez, when I took our departure.

Saturday January the 15th, we had hasey weather. This day we made by a N. E. by N. way eleven Leagues. The same hasey weather continued in like manner the 16th. But about ten that morning the wind dyed away. Our reckoning was a N.E. by N. way, and thirty six Leagues.

On the 17th we had a soft gale, and a clear observati∣on. We found by it Lat. 28 d. 47 S. Easting seventy Leagues. The next day we had likewise a clear day, and Page  126 we reckoned by a N· E. by N. way, thirty one leagues. By observation Lat. 27 d. 29 South.

Wednesday January the 19th, we had a clear day, as before,* and reckoned a N. E. by N. way, and thirty five Leagues and two thirds. By observation we took Lat. 25 d. 00. South. This day we put up our top-gallant masts and sails, the which we had taken down at the Island of Juan Fernandez, when we thought to have gone directly from thence for the Straights of Magallanes. But now our resolutions were changed, and our course was bent for Ari∣ca, that rich place, the second time, to try what good we could do upon it by another attempt, in order to the ma∣king all our fortunes there. In the evening of this day we saw Land at a great distance.

*January the 20th, about midnight past we had a small Land-wind that sprang up and reached us. At break of day we could descry Land again, at the distance of nine or ten Leagues more or less. This day was very hot and calme, Easting ninety two Leagues.

On the 21. we had very little wind, and all along as we went we could descry high land, and that barren. We sai∣led N. by E. and N.N.E. along the Coast of the Continent.

The next day being Saturday the 22 of January, we had very hot weather.* This day we sailed N. and N. by E. and looked out continually for the Island of Yqueque, which our Pilot told us was hereabouts. We kept at a just di∣stance from Land, for fear of being descryed by the ene∣my.

On the following day, Sunday the 23. we sailed in like manner N.N.E. along the Coast, which seemeth to be ve∣ry full of Bays hereabouts. By observation this day, we took Lat. 21 d. 49. South.

Munday January the 24th, this day we had an indiffe∣rent gale of wind,* and we stood N. and by E. the wind be∣ing S.S.E. We found Latitude by observation 21 d. 02 South. Our whole Easting I reckoned to be ninety two leagues and an half. In the afternoon of this day Captain Page  127Watling our Commander, and twenty five men more de∣parted from the ship in two Canoas, with design to seek for, and take the Island of Yqueque, and there to gain intelli∣gence of the posture of affairs at Arica. We were at the distance of twelve leagues from shoar, when they went a∣way from the ship.

The next day by a clear observation,* we found Lat. 20 d. 40 South. At four in the afternoon this day, returned one of our Canoas, bringing word that they could not find the Island, though they had searched for it very diligently. At night came the other, being brought back by a wrong sign given us by the first Canoa. This second Canoa had landed upon the Continent, and there found a track, the which they followed for some little space. Here they met a dead Whale, with whose bones the Spaniards had built a Hut, and set up a Cross. There lay also many pieces of broken Jars. They observed likewise, that hereabouts up∣on the Coast were many Bays, good landing, and anchoring for ships. That evening about seven of the clock, a fresh gang departed from the ship to seek for the same Island, mean while we lay becalmed all night, driving about a league to leeward.

Wednesday January the 26th,* we had extream hot wea∣ther. This day the Spanish Pilot told us, that on the Con∣tinent over against us, and at the distance of a very little way within the Land, are many rich Mines of Silver, but that the Spaniards dared not to open them for fear of an Invasion from some Forreign enemy or other. We sailed North, at the distance of about two leagues from shoar. At noon we had an observation, and found Lat. 20 d. 21 S. At four of the clock we saw a smoak made by our men,* close by a white clift, which proved to be the Island. Here∣upon we immediately sent away another Canoa with more men, to supply them in their attempts. But in the mean while the first Canoa which had departed the evening be∣fore this day, came aboard, bringing with them four priso∣ners, two old white men, and two Indians.

Page  128*The other Canoa which set out last, brought back Mo∣lossus, Fish, and two Jars of wine. To windward of the said Island, is a small village of eighteen or twenty houses, having a small Chappel nigh unto it, built of stone, and for adornment thereof, it is stuck full of Hides, or the skins of Seals. They found about fifty people in this Hamlet, but the greatest part of them made their escape at the ar∣rival of the Canoa. Unto this Island do frequently come Barks from Arica, which City is not far distant from thence to fetch clay, and they have already transported a∣way a considerable part thereof. The poor Indians, Inha∣bitants or Natives of this Island, are forced to bring all the fresh water they use, the full distance of eleven leagues from thence, that is to say, from a River name Camarones, which lyeth to Leeward of the Island. The Barque where∣in they used to bring it, was then gone for water, when our men landed upon the place. The Island all over is white, but the bowels thereof are of a reddish sort of earth. From the shoar is seen here a great path which leadeth o∣ver the Mountains into the Country. The Indians of this Island use to eat much and often, a sort of Leaves that are of a tast much like unto our Bay-leaves in England. Inso∣much, that their teeth are died of a green colour, by the continual use thereof. The Inhabitants go stark naked, and are very robust and strong people; yet notwithstand∣ing they live more like beasts than men.

*Thursday January the 27th, this morning on board the ship, we examined one of the old men, who were taken prisoners upon the Island the day before. But finding him in many Lies, as we thought, concerning Arica, our Com∣mander ordered him to be shot to death, which was accor∣dingly done. Our old Commander Captain Sharp was much troubled in his mind and dissatisfyed at this cruelty and rash proceeding; whereupon he opposed it as much as he could. But seeing he could not prevail, he took wa∣ter and washed his hands,* saying, Gentlemen, I am clear of the blod of this old man; and I will warrant you a hot day Page  129 for this piece of cruelty, whenever we come to fight at Arica. These words were found at the latter end of this expediti∣on of Arica, to contain a true and certain prophesie, as shall be related hereafter.

The other old man being under examination, informed us, that the Island of Yqueque afore-mentioned,* belonged unto the Governour of Arica, who was Proprietor thereof; and that he allowed unto these men a little wine, and other Necessaries, to live upon for their sustenance. That he himself had the superintendance of forty or fifty of the Governours slaves, who caught fish and dryed it, for the profit of the said Governour; and he sold it afterwards to the inland Towns, and reaped a considerable benefit there∣by. That by a Letter received from Arica, eight days ago, they understood there was then in the Harbour of A∣rica, three ships from Chile, and one Bark. That they had raised there a Fortification mounted with Twelve Copper Guns. But that when we were there before, they had con∣veyed out of the Town unto the neighbouring stantions, all their Plate, Gold, and Jewels, burying it there in the ground, and concealing it after several manners and ways. The which whether it were now returned or not, he could not easily tell. That there were two great places, the one at ten, the other at twenty five leagues distance from Ari∣ca, at which Towns lay all their strength and treasure. That the day before had passed a Post to declare our having been at Coquimbo. That the Embargo laid on all vessels going to the Northward, was now taken off; so that a free pas∣sage was allowed them. That by Land it was impossible to go from hence unto Arica in less than four or five days, for as much as they must carry water for themselves and Horses for the whole journey. At last, that those Arms that were brought from Lima unto Arica, as was mentioned above, were now carryed away from thence unto Buenos Ayres. All these things pleased us mighty well to hear them. But however, Captain Sharp was still much dissa∣tisfyed, by reason we had shot the old man. For he had Page  130 given us information to the full, and with all manner of truth, how that Arica was greatly fortified, and much more than before; but our misfortune was, that we took his information to be all contrary to the truth.

The leaves of which we made mention above, are brought down unto this Island in whole Bales,* and then distributed unto the Indians by a short allowance given to each man. This day we had very hot weather, and a S. W. Sea. By observation we found Lat. 20 d. 13 South. Besides the things above-mentioned, our prisoners inform∣ed us, that at Arica the Spaniards had built a breast-work round about the Town; and one also in every street, that in case one end of the Town were taken, they might be a∣ble to defend the other. We stood off and in for the grea∣test part of this day. In the afternoon we were eight leagues and an half distant from shoar, with a fresh wind. That morning moreover we took the Barque that was at the River of Camarones, to fill water for the Island.

Friday January the 28th, last night about midnight we left the ship,* and embarked our selves in the Barque afore-mentioned, the Lanch, and four Canoas, with design to take Arica by surprizal. We rowed and sailed all night, making in for the shoar.

Saturday January the 29th, about break of day this day, we got under shoar,* and there hid our selves among the Rocks for all the day long, fearing lest we should be des∣cryed by the enemy, before we came to Arica. At this time we were about five leagues to Southward of Arica, nigh Quebrada de San Vitor, a place so called upon that Coast. Night being come, we rowed away from thence.

Sunday January the 30th, 1680. this day (being the day that is consecrated in our English Kalendar,* unto the Mar∣tyrdom of our glorious King Charles the First) in the morning about Sun-rise, we landed amongst some Rocks, at the distance of four miles, more or less, to the Southward from Arica. We put on shoar ninety two men in all, the rest remaining in the Boats, to keep and defend them from Page  131 being surprized by the enemy, to the intent we might leave behind us a safe retreat, in case of necessity. Unto these men we left strict orders, that if we made one smoak from the Town, or adjoyning fields, they should come af∣ter us towards the harbour of Arica with one Canoa; but in case we made two, that they should bring all away, leaving only fifteen men in the Boats. As we marched from our landing place towards the Town, we mounted a very steep hill, and saw from thence no men, nor Forces of the enemy; which caused us to hope we were not as yet des∣cryed, and that we should utterly surprize them. But when we were come about half of the way unto the Town, we espied three horsemen, who mounted the Look-out hill; and seeing us upon our march, they rid down full speed towards the City, to give notice of our approach. Our Commander Watling chose out forty of our number, to attaque the Fort, and sent us away first thitherwards, the rest being designed for the Town.* We that were appoint∣ed for the Fort, had ten hand Granadoes among us, when we gave the assault, and with them, as well as with our other Arms, we attacked the Castle, and exchanged several shot with our enemies. But at last, seeing our main body in danger of being overborn with the number of our ene∣mies, we gave over that attempt on the Fort, and ran down in all hast unto the valley, to help and assist them in the fight. Here the Battel was very desperate, and they kil∣led three, and wounded two more of our men from their out-works, before we could gain upon them. But our rage encreasing with our wounds, we still advanced, and at last beat the enemy out of all, and filled every street in the City with dead bodies. The enemy made several retreats unto several places, from one breast-work to another;* and we had not a sufficient number of men wherewith to man all places taken. Insomuch, that we had no sooner beat them out of one place, but they came another way, and man'd it again with new Forces and fresh men.

Page  132*We took in every place where we vanquished the ene∣my, great number of Prisoners, more indeed, then perad∣venture we ought to have done, or we knw well what to do withal; they being too many for such a small body as ours was to manage. These prisoners informed us, that we had been descryed no less than three days before, from the Island of Yqueque, whereby they were in expectation of our arrival every hour, as knowing we had still a design to make a second attempt upon that place. That into the City were come four hundred Souldiers from Lima, the which, besides their own, had brought seven hundred Arms for the use of the Country-people; and that in the Town they had six hundred armed men, and in the Fort three hundred.

*Being now in possession of the City, or the greatest part thereof, we sent unto the Fort, commanding them to sur∣render. But they would not vouchsafe to send us any an∣swer. Hereupon we advanced towards it, and gave it a se∣cond Attaque, wherein we persisted very vigorously for a long time. Being not able to carry it, we got upon the top of a house that stood nigh unto it, and from thence fi∣red down into the Fort, killing many of their men, and wounding them at our ease and pleasure. But mean while we were busyed in this Attaque, the rest of the enemies For∣ces had taken again several Posts of the Town, and began to surround us in great numbers, with design to cut us off. Hereupon we were constrained to desist the second time,* as before, from assaulting the Fort, and make head against them. This we no sooner had done, but their numbers and vigour increasing every moment, we found our selves to be over powred, and consequently we thought it conve∣••ent to retreat unto the plaee where our wounded men 〈◊〉, under the hands of our Surgeons, that is to say, our 〈◊〉. At this time our new Commander Captain 〈◊〉, both our Quartermasters, and a great many o〈…〉 our men were killed, besides those that were woun∣••• and disabled to fight. So that now the enemy rally∣ing Page  133 against us, and beating us from place to place, we were in a very distracted condition, and in more likelihood to perish every man, than escape the bloodiness of that day. Now we found the words of Captain Sharp to bear a true prophesie, being all very sensible, that we had had a day too hot for us, after that cruel heat in killing and murdering in cold blood, the old Mestizo Indian whom we had taken prisoner at Yqueque, as before was mentioned.

Being surrounded with difficulties on all sides, and in great disorder,* as having no head nor leader to give orders for what was to be done, we were glad to turn our eyes unto our good and old Commander Captain Bartholomew Sharp, and beg of him very earnestly to commiserate our condition, and carry us off. It was a great while that we were reiterating our supplications unto him, before he would take any notice of our request in this point. So much was he displeased with the former mutiny of our people a∣gainst him, all which had been occasioned by the insti∣gation of Mr. Cook. But Sharp is a man of an undaunted courage, and of an excellent conduct, not fearing in the least to look an insulting enemy in the face, and a person that knoweth both the Theory and practical parts of Na∣vigation, as well as most do. Hereupon, at our request and earnest petition,* he took upon him the command in chief again, and began to distribute his orders for our safety. He would have brought off our Surgeons, but that they had been drinking in the mean while that we assaulted the Fort, and thus would not come with us when they were called. They killed and took of our number twenty eight men, besides eighteen more that we brought off, who were desperately wounded. At this time we were all ex∣tream faint for want of water and victuals, whereof we had had none all that day. Moreover, we were almost choaked with the dust of the Town; this being so much raised by the work that their great Guns had made, that we could scarcely see each other. They beat us out of the Town, and then followed us into the Savanas, or open fields, Page  134 still charging us as fast as they could. But when they saw that we rallyed again, resolving to dye one by another, they then ran from us into the Town, and sheltred them∣selves under their breast-works. Thus we retreated in as good order as we could possibly observe in that confusion. But their Horsemen followed us as we retired, and fired at us all the way, though they would not come within reach of our Guns; for their own reached farther then ours, and out-shot us more than one third. We took the sea-side for our greater security; the which when the enemy saw, they betook themselves unto the Hills, rowling down great stones, and whole Rocks to destroy us. In the mean while those of the Town examined our Surgeons, and other men whom they had made prisoners. These gave them our signs that we had left unto our Boats that were behind us, so that they immediately blew up two smoaks, which were perceived by the Canoas. This was the greatest of our dangers. For had we not come at that instant that we did, unto the sea-side, our Boats had been gone, they be∣ing already under sail, and we had inevitably perished eve∣ry man. Thus we put off from the shoar, and got on board about ten of the clock at night, having been invol∣ved in a continual and bloody fight with the enemy all that day long.

Page  135

CHAP. XVII. A description of the Bay of Arica. They sail from hence unto the Port of Guasco, where they get Provisions. A draught of the said Port. They land again at Hilo to revenge the former affronts, and took what they could find.

HAving ended our attempt at Arica, the next day,* be∣ing January the last, we plyed to and fro in sight of the Port, to see if they would send out the three ships we had seen in the Harbour to fight us. For upon them we hoped to revenge the defeat and disappointment we had received at the Town the day before. But our expectati∣ons in this point also were frustrated, for not one of those vessels offered to stir.

The houses of this Town of Arica are not above eleven foot high, as being built of earth,* and not of brick or timber. The Town it self is foursquare in figure, and at one corner thereof standeth the Castle, which may easi∣ly be commanded even with small Arms, from the hill which lyeth close unto it. This place is the Embarcadero, or Port-Town of all the Mineral Towns that lye herea∣bouts, and hence is fetched all the Plate that is carryed to Lima, the head-City of Peru. I took the Bay of Arica as it appeared to me thus.

Page  136

[illustration]
A description of Arica

Page  137On Tuesday February the first, we had a clear observa∣tion, and by it we found Lat. 19 d. 06. South.* This day we shared the old remains of our Plate, taken in some of our former booties. Our shares amounted only unto thir∣ty seven pieces of Eight to each man.

N. B. Here I would have my Reader to take notice, that from this day forwards, I kept no constant Diary or Journal, as I had done before, at least for some considerable space of time, as you shall see hereafter; my disease and sickness at Sea being the occasion of intermitting what I had never failed to do in all the course of this Voyage till now. Only some few Memorandums, as my weakness gave leave, I now and then committed to paper, the which I shall give you as I find them, towards a continuance of this History. Thus:

Munday February the 14th, this night between eleven add twelve of the clock dyed on board our ship William Cook,* who was the servant afore-mentioned unto Captain Edmund Cook, of whom likewise mention hath been often made in this Journal. He desisted not in the least, even at his last hour, to accuse his Master of Baggering him, as before was related. Moreover, that his Master should say, It was no sin to steal from us, who thought it none to rob the Spaniards.

February the 16th, 1680. this day we found our selves to be in Lat. 27 d. 30 South. We had a constant breeze at S. E. and S. S. E. till we got about two hundred Leagues from land. Then at the Eclipse of the Moon, we had a a calm for two or three days:* and then a breeze at North for the space of two days; after which we had a calm a∣gain for two or three days more.

March the first we found Latitude by observation 34 d. 01 South.* At this time beginneth the dirty weather in these Seas. We lay under a pair of courses, the wind be∣ing at S. E. and E. S. E. with a very great Sea at S.S.E

March the third, all hands were called up, and a Councel held; wherein considering it was now dirty weather,* and late in the year, we bore up the Helm, and resolved to go Page  138 unto the Main for water, and thence to Leeward, and so march over land towards home, or at least to the North Sea. But God directed us from following this resolution, as you shall hear hereafter. We being thus determined that day, we stood N.E. with a strong wind at S.E. and E.S.E.

On March the fifth dyed our Coquimbo Indian. The se∣venth we had a west-wind, our course being E. by N. The eighth of the said Month we were put to an allowance,* having only one Cake of bread a day. March the tenth we had a strong South-wind.

*On March the 12th we fell in with the main land, some∣thing to Leeward of Coquimbo. Within the Island of Pax∣aros are double lands, in whose Valleys are fires for the melting of Copper,* with which Metal these Hills abound. Off to sea-board it is a rocky land, and within it is sandy. About the distance of eight Leagues to Leeward is a rocky point with several Keys or Rocks about it. About one half mile to Leeward of this point turneth in the Port of Guasco.* Right against the anchoring are three Rocks, close under the shoar.

Being arrived here, we landed on shoar threescore men of our company,* with design to get Provisions, and any thing else that we could purchase. The people of the Country ran all away as soon as they saw us. There was building on shoar in this Port, a fire-Barque of sixteen or eighteen Tuns burthen, with a Cock-boat belonging unto it.* We took one Indian Prisoner, and with him went up the space of six or seven miles into the Country, unto an Indian Town of Threescore or Fourscore houses. From thence we came back unto the Church, which is distant four miles from the Sea-side, and lodged there all night. Here are multitudes of good Sheep and Goats in the Countrey adjoyning to this Port, and it is watered with an excellent fresh-water River; but the getting of water is very diffi∣cult, the banks being very high, or otherwise inaccessible. However, we made a shift to get in five hundred Jars of water. Furthermore, we brought away one hundred and Page  139 twenty Sheep, and fourscore Goats, with which stock we victualled our vessel for a while. As for Oxen, they had driven them away farther up into the Countrey.* The ju∣risdiction of Guasco it self is governed by a Teniente, or Deputy-Governour, and a Fryar, and is in subjection unto the City of la Serena above-mentioned, as being a dependance thereupon. Here groweth both Corn, Pease, Beans, and several other sorts of Grain; and for Fruits, this place is not inferiour unto Coquimbo. Here we found likewise a Mill to grind Corn, and about two hundred bushels there∣of ready ground; the which we conveyed on board our ship. Every house of any account hath branches of wa∣ter running through their yards or courts. The Inhabi∣tants had hidden their Wine, and other best things, as Plate, and Jewels, having descryed us at sea before our landing:* so that our booty here, besides Provisions, was inconside∣rable. However, we caught some few Fowls, and eat five or six Sheep, and likewise a great Hog, which tasted ve∣ry like unto our English Pork. The hills are all barren, so that the Countrey that beareth Fruit, is only an excellent Valley, being four times as broad as that of Hilo above-mentioned. These people of Guasco serve the Town of Coquimbo with many sorts of Provisions. We gave the Indian whom we had taken his liberty, and I took the Port of Guasco thus.

Page  144

[illustration]
A Description of Guasco

Page  141Tuesday March the 15th, 1680.* This morning we de∣parted from the Port of Guasco aforementioned, with very little wind, having done nothing considerable there, except∣ing only the taking in the few Provisions above-related. We were bent therefore to seek greater matters, having experimented but ill success in most of our attempts hither∣to. On March the 20th, Moro de Horse, being high dou∣bled Land, and at E. by N. appeared thus unto us, in Lat. 24 d. South.

[illustration]
Moro de Horse. Lat. 24 d. S.

At North, and at the distance of ten Leagues, more or less, we saw the great and high hill of Morro Moreno, being so called from its colour. It is a dark hill, but much high∣er and bigger than the other afore-mentioned, and appea∣reth like unto an Island, thus.

[illustration]
Morro Moreno. Lat. 23 d. 30 S.

We had now very dark weather all along the Coast. On Page  142March the 21 we were West from the Bay of Mexillones.* The point of this Bay one League upwards, representeth exactly a Sugar-loaf.

*March the 22. This day our Boat and Canoas went from the ship, being well man'd, to find the River Loa. They went also about two Leagues to Leeward of it,* unto a fish∣ing village, but could find no place fit for landing; where∣upon they returned without acting any thing. The next day another Canoa of our company went out upon the same exploit, but found the same success. Yet notwith∣standing, here Sir Francis Drake watered, and built a Church, as we were told by our Pilot. This Church is now stand∣ing on the Sea-side by the River, whose mouth is now dry. There are several Huts to windward of it; and from the said Church or Chappel goeth a great path up the hills, which leadeth to Pica.

On Thursday March the 24th, we found Latitude by observation, 20 d. 10 South. This day also we saw Land, at eighteen leagues distance more or less.

Sunday March the 27th, we saw Mora de Sama, and La cumba at some distance. The same day we had an obser∣vation, and found by it Lat. 18 d. 17 South. That eve∣ning we departed from the ship with our Boats and Canoas, towards the Coast of Hilo, upon which we now were. We landed and took the village of Hilo undiscryed,* they scarce suspecting we could have any design upon that place the second time. We caught the Fryar who was Chaplain unto the Town, and most of the Inhabitants asleep, making them prisoners at war. Here we heard a flying report, as if five thousand English had lately taken Panama the second time, and kept it. But this rumour, as it should seem, pro∣ved to be a falsity. At this time the River came out, and was overflown, it being near the time of the freshes. Here the prisoners told us,* that in Arica ten of our men were still alive, whereof three were Surgeons, all the rest being dead of their wounds. The Spaniards sent word unto Hilo, that we had killed them seventy men, and wounded three times Page  143 as many of their Forces. But here the Inhabitants said, that of forty five men sent to the relief of Arica from hence, there came home but only two alive. We filled what water we pleased here; but a small boat that we brought from Guasco broke loose from us, and was saved to pieces on the Rocks. Here we took eighteen Jars of wine, and good store of new Figs. On Tuesday following we went up to the Sugar-work, mentioned in our former ex∣pedition against Hilo, and found all Fruits just ripe, and sit for eating. There we laded seven Mules downwards with Molossus and Sugar. The Inhabitants told us moreover, that those men who came to fight us when we were here the first time, were most of them Boys, and had only fifty Fire-arms amongst them. They being commanded by an English Gentleman who is Married at Arequipa. Likewise that the owner of the Sugar-work afore-mentioned was now engaged in a Suit at Law against the Town of Hilo, pretending it was not the English who robbed him, and spoilt his Ingenio, when we were there before, but the Townsmen themselves. This day in the evening we sailed from Hilo with dark weather, and little wind, which con∣tinued for several days afterwards.

Page  140

CHAP. XVIII. They depart from the Port of Hilo, unto the Gulf of Nicoya, where they take down their decks, and mend the sailing of their ship. Forty seven of their Companions leave them, and go home o∣ver land. A description of the Gulf of Ni∣coya. They take two Barks and some Prisoners there. Several other remarques belonging to this Voyage.

*FRom the time that we set sail from the Port of Hilo, until Sunday April the tenth, 1681. nothing hapned unto us that might be accounted remarkable; neither did I take any notes all this while, by reason of my indisposi∣tion afore-mentioned. This day we could hear distinctly the breaking of the Seas on the shoar, but could see no land, the weather being extream dark and hasey. Not∣withstanding about noon it cleared up, and we found our selves to be in the Bay called de Malabrigo. The land in this Bay runneth due East and West. By an observation made, we found this day 6 d. 35 South. We saw from hence the Leeward Island of Lobos, or Seals, being nothing else than a rocky and scraggy place. On the S.W. side thereof is a red hill, which is a place about the said Island, where the Indian Fishermen much frequent. It is situate in Lat. 6 d. 15 S. This day likewise in the evening we saw the Point called Aguja.

On Saturday April the 16th, we came within a league distance of the West-end of the Island of Plate,* above des∣cribed.* The next day unto this, being Sunday April the 17th, 1681. our Mutineers broke out again into an open Page  141 dissention, they having been much dissatisfyed all along the course of this Voyage, but more especially since our unfor∣tunate fight at Arica, and never entirely reconciled unto us since they chose Captain Watling, and deposed Sharp at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, as was related above. Nothing now could appease them, nor serve their turn, but a separa∣tion from the rest of the company, and a departure from us. Hereupon this day they departed from the ship, to the number of forty seven men, all in company together,* with design to go over land by the same way they came into those Seas. The rest who remained behind, did fully resolve, and faithfully promise to each other, they would stick close together. They took five slaves in their com∣pany, to guide and do them other service in that Journey. This day we had 1 d. 30 minutes Southern Latitude. We sailed N. N. W. before the wind.

The next day after their departure, being April the 18th, we began to go to work about taking down one of our up∣per decks,* thereby to cause our ship still to mend her sail∣ing. We now made a N. W. by N. way, and had Latitude by observation 25 North, the wind being at S. W.

On April the 19th we made a N. W. by N. way. This day our observation was Lat. 2 d. 45 North. In the af∣ternoon we had cloudy weather. The following day like∣wise we made the same way, and by it seventy miles, ac∣cording to my reckoning.

On the twenty first in the morning we had some small showers of rain, and but little wind. We saw some Turtle upon the surface of the water, and great quantity of fish. We caught twenty six small Dolphins. By a N. W. by N. way, we reckoned this day forty miles.

April the 22. this day we caught seven large Dolphins,* and one Bonito. We saw likewise whole multitudes of Turtle swimming upon the water, and took five of them. We had an observation that gave us Lat. 5 d. 28 North. Hereabouts runneth a great and strong current. This day we lowered the quarter deck of our ship, and made it even unto the upper deck.

Page  142*The following day we had but small wind, and yet great showers of rain. Hereupon every man saved water for himself, and a great quantity was saved for the whole company. In the morning of this day we caught eight Bonitos, and in the evening ten more.

On April the 24th we had both cloudy and rainy wea∣ther. By an observation we had Lat. 7 d. 37 North. Meridian difference was ninety two Leagues. This morn∣ing we caught forty Bonitos, and in the evening thirty more. In the afternoon we stood North, the wind being at S. W. by S.

*Munday April the 25th, all the night before this day, we had huge gusts of wind and rain. At break of day we were close in with Land, which upon examination pro∣ved to be the Island of Cano. To westward thereof is ve∣ry high land. About noon this day it cleared up, and we had Lat. 8 d. 34 N. In the evening we sent a Canoa to search the Island. In it they found good water, and even ground, but withal, an open road. At night we stood off the first watch, and the last we had a land wind.

*The next day following, at day light we stood in, and about noon we came to an anchor at the East side of the Island afore-mentioned, which is not in breadth above one league over. In the afternoon we removed from our for∣mer anchoring place, and anchored again within shot of the N. E. point of the Island. In this place groweth great number of Cacao trees,* all over the greatest part of the Isle. On the North side thereof are many Rivulets of good water to be found in sandy bays.* We saw moreover some good Hogs on shoar, whereof we killed one and two pigs. Here are great numbers of Turtle-doves, and huge store of fish, but withal, very shye to be caught. To North∣ward of the Island it looketh thus.

Page  143

[illustration]
Isla del Cano. Lat. 8 d. 45 N.

April the 27th, we had some rain and wind the forepart of the day; but the afternoon was fair.* The next day in like manner we had great quantity of rain. On Satur∣day the 30th, about seven of the clock in the morning we weighed from the aforesaid Island with little wind, and stood N. W. That day fell much rain with great thunder and lightning.

Munday, May the 2d. This day we observed and found Lat. 9 D. N. The Coast all along appeared to us very high and mountainous, and scarce six hours did pass,* but we had thunder, lightning, and rain. The like continued for the two days following, wherein we had nothing but al∣most continual thunder and rain.

On May the 5th we had an indifferent fair day. And that evening we were right off of the Gulf of Nicoya.*

Friday, May the 6th. This morning we saw the Cape very plain before us. N. by E. from it, are certain keys at eight leagues distance, close under the Main. We steered N. N. W. towards the biggest of them; at whose E. S. E. side are two or three small rocks. The Main Eastward is fine Savana, or plain and even land, through which goeth a very great road, which is to be seen from off at Sea. At noon the Port of Caldero,* commonly called Puerto Caldero bore N. from us. At which time the Ebb forced us to sound in the middle of the Gulf, where we found fourteen fathom water. After this we anchored nearer unto the Page  144 Eastern keys, in the depth of nineteen fathom, where we had oosey ground.

Saturday, May the 7th. The night before this day was very fair all night long. In the morning we went in a Canoa, being several in company, to seek for a place to lay our ship in. Amongst the Islands along the shoar, we found many brave holes, but little or no water in them, which caused us to dislike what we had found. On one of the said Islands we hapned to find a hat, and many empty jarrs of water, which shewed us that some people had been late∣ly there. About eight in the evening our ship weighed anchor at young flood, and about three after noon we an∣chored again in six fathom water.

Sunday, May the 8th, 1681. The night before this day, we had much rain with thunder and lightning. The morn∣ing being come, our Commander Captain Sharp departed from the ship in two Canoas, with twenty two men in his company, out of design to surprize any vessels or people they could meet hereabouts. In the mean while, i'th' evening we drove up with the tide (there being no wind) in the ship,* for the space of two or three leagues higher, till that we found but three fathom high water. Here we back't a stern. At this time we saw one of our Ca∣noas coming off from the Island, that was at head of us (which was named Chira) calling for more men and arms, and saying there was two sail of ships that were seen higher up the Gulf. Hereupon eight of us went away with them ashoar, whereof two joyned the party aforementioned, and the six remaining were appointed to guard the prisoners they had taken. Unto these we shewed our selves very kind, as finding that they were very sensible of the cruelties o the Spaniards towards them and their whole Nation. Here we found to the number of eight or nine houses, and a small Chappel standing. These people have been in for∣mer times a considerable and great Nation, but are now al∣most destroyed and extinguished by the Spaniards. We a∣scended a creek of the Sea for the space of a league, or Page  145 thereabouts, and took there by surprisal two Barks, which were the two sail they had told us of before. On of these Barks was the same we had taken before at Panama, of which I made mention at the beginning of this Histo∣ry.

On Munday following this day, we weighed anchor with our barks, and drove down the creek, with the tide at ebb, towards our ship.* The prisoners that we had taken here, informed us, that when we were to Westward in these Seas before, there lay one hundred men at the Port of Santa Maria. That our men who left us at the Island of Cayboa, as was mentioned above, met the other Bark that we lost at Sea, as we were sailing thither, and thus all went over land together. That in the North Seas, near Puerto Velo, they had taken a good ship, and that for this cause, ever since the Spaniards had kept at the mouth of the river of Santa Maria, three Armadilla-barks, to stop and hinder others from going that way. On Munday night our Captain with twenty four men, went from the ship in∣to another creek, and there took several prisoners, among whom was a Shipwright and his men, who were judged able to do us good service in the altering of our ship; those Carpenters being there actually building two great ships for the Spaniards. Having taken these men, they made a float of timber to bring down the Tools and Instruments they were working withal. Here it hapned that they put several tools, and some quantity of iron-work, into a Doree, to be conveyed down the river with the float. But this Doree sank by the way, as being over-laden with iron, and one of our company,* by name John Alexander a Scotch∣man, was unfortunately drowned by this means.

On Thursday following, May the 12th, we sent a Canoa from the ship, and found the Doree that was drowned. That evening likewise drove down the body of our drow∣ned man aforementioned. Hereupon we took him up,* and on Friday morning following threw him over-board, giving him three French vollies for his customary Cere∣mony. Page  146 Both this day and the day before, we fetched wa∣ter from a Point near the houses, on the Island of Chira a∣forementioned. From the ship also we sent away a Spa∣nish Merchant,* whom we had taken among the prisoners, to fetch a certain number of Beeves, that might serve for a ransom of the new bark taken here. This day the weather was fair; but on Sunday following it rained from morning until night.

On Munday, May the 16th, we began to work all hands together on our ship. On Tuesday an Indian boy named Peter ran away from us.* He belonged unto Captain Saw∣kins, and waited upon him as his Servant. On Wednesday died an Indian slave,* whose name was Salvador. On Thurs∣day we heard thirty or forty guns fired on the Main, which caused us to think that these would also turn to Hilo Beeves. On Friday we caught cockles, which were as large as both our fists. At night there fell such dreadful rain, with thunder,* lightning, and wind, that for the space of two hours the air was as light as day; the thunder not ceasing all the while. On Sunday we continued to work; the night before which day we had more thunder, lightning, and rain.

Wednesday, May the 25th. This day we finished our great piece of work,*viz. the taking down the deck of our ship. Besides which, the length of every mast was short∣ned, and all was now serv'd and rigg'd. Insomuch that it would seem incredible unto strangers, could they but see how much work we performed in the space of a fortnight or less.* The same day likewise we set at liberty our Spa∣nish Carpenters, who had been very serviceable to us all this while; the old Pilot; the old Spaniard taken at the Isle of Yqueque; and several others of our Spanish prisoners and slaves. Unto these people, but chiefly unto the Spanish Carpenters as a reward of their good service, we gave the new Bark, which we had taken at this place. But the old Bark we thought fit to keep,* and sail her in our company, as we did, putting into her for this purpose six of our own Page  147 men and two slaves. The next day we fell down as low as Vanero, a place so called hereabouts, and would have sailed a∣way again that very evening,* but that our tackle gave way in hoisting our anchor, whereby we lay still. In the Gulf of Nicoya we experimented most commonly a fresh breeze, and at night a land wind.

Friday, May the 27th. This day likewise we drove down with the tide as low as Cavallo, another place so named in the Gulf. Here we stayed and watered that day; and here one Cannis Marcy our Interpreter,* ran away from us.

On May the 28th in the morning we sailed from thence, and came within twenty nine leagues of that rich and roc∣ky shore. Yet notwithstanding we had but seven fathom water. Here I saw this day a white Porpus.* Behind this Island is a Town called New Cape Blanco. At Puerto Cal∣dero above-mentioned is but one Store-house to be seen. We came to an anchor in the depth of seven fathom water, at the distance of a league from shoar, and caught five Tur∣tle.

May the 29th. This day we saw Cape Blanco. Both this day and the day following we continued turning it out of the Gulf, against a South wind. Here I took the ensuing demonstration of the Gulf of Nicoya, which, for the use of the Reader, I have hereunto annexed.

Page  148

[illustration]
Gulf of Nicoya described

Page  149

CHAP. XIX. They depart from the Gulf of Nicoya, un∣to Golfo Dulce, where they careen their Ves∣sel. An account of their sailings along the Coast. Also a description of Golfo Dulce. The Spaniards force the Indians of Darien un∣to a Peace, by a stratagem contrived in the name of the English.

WEdnesday, June the first, 1681.* This day we had very fair weather, and yet withal but little wind. Hereupon the Tide, or Current, drove us to the Westward of Cabo Blanco. Off of this Cape, and at the distance of two miles within the Sea, is situate a naked and nothing but barren Key. At E. by N. and at four leagues distance, Cape Blanco gave us this appearance.

[illustration]
Cabo BLANCO. Lat. 9 D. 30 N.

The Coast here along runneth N. W half W. and grow∣eth lower and lower towards Cape Guyones. This Cape now mentioned, at seven leagues distance, and at N. W. by N. appeared thus unto us.

Page  150

[illustration]
Cabo de Guyones. Lat. 10 D. 00 N.

At first sight the Cape appeared very like unto two I∣slands. The latter part of this day was cloudy, which hin∣dred much our prospect.

June the 2d. This morning we saw land, which appea∣peared like several Keys to us at N. W. by N. and at seven leagues distance. It was the land of Puerto de Velas, and appeared thus.

[illustration]
Puerto de VELAS.

*This evening our Captain called us together, and asked our opinions concerning the course we ought to steer. Ha∣ving discussed the points by him proposed amongst us, we all resolved to bear up for Golfo Dulce, and there to careen our Vessels. This being done, we concluded to go from thence unto the Cape, and cruize thereabouts under the E∣quinoctial. We observed this day that our Bark taken at the Gulf of Nicoya, sailed much better than our ship.

Friday, June the 3d. The night before this day was ve∣ry fair, and we had a fresh wind, our course being S. E. This morning we saw no land. In the evening the wind came about at S. S. W. and S. W. by S.

Page  151June the 4th. This day we stood E. and E. by N. the wind being W. and W. by N. In the evening we stood N. E. and descryed land at the distance of twenty four leagues, more or less, from Cabo Blanco.

Sunday, June the 5th. Last night we lay by for all, or the greatest part thereof. This morning we saw the Island of Cano above described, which bore E. S. E. from us. We saw likewise multitudes of fish, but they would not bite. Also Water-snakes of divers colours.

June the 6th. All the night past we had rain, and with it but little wind. Yea, scarce enough to carry us clear off from the Island afore-mentioned. Towards morning we had a fresh wind at N. N. W. So then we stood out S. until morning, and this being come, we stood N. E. by E. The land runneth from Punta Mala to Golfo Dulce, and Punta Borrica, E. S. E. half S. At nine leagues distance we laid the Island of Cano. And Punta Borrica at the same distance, or thereabouts, looketh thus.

[illustration]
Punta Borrica. Lat. 8 D. 00 N.

The West-end of Golfo Dulce is very high land, and a high rock lye close off it. Besides which, two other rocks lyeth farther out; the outermost of which is a mile distant from the shoar. The East-side is also high, but breaketh into small points and bays, growing lower and lower to Punta Borrica. We came within the mouth of the Gulf about the space of a mile.* Then we anchored in eight fathom and a half water. The mouth of the Gulf is almost three leagues over.

The next day, being June the 7th, we weighed anchor a∣gain Page  152 at young flood, and got about two leagues higher. At evening we came again to an anchor in the depth of seven fathom and a half water. It rained this day until eight of the clock,* more like the pouring down of water from the clouds, than the usual falling of drops.

Wednesday, June the 8th, at day break we weighed an∣chor again, with a fresh Sea-breeze. The higher up we went, the deeper we found the Gulf, and at last no ground even with thirty fathom of line. This day we sent our Canoa away to seek water and a good place to lay our ship in. Having landed, they found one Indian and two boys, all which they made prisoners and brought aboard.* Here we used them very kindly, giving them victuals and cloaths, for they had no other than the bark of a tree to cover their nakedness withal. Being examined, they informed us that a Spanish Priest had been amongst them, and had made Peace with their Nation, ordering them strictly not to come near any ship nor vessel that had red Colours; forasmuch as that they were English-men, and would cer∣tainly kill them. Being asked where now the Priest was? they answered he was gone to a great Spanish Town, which was distant from thence four sleeps up in the Coun∣try. After this, the Indian left the two boys which were his children, with us, and went to fetch more Indians unto us, from a Plantane-walk or grove, situate by a river a league off, or thereabouts. We came to an anchor in a Bay close by one of the Indian Keys, where two fresh Ri∣vers were within a stones throw of each other, in twenty seven fathom and a half water, and at a cables length from the mark of low water. The Indians whom our prisoner went to seek, came to us several times, selling unto us Ho∣ney, Plantanes, and other necessaries that we usually bought of them, or truckt for with other things. We also made use of their bark-logs in tallowing our ship, in which con∣cern they did us good service. Their Darts are headed with iron as sharp as any razor.

Page  153Here one of the prisoners which we took at the Gulf of Nicoya, informed us, by what means,* or rather stratagem of War the Spaniards had forced a peace upon the Indians of the Province of Darien, since our departure from thence. The manner was as followeth. A certain Frenchman who ran from us at the Island of Taboga unto the Spaniards, was sent by them in a ship to the Rivers mouth, which disem∣bogueth from that Province into the South-Sea. Being ar∣rived there, he went ashoar by himself in a Canoa, and told the Indians, that the English who had passed that way, were come back from their adventures in the South-Sea. Withal, he asked them, if they would not be so kind and friendly unto the English men, as to come aboard and con∣duct them on shoar? The poor deceived Indians were ve∣ry joyful to understand this good news; and thus forty of the chiefest men amongst them went on board the Spanish vessel, and were immediately carryed prisoners at War to Panama. Here they were forced to conclude a peace, though upon terms very disadvantageous unto them, before they could obtain their liberty.

These poor and miserable Indians of Golfo dulce, would come every day into our company,* and eat and drink very familiarly with us all the time we were there. We laid our ship on ground, but the water did not ebb low enough to see her keel. Mean while we were careening our ves∣sel, we built a house upon the shoar, both to lodge and eat in; and every day we caught plenty of good fish. On Sunday June the 12th, the work of Careening our ship go∣ing on in due order, we came to cleanse our hold,* and here on a suddain, both my self and several others were struck∣en totally blind with the filth and nastiness of the said place. Yet soon after we recovered our sight again, without any other help than the benefit of the fresh and open air, which dissipated those malignant vapours that oppressed our eyes. On June the 14th, we had a great and fierce Tornado, with which our Cable broke,* and had it not then hapned to be high water at that instant, we had been Page  154 lost inevitably. However, we had the good fortune to shoar her up again, and by that means secure our selves from farther danger. On June the 21. we weighed anchor a∣gain, and went a league higher than the former place. Here we watered, and in the mean while left men below to cut wood.

*Thursday June the 23. this day ran away from us two Negroes; the name of one of them was Hernando, who was taken with Don Thomas de Argandona, upon the Coast of Guayaquil, as was mentioned above. The other was named Silvestre, being taken at the Town of Hilo. Fol∣lowing the example of these afore-mentioned, on Munday June the 27th, that is four days after, two more of our prisoners endeavoured to make their escape, both of them slaves. One of these was named Francisco, who was a Ne∣gro, and had been taken in the Cacao-ship mentioned be∣fore. The name of the other was also Francisco, and he was an Indian born,* who was taken before Panama. Their attempts to escape succeeded not, for we caught them both again, before they got on shoar. On Tuesday following I went to sail up and down the Gulf, in the little Bark be∣longing to our ship; and having viewed all places, took this description of Golfo Dulce here inserted. Our Cap∣tain gave this Gulf the name of King CHARLES his Harbour.

Page  155

[illustration]
Adescription of Golfo Dulce

Page  156

CHAP. XX. They depart from Golfo Dulce, to go and cruise under the Aequinoctial. Here they take a rich Spanish vessel with 37000 Pieces of Eight, besides Plate and other Goods. They take also a Pacquet-boat bound from Panama to Lima. An account of their Sailings and the Coasts along.

OUr vessel being now careened, and all things in a rea∣diness for our departure,* on Tuesday June the 28th in the afternoon, we weighed anchor to go to Sea again, turning out towards the mouth of Golfo Dulce. Our de∣sign was to cruise under the Aequinoctial, as had been con∣cluded upon before, thereby to get what purchase we could by Sea, seeing the greatest part of our attempts upon land had proved hitherto very unsuccessful unto us.

Wednesday June the 29th, both the night last past and this day we had rainy weather. About three in the after∣noon a fresh gale sprang up at S. W. and S.S.W. our course being S. E. and S. E. by S. At five this evening the Gulf bore N. W. by W. being seven leagues distant; and Punta Borrica three leagues and an half distant.

*Thursday June the 30th, all night past we enjoyed a fresh gale at S.S.W. We sailed in the Barque (where I was) bet∣ter than the man of war; for so we called the Trinity ves∣sel; notwithstanding that she was newly cleansed and tal∣lowed. This day we had hasey weather, and I reckoned my self from Punta Borrica S.S.E. eighteen leagues and an half.

*July the first 1681, last night we had two or three Tor∣nados. I reckoned this day a S.S.E. way, and by a clear ob∣servation, Page  157 found Lat. 6 d. 10. North. We saw great quan∣tities of fish as we sailed this day.

July the second, we made a S. East way, and our recko∣ning was 64 by it. By observation I found Lat. 5 d. 20. North. At noon the same day we had a fresh gale at S.W. with some rain.

July the third, we had hasey weather. We made a S.E. by S. way, and 37.

Munday July the fourth, the night past was windy with rain, which forced us to hand our top-sails. Our recko∣ning this day was a S. E. way, and an hundred miles.

July the fifth we had a clear night the last past, and with∣al, a fresh gale. By this we made a S.E. way. Our Lati∣tude this day gave us 2 d. 20. North. This morning we saw Land Southward of us lying in low hammocks. It was the Point, so called, of Manglares.

Wednesday July the 6th, we turned up along shoar, and by observation took this day, Lat. 2 d. 02 N. Hereabouts every new Moon is experimented a windward current. In the evening of this day we were close in with low land. We had windy weather and a great Sea.

Thursday July the seventh, this day by observation ta∣ken, we found Lat. 01 d. 48. North. In the evening of the said day we lost sight of the said ship.

The next day being July the eighth, we saw the ship a∣gain, whose loss began to create some concern in our minds. This day we made very high land all along as we went. And the Port, or rather Bay, of San Mateo, or St. Matthews, appeared unto us like several Islands.

Saturday July the ninth, this morning we stood fair in with the Port of Tucames▪ Off of the highest part of the land seemeth to lye a Key. At the North East point of the Port it appeareth exactly thus.

Page  158

[illustration]
Puerto de Tucames.

This day at noon we had a clear observation, which gave us Lat. 01 d 22 North.

Sunday July the tenth, last night past we stood off to Sea, thereby to keep clear of the shoar. This days obser∣vation shewed us Lat. 01 d. 31. North. About noon the same day we hapned to espy a Sail,* unto which immedi∣ately we gave chace. We bore up one point of the Com∣pass, thereby to hinder her lasking away; but notwith∣standing in the evening lost sight of her again. However, our great ship got up with her, and about eight of the clock at night made her a Prize. She proved to be the same ship named San Pedro, which we had taken the last year, being then bound from Truxillo to Panama, and laden with Wine, Gunpowder, and pieces of Eight, whereof mention was made in its due place. Thus this same bottom became doubly fortunate unto us, being twice taken by us in the space of fourteen Months. For she had on board her now twenty one thousand pieces of Eight, in eight Chests, and in bags sixteen thousand more, besides Plate.

Munday and Tuesday the 11th and 12th of the said Month we made in for the shoar. Our Prize was so deep∣ly laden, that she seemed clearly to be buryed in the water. She had forty men on board her besides some Merchants nd Fryars. On Tuesday an observation gave us Lat. 1 . 20 N.

Wednesday July the 13th, this day we dared not adven∣ture into the Bay of San Mateo, because we saw some In∣diansPage  159 who had made a great fire on shoar, which as we judged, was designedly done to give intelligence of our ar∣rival. Hereupon we bore away for the River of San Tia∣go, six leagues more or less, distant from the Bay afore∣mentioned, to the North East. Thursday, Friday,* and Sa∣turday of the said week, we spent in taking out what par∣cels of Cacao-nut we thought sit from on board the Prize, which was chiefly laden with the said Commodity. This being done, we cut down the Main-mast by the board,* and gave them only their Main-sail, and thus turning the ship loose, sent away in her all our old slaves, for the good ser∣vice they had done us, taking new ones from the Prize in their room. One only we still detained, who was Fran∣cisco the Negro, that attempted to run away by swimming ashoar, as was mentioned above.

Sunday July the 17th, this day we went from the ship, and found the River of San Tiago afore-mentioned.* At the mouth of this River we stayed Munday and Tuesday following to take in water, which we now much wanted. On the sides of the River we found good store of Plantans. Our fresh water we fetched the distance of four miles up the River. We saw several Indians, but could not speak with them, they were so shy of us, being forewarned by the Spaniards not to come near us.

On wednesday July the 20th, we shared our plunder a∣mong our selves,* or rather this day made part of the divi∣dend of what we had taken, the rest being reserved to a∣nother day. Our prisoners being examined, informed us, that the Spaniards had taken up our Anchors and Cables which we left behind us at the Isle of Juan Fernandez. Al∣so that they had surprized the Mosquito Indian that we left behind us there on shoar, by the light of a fire which he made in the night upon the Isle.

Tuesday July the twenty first, all the four and twenty hours last past, we stood off and in.* The next day we shared the rest of our things taken in the Prize; as also the Money that was in the bags; the rest we laid up to divide Page  160 upon another occasion. Especially after such time as we were got through the Straights of Magallanes. Our divi∣dend amounted to the sum of 234 Pieces of Eight unto each man. Our prisoners informed us this day, that a new Vice-roy of Peru was arrived at Panama, and that he da∣red not adventure up to Lima in a ship of twenty five guns that was at Panama, for fear of meeting with us at Sea, but had chose rather to stay until the Armada came down from Lima to safeguard and conduct him thither.

July the 23 we had a fresh breeze at S.W. And the next day a clear observation, which gave us only Latitude 14. m. North. This day Cape San Francisco at N.E. appeared thus unto us.

[illustration]
Cabo de San Francisco.

Munday July the 25th, this day we observed Latitude 01 d. 20 S. And we had a South West wind. July the 26th, this morning we had a very great dew fallen in the night last past. The weather in like manner was very close. On Wednesday July the 27th Cape Passao, at S.S.W. and at six leagues distance appeared thus.

Page  161

[illustration]
Cabo Passao.

The same morning about seven of the clock we espied a sail E.S.E. from us, under the shoar.* We presently gave her close chace, as eagerly as we could, and about noon came up with her. But several of the people belonging to her were already got to shoar, whereby they made their es∣cape from being taken our prisoners. These were chiefly a Fryar, who was either a passenger, or Chaplain to the ves∣sel, and five Negroes. She proved to be a Barco de Avi∣so,* or Pacquet-boat that was going with Letters from Pa∣nama to Lima. In this Barque we took among other Pri∣soners, two white women who were passengers to the same place. Both these and the rest of the prisoners told us, they had heard at Panama, that we were all gone out of these Seas homewards over land, and that made them ad∣venture now up towards Lima, otherwise they had not come. This day and Thursday following, we spent in ta∣king out of the Pacquet-boat what we could find in her; which all were things of no considerable value, they having scarce brought any thing with them but the Pacquet. They told us moreover, that the new Vice-roy of Peru, of whom we made mention above, was setting forth from Panama under the conduct of three sail of ships; the one of six∣teen, the other of eight, and the third of six Guns. That a general peace was all over Europe, excepting only that the English had wars with the Argerines by Sea, and the Spani∣ards by land. Having got what we could out of the pri∣soners and the vessel, we gave them their liberty, and sent Page  162 them away in the same Barque, as being desirous not to en∣cumber ourselves with more then we could well manage. That night we stood out to Sea all night long, most of our men being fudled.

CHHP. XXI. They take another Spanish ship richly laden under the Aequinoctial. They make several Dividends of their booty among themselves. They arrive at the Isle of Plate, where they are in danger of being all Massacred by their Slaves and Priso∣ners. Their departure from thence for the Port and Bay of Paita, with design to plunder the said place.

THe next morning after we had turned away the Pacquet-Boat afore-mentioned,* the weather being very close, we espied another sail creeping close under our Lee. This vessel looked mighty big; so that we thought she had been one of their chiefest men of war, who was sent to surprize or destroy us. Notwithstanding, our brave Commander Captain Sharp resolved to fight her, and either to take the said vessel, though never so big, or that she should take us. Unto this effect, coming nearer unto her, we easily perceived she was a Merchant ship of great bulk, as most of your Spanish Vessels are, and withal, ve∣ry deeply laden. Being up with them, those within her fi∣red three or four Guns at us first, thinking to make their party good against us. But we answered them briskly, with a continual volley of small Arms, so that they soon ran down into the Hold,* and surrendred, crying aloud for quarter. As it should seem we had killed in that Volley Page  163 their Captain, and one Seaman, and also wounded their Boat-swain; which loss of their Commander daunted them so suddenly, he being a man of good repute in those Seas. Captain Sharp, with twelve more of our Company, entered her the first. In this Vessel I saw the beautifullest woman that I ever did see in all the South Sea. The name of the Captain of this Vessel was Don Diego Lopez, and the ship was called el Santo Rosario, or the Holy Rosary. The men we found on board her, were about the number of forty, more or less.

Having examined our prisoners, they informed us, that the day before they set sail from el Callao (from which Port they were going towards Panama) our men whom they had taken prisoners at Arica, were brought in to that place.* And that they had been very civilly entertained there by all sorts of people, but more especially by the women. That one of our Surgeons, whom we suspected to be Mr. Bul∣lock, was left behind and remained still at Arica.

We lay at anchor from Friday, July the 29th, which was the day we took this prize, until Wednesday following,* at the same place under Cape Passao that we anchored before. Here we sunk the Bark that we had taken at the Gulf of Nicoya, being willing to make use of what rigging she had,* and also to contract our number of men. In the mean while we took out of the prize much plate, and some mo∣ney ready coyned, besides six hundred and twenty jarrs of wine and brandy, and other things. Thus, leaving onely the fore-mast standing in the said vessel, we turned her a∣way, as we had done the others before, together with all the prisoners in her, giving them their liberty not to be encumbred with them; and withal, being desirous to spare our provisions as much as we could. We detained onely one man, named Francisco, who was a Biscainer, by reason he reported himself to be the best Pilot of those Seas. This being done, we shared all the Plate and Linnen taken in our prize, and weighed from thence, standing S.S. E. with a fresh wind that sprang up.

Page  164Friday, August the 4th. This day we shared the ready money taken in the Rosario,* our last prize. Our dividend came unto ninety four pieces of eight each man. Cape Passao, under which all these prizes were taken, at N. E. appeareth thus.

[illustration]
Cabo Passao.

The land runneth S. E. and is for five leagues together to windward of this Cape, all mountainous and high land.

The next day, being August the 5th, we compleated our dividends,* sharing this day all our odd money ready coined and plate, with some other things.

Saturday, August the 6th. This day perusing some let∣ters taken in the last prize,* I understood by them that the Spaniards had taken prisoner one of the last party of our men that left us. Also, that they were forced to fight all their way over land as they went, both against the Spani∣ards and the Indians; these having made peace with the Spaniards since our departure, as was mentioned above. That our English-men had killed, amongst other Spaniards, the brother of Captain Assientos, and Captain Alonso, an Officer so named. Moreover, that ten sail of Privateers were coming out of the North Sea, with intent to march over-land into the South Sea, as we had done before, but that they were prevented, being forced back by the great rains that fell near the Islands called Zamblas.

On August the 7th we had very fair weather, and not∣withstanding sometimes strong winds from shoar,* and also a strong Current to leeward. This ran so fierce against Page  165 us the next day, August the 8th, that in the space of the last four and twenty hours we lost three leagues.

Tuesday August the ninth,* we saw the Port and Town of Manta; this being nothing else than sixteen or seven∣teen stragling houses, with a large and high brick Church belonging unto it. What we got in the day by the help of the wind, we lost in the night by the current. The same fortune we had the next day, for we still gained no way all this while.

Thursday August the eleventh, all the night last past we had but little wind; this day we had a violent current to windward, as before, with some gusts of wind. How∣ever, by the help of these we made shift to get to wind∣ward of the Isle of Plate.

August the 12th, in the morning, we came to an anchor at the aforesaid Isle. We sent our boat ashoar with men,* as we had done formerly to kill Goats, but we experimented them to be extreamly shy and fugitive over what they were the last year. Here it was that our Quarter-master James Chappel and my self fought a Duel together on shoar.* In the evening of this day our slaves agreed among them∣selves, and plotted to cut us all in pieces, not giving quar∣ter to any, when we should be buryed in sleep. They conceived this night afforded them the fittest opportuni∣ty, by reason we were all in drink.* But they were disco∣vered unto our Commander by one of their own Compa∣nions. And one of them named San Tiago, whom we brought from Yqueque, leapt over-board; who notwith∣standing was shot in the water by our Captain, and thus punished for his Treason. The rest laid the fault on that slave, and so it passed, we being not willing to enquire any farther into the matter, having terrifyed them with the death of their companion. We lay at this Isle until Tues∣day following, and in the mean while gave our vessel a pair of boots and tops, being very merry all the while with the wine and brandy we had taken in the Prize.

Page  166On Tuesday August the 16th, in the afternoon, we weigh∣ed from thence with a S. W. wind. The Island at N. W. from us, gave us this following appearance.

[illustration]
Isla de la Plata.

Wednesday August the 17th, the Island at East, this morning and at two leagues and an half distance, appeared thus.

[illustration]
Island of PLATE.

All the day long until the evening we had a Leeward current, but then I could not perceive any.

*Thursday August the 18th, this morning we were to windward of the Island of Solango. In the night before we had continual misty rain. At noon the aforesaid Island bore N. by E. of us, and at three Leagues distance appear∣ed thus.

Page  167

[illustration]
Isla de Solango.

About three Leagues from Solango are two Rocks, called Los ahorcados. They appear both high and black unto the view. Besides this N. N. E. from Point St. Helena is a high Rock, which to windward thereof runneth shoa∣ling for the space of half a mile under water. It is distant about eight leagues, more or less, from the said Point, and is called Chanduy. At this place, and upon this Rock, was lost the ship afore-mentioned, that was ordered from these Seas, to the aid of our most gracious Soveraign King Charles the First, late King of England. Said ship had on board, as the Spaniards relate, to the sum of many millions of pieces of Eight; all which quantity of Plate was sent as a present unto our King, being then in his troubles, by the worthy Merchants of Lima. The Rock afore-mentioned lyeth a∣bout two Leagues distant from the Main.

August the 29th, this day our Pilot told us, that since we were to windward,* a certain ship that was coming from Lima, bound for Guayaquil, ran ashoar on Santa Clara, loo∣sing there in money, to the value of one hundred thou∣sand pieces of Eight; which otherwise, peradventure, we might very fortunately have met withal. Moreover, that the Viceroy of Peru had Beheaded their great Admiral Ponce, for not coming to fight and destroy us, mean while we were at Gorgona. This evening we saw the Point of Santa Helena, at the distance of ten leagues to S.S.E. from us.

August the 20th,* this day we had both misty and cold weather. In the afternoon we saw la Punta de Santa He∣lena,Page  168 at N. E. by N. and at seven leagues distance more or less.

On Sunday, August the 21st, we had a fair and clear day. I reckoned my self this day to be about twenty five leagues to the Southward of Santa Helena.

August the 22d. This morning about two of the clock we came close in with the shoar. We found our selves to be Leeward of a certain Point called Punta de Mero,* which is nothing else than a barren and rocky Point. Here runneth an eddy current under the shoar.

Tuesday, August the 23d. This day in the morning we had but little wind. At noon it blew fresh again. We made all day but short trips, and riffed top-sails.

Wednesday, August the 24th. This morning a great dew fell. At noon we were West from Cape Blanco. We found by observation Lat. 4 D. 13 S. We resolved now to bear up for Paita,* and take it by surprizal if possible, there∣by to provide our selves with many necessaries that we wanted.

CHAP. XXII. They arrive at Paita, where they are disap∣pointed of their expectations, as not daring to land, seeing all the Country alarmed before them. They bear away for the Straight of Magallanes. Description of the Bay and Port of Paita, and Colan. An account of their Sailings towards the Streight aforementioned.

THursday, August the 25th. The night before this day,* we stood off to Sea for fear of the shoar, and lest we should be descryed from the Coast of Paita, unto which we were now pretty nigh. About noon this day Page  169 we began to stand in again, and saw the homing of land, though with hasey weather. The next day, being August the 26th, we had cold winds, great dews, and dry wea∣ther.

Saturday, August the 27th. All this day,* but more e∣specially in the morning, we had many fogs. In the after∣noon we saw la Silla de Paita at W. S. W. being about five leagues distant from it.

Sunday August the 28th, last night about ten of the clock we were close in with land, at the distance of half a league, more or less to leeward of the Island of Lobos.* We continued our course all that night, and about break of day found our selves to be close under Pena Horadada, a high and steep rock so called.* From hence we sailed with a land-wind, and sent away from the ship two Canoas well Manned and Armed,* with good hopes that we had concei∣ved in our mind, to have taken the Town of Paita undis∣cryed. But as it should seem, they had already received news of our coming, or being upon that Coast, and also supplies of Forces that were sent them from the City of Piura, distant from thence twelve leagues up within the Country. These supplys consisted chiefly of three Com∣panies of Horse and Foot, all of them being armed with fire-arms. Besides this, they had made for the defence of the Town, a breast-work along the sea-side, and the great Church which lyeth at the outermost part of the Town. From these places, as also from a hill that covereth the Town, they fired at our men, who were innocently rowing towards shoar with their Canoas. This preposterous fi∣ring was the preservation of our people. For had the Spaniards permitted our men to come ashoar, they had as∣suredly destroyed them every man. But fear always hin∣dreth that Nation of Victory, at least in most of our at∣tempts.

Our men perceiving themselves to be discovered, and the enemy prepared for their reception, hereupon retreated,* and came on board the ship again without attempting to Page  170 land, or do any thing else in relation to the taking of the place. We judged there could not be less then one hun∣dred and fifty fire-arms, and four times as many Lances upon the shoar, all in a readiness to hinder our people from landing. Within the Town our Pilot told us, there might be to the number of one hundred and fifty Families, more or less.

Being disappointed of our expectations at Paita, we stood down the Bay towards Colan.* This is another Town so called, and which exceedeth three times the bigness of Pai∣ta. It is chiefly inhabited by Fishermen, and from hence they send fish unto most inland Towns of Peru; and also serve Paita with water from the River Colan, not far di∣stant from the Town. It is the space of two leagues more or less from the Town of Paita afore-mentioned to Colan, and from thence unto the River, one league, although the Houses of Colan do reach almost unto the River. The Town it self of Colan is only inhabited by Indians, and these are all rich; for as much as that they will be paid in ready money for every thing they do for the Spaniards. But the Town of Paita is chiefly inhabited by Spaniards, though there be also some Indians; but the Spaniards do not suffer the Indians to be any great gainers, or grow rich under them.

About ten of the clock a young breeze sprang up, and with that,* we stood away West, and W. by S. Within a little while it blew so fresh, that we were forced to riff our top-sails▪ the weather being very dark and hasey. I took the Port of Paita, and Bay of Colan, as they lay exactly situated, thus.

Page  171

[illustration]
A Description of Paita and Colan

Page  172Munday, August the 29th. All our hopes of doing any farther good upon the Coasts of the South Sea, being now frustrated, seeing we were descryed before our arrival where-ever we came, we resolved unanimously to quit all other attempts, and bear away for the Straight of Magal∣lanes, in order to our return homewards either for Eng∣land, or some of our Plantations in the West-Indies. This day we had a great dew, and I reckoned my self W. S. W. from Paita thirteen leagues and an half, with very little wind. So we stood East.

The next day, August the 30th, we had misty weather. We made a W.S. W. way, and by it five leagues and one third. In the afternoon of this day, the wind freshned a∣gain, having been but little before, and we stood E.S.E.

The last day of August we had very fair weather. I believed now that the wind was setled at S. E. and S. S. E. We made a S. S. W. way, and twenty one leagues and two thirds.

September the First. The night past was very cloudy, but withal we had a fresh gale. Our reckoning was a S. W by S. way, and that we had made sixteen leagues and two thirds.

September the 2d we reckoned a S. W. way, and by it twenty six leagues and two thirds. This day we had an observation, and found Lat. 7 D. 40 S.

September the 3d brought us both cloudy and misty weather. We made a W.S.W. way, and fourteen leagues.

September the 4th. This day the wind was at E. S. E. and sometimes E. coming in many flaws. We had a S. W. by S. way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and two thirds. We had a great Sea from the South.

Munday, September the 5th, we had great winds, and a high and short Sea. Our way was S. S. W. and half W. by which we reckoned twenty eight leagues and two thirds of a league.

September the 6th we had a very fresh wind at S. E. by E. with an indifferent smooth Sea. By observation we Page  173 found this day Latitude 12 d. 00 South. We made a S.W. by S. way, and twenty eight leagues and one third.

Wednesday September the seventh, we had a very fresh wind. We reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and thirty six leagues. We observed Latitude 13 d. 24 South. We make now each mess a plumb Pudding of Salt-water and wine-Lees.

On the eighth we enjoyed a fresh gale of wind, though with hasey weather. Our reckoning was a S.W. by S. way, and hereby twenty five leagues, and one third of a league.

September the 9th, we made a S.W. by S. way, and twen∣ty one leagues and a third. In the afternoon the wind came about something more Southerly, allowing us a S. W. course.

Saturday September the 10th, all the night past and this morning the wind was very fresh at East. Our way was S.S.W. and by our reckoning thirty five leagues and one third. The weather now was warm. An observation this day gave us Lat. 16 d. 40. South.

September 11 we had whiffling winds. A South-west half South way, and thereby twelve leagues and two thirds. By an observation made we found 17 d. 10 South. Now we had a very great Sea, so that we took in our sprit-sail.

September the 12th, all the night before this day, we were under a pair of courses. Yet this morning we hea∣ved out main top-sail. We made a W. S. W. way, and se∣venteen leagues and one third. By observation we found Lat. 17 d. 30 South.

The 13th, in the night past we had huge and great storms of wind. In the morning our Goose-head gave way, so that about noon we were forced to lye by till four in the afternoon to mend it. Our course was S. W. half W. and our reckoning twenty nine leagues, and two thirds of a league. Latitude by observation 18 d. 12 South.

Wednesday September the 14th, this day we had very hasey weather. We made a S.S.W. way, and twenty leagues.

September the 15th, this day likewise we had a S.S.W. Page  174 way, and reckoned twenty three leagues and one half. Our observation taken this day gave us 20 d. 09. South.

On September the 16th, we had a clear day, a S. W. half South way, and made sixteen leagues and two thirds, We found by observation, Lat. 20 d. 48 South.

The 17th, last night was very calm. Also this day, it being a full Moon. We reckoned a S.W. way, and only by reason of the calmness of the weather nine leagues and one third of a league. We had an observation which afforded us 21 d. 08 S. Latitude.

Sunday September the 18th, in the night last past a wind sprang up at S.S.E. which the morning of this day freshned at S. E. We made a W. S. W. way, and by it eighteen leagues. Moreover, this day we had a clear observation that shewed us Lat. 21 d. 30 S.

September the 19th, all the night past we had a very fresh wind. But this morning it came about to E. by S. and E.S.E. with hasey weather. I reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and twenty two leagues.

September the 20th, this day gave us a fresh wind, hasey weather, a S. by W. way, and hereupon twenty three leagues and one third.

September the 21, this day also the fresh gale continued, with cloudy, and sometimes misty weather. Our recko∣ning shewed us a S. by W. way, as the day before, and by it twenty eight leagues and one third. By an observation made, we found Lat. 25 d. 15 South.

Thursday September the 22, this day we had a very fresh wind. We reckoned a South half West way, and by that twenty nine leagues and two thirds. An observation ta∣ken gave us Lat. 26 d. 42 South. We observed this day a North East Sea,* which seemed very strange unto us.

The next day we had several showers of small rain. My reckoning was a S. by W. way; and thereupon twenty six leagues. We found by observation Lat. 27. d. 57 South.

September the 24th, we had hasey weather, and the wind not so fresh at E. S. E. with a smooth Sea. We made a Page  175 S. S. W. way half westerly, and twenty three leagues and two thirds. This day also an observation gave us Lat. 28 d. 57 South. I reckoned now that we were distant from Paita 302 leagues and two thirds.

Sunday September the 25th, this day we had not much wind, and withal, hasey weather. At noon the wind came East, then E.N.E. and then again N.E. by E. We reckoned a S. by E. way, half Easterly and 55.

Munday the 26th, we had hasey weather and a fresh wind at N. East. We reckon a S.E. half South way, and twenty four leagues. In the afternoon we experimented a N.N.E. Sea, and then soon after a N.N.E. wind. After this a North wind, and that but very little.

September the 27th, all the night before this day we had a fresh wind at N.N.E. About eight this morning it came about again to N.N.W. We made a S.E. by S. way, and thirty eight leagues. By observation I found Lat. 32 d. 30 South. Now we enjoyed a very smooth sea, and fair wea∣ther.

Wednesday September the 28th, in the night past a very fresh wind at N.N.W. and N.W. At break of day we had a wind at .... heaving us a back at once. At noon again the wind was at S.W. our course being S.E. This morning we took down our top gallant-masts. We made a S.E. by E. way, and on this road twenty seven leagues and two thirds. We found by an observation made, Lat. 33 d. 16 South, a South west sea.

On the 29th we had very windy and hasey weather, with some rain now and then. All last night we handed our main top-sail. We made a S.E. by E. way, and thirty two leagues and two thirds. We had a South west sea and wind.

Friday September the 30th, this day we had fresh winds between S. W. and W. We reckoned a S. E. half South way, and thereupon forty four leagues. By observation we found Lat. 35 d. 54 South.

Page  176October the first, the wind this day was not very fresh, but varying. My reckoning was a S. E. half South way, and twenty four leagues. An observation gave us 36 d. 50 South.* This day I finished another Quadrant, being the third I finished in this Voyage. We had a South west sea, with showers of rain and gusts of wind.

Sunday October the second, the wind this day was hang∣ing between W.N.W.' and N.W. by N. We made a S.E. by S. way, and thirty three leagues and two thirds. By ob∣servation we found 38 d. 14 South. About noon we had a fresh wind at N.W. and S.W.

October the third, the last night in the forepart thereof was clear, but the latter was rainy. The wind very fresh at N.W. by N. But this day we had little wind, and clou∣dy weather. A S. W. by W. wind, and a S.E. by S. way, by which we reckoned thirty three leagues and one third of a league.

October the fourth, we had a clear night and a very fresh wind. We reckoned a S. E. by S. way, and thereby forty three leagues. An observation taken shewed us, that we were in Lat. 41 d. 34 South. This day also fell several showers of rain.

October the fifth, we had a windy night the last past, and a clear day. We reckoned a S.S.E. half E. way, and forty four leagues and two thirds. By an observation made, we found Lat. 43 d. 26 South. The weather now was very windy, causing a huge tempestuous sea. The wind at N.W. and N.W. by N. blowing very high.

October the sixth, this day the wind was still at N.W. and yet not so fresh as it was yesterday, the weather very foggy and misty. As for the wind it came in gusts, so that we were forced to hand our top-sails, and sprit-sail. We reckoned a S. E. half S. way, and thereby forty three leagues and one third of a league. The Seas now were not so high, as for some days past. In the evening we scudded away under our fore course.

Friday, October the 7th. Last night was very cloudy, Page  177 and this day both dark and foggy weather with small rain. We made a S. E. way, and thirty leagues and two thirds. A fresh wind at N. N. W. and N. W. We keep still under a fore course, not so much for the freshness of the wind, as the closeness of the weather.

October the 8th, we had a clear night the night before this day, and withal a strong gale;* insomuch that this day we were forced to take in our fore-sail, and loosen our Mi∣zen, which was soon blown to pieces. Our eldest Sea∣men said that they were never in the like storm of wind before. The Sea was all in a foam. In the evening it dul∣led a little. We made a S. E. half E. way, and eighteen leagues, with very dark weather.

Sunday, October the 9th. All the night past we had a furious W. N. W. wind. We set our sail a drough,* and so drove to the Southward very much, and almost incredibly, if an observation had not hapned, which gave us Lat. 48 15 S. We had a very stiff gale at W. N. W. with a great Sea from W. which met with a S. S. W. Sea as great as it. Now the weather was very cold, and we had one or two frosty mornings. Yesterday in the afternoon we had a ve∣ry great storm of hail. At noon we bent another Mi∣zen.

Monday, Octob. the 10th. This day brought us a freshwind at N. W. and N. N. W, We made a S. E. half E. way, and by it forty four leagues. By observation we found Lat. 49 D. 41 S. I reckoned my self now to be East from Paita sixty nine leagues and an half.

Tuesday, October the 11th. Last night we had a small time calm. This day was both cloudy and rainy weather. The wind at S. W. and S. S. W. so furious, that at ten of the clock this morning we scudded under a main sail. At noon we lower'd our fore-yard while we sailed. We made a S. E. by E. way, and thirty leagues.

Page  178

CHAP. XXIII. The Bucaniers arrive at a place incognito, unto which they give the name of the Duke of Yorks Islands. A description of the said Islands, and of the Gulf, or Lagoon, wherein they lie, so far as it was searched. They remain there many days by stress of weather, not without great dan∣gers of being lost. An account of some other things remarkable that hapned there.

WEdnesday, October the 12th. All the night before this day we had many high winds. I reckoned an E. S. E. way, and twenty leagues; for our vessel drove at a great rate. Moreover, that we were in Lat. 50 D. 50 S. So that our Easting from Paita by my account ought to be one hundred and one leagues, or thereabouts.

This morning about two hours before day, we hapned by great accident to espie land.* It was the great mercy of God, which had always attended us in this Voyage, that saved us from perishing at this time; for we were close a∣shoar before we saw it; and our fore-yard, which we most needed in this occasion, was taken down. The land we had seen was very high and towering; and here appeared to be many Islands scattered up and down. We steered in with what caution we could, between them and the Main, and at last, God be praised, arrived at a place or rather Bay, where we perceived our selves to be land-lockt, and as we thought pretty safe from the danger of those tempestuous Seas. From hence we sent away our Canoa to sound and search the fttest place for anchoring. At this time one of our men,* named Henry Shergall, as he was going into our sprit-sail top, hapned to fall into the water, and was Page  179 drowned before any help could be had unto him, though we endeavoured it as much as we possibly could. This ac∣cident several of our company did interpret as a bad Omen of the place; which proved not so, through the providence of the Almighty, though many dangers were not wanting here unto us, as I shall relate.

We came to an anchor in the depth of forty fathom Wa∣ter, more or less,* and yet at no greater distance than a stones cast from shoar. The water where we anchored was very smooth, and the high lands round about all covered with snow. Having considered the time of the year, and all other circumstances, we resolved, that in case we could find a sufficient stock of provisions here,* we would stay the longer, that is, until Summer came, or something more, before we prosecuted our intended Voyage homewards through the Straights of Magallanes; which now we be∣gan to be careful how to find. That day of our ancho∣ring in this Bay, we shot six or eight brave Geese,* and some smaller fowl besides. Here we found also many hun∣dreds of Mussel-banks; all which were very plentifully stockt with that kind of fish. We buryed our dead man on the shoar, giving him several Volleys for his Funeral-Rites, according to the custom. In the night of this day our anchor came home, so that we were forced to let go a grapling to secure our selves. But still every flaw of wind drove us. Hereupon we set our sprit-sail,* and ran about a mile into another Bay, where we let go another anchor, and thus anchored again. The first anchor, which was al∣so the biggest in our ship, we lost by this accident, the cable being cut by the rocks. Unto these Islands afore-mentio∣ned our Captain gave the name of His Royal Highness the Duke of Yorks Islands.

Thursday, October the 13th. This day we began to moor our ship,* she driving as we easily could perceive with eve∣ry flaw of wind that blew. The tide sloweth here full seven foot up and down. We moored our Vessell into a rockey point, being a key whereof there be many in the Page  180 circumference of this Bay. The ground of the bottom of the said Bay we found was hard and sandy, being here and there rockey. This evening we brought on board great store of Lamperts, of which we made a kettle of broath, that contained more than all our company could eat.

On Friday October the 14th, we killed several Geese. As also many of another sort of Fowl like unto an Eagle, but having a bigger beak,* with their nostrils rising from the top of the middle of their beak by a hand trunk. This Fowl liveth on Fish, but we saw none. Yesterday in the evening there fell a great fleet of snow on the hills, round about the Bay, but none where we were at anchor. Moreover, this day in the evening we caught Lamperts in great quantity,* being three times as many as we could eat. Our men in ranging the Keys for Game, found grass plai∣ted above a fathom long, and a knot tyed at the end there∣of. In like manner on other Keys they found Mussels and Lampert shells. From these things we presently conclu∣ded,* that these Countries were inhabited, and that some In∣dians or others were to be found hereabouts.

Saturday October the 15th, in the night last past we had much rain,* with large hail-stones. About midnight the wind came to North with such great fury, that the Tree un∣to which our Cable was fastned on shoar, gave way, and came up by the Roots. All those gusts of wind were mixt with violent storms of rain and hail. Thus we fastned a∣gain unto other trees. But here it hapned, that our ship coming up to the shoar, our Rudder toucht, and thereup∣on broke our Goose-neck. Great was now our extremity, and greater it will be,* if God send not better weather. Scarce a minute now passed without flaws of wind and rain.

Sunday October the 16th, all the night past was rainy, as before.* About nine of the clock our biggest harser gave way and brake. All this day likewise we had rain with se∣veral showers of hail, and but little wind to westward of the North.

Page  181Munday October the 17th, all last night until five this morning, it ceased not to rain. Then until ten it snowed. On the hills it snowed all the night long.* This day we hanted on the shoar many tracts of people hereabouts, but could find none hitherto, they having fled and conceal∣ed themselves for fear of us, as we supposed.

October the 18th. In the night past we had much rain and hail. But the day was very clear. Hereupon we made an observation, which gave us Lat. 50 D. 40 S. Moreover, this day we had pretty warm weather.

October the 19th. Both a clear and frosty night the last past. This day was hasey, and something windy from the North quarter. Every day we had plenty of Lam∣perts, and Mussels of a very large size.

October the 20th. The night past was rainy,* and this day windy, with very great gusts of wind at N.N.W. un∣til the afternoon. Then we had wind at N. W. being very fresh and in gusts.

October the 21st. All the night past was tempestuous,* with huge gusts of wind and showers of hail. Yesterday in the evening we carried a cable ashoar, and fastned it unto a tree. This being done, at midnight our biggest cable broke in the middle.* Towards morning we had much snow. In the day, great gusts of wind with large hail stones, and also great plenty of Lamperts.

October the 22d. Last night we had strange gusts of wind from N. W. together with much hail and rain. This day we killed a Penguin; and also began to carry water on board.*

October the 23d.* All the twenty four hours last past we had much rain. The wind was but little at W. and W. S. W.

October the 24th. All this time until noon nothing but rain. At that time it held up fair for the space of half an hour, or thereabouts, and then it rained again all the rest of the day.

Page  182October the 25th. All this while we had not one mi∣nute fair. Towards evening it held up from raining, but the weather was cloudy, and withal much warmer than when we came hither at first.*

Wednesday, October the 26th. All the night past, and this forenoon, we had fair weather. But after noon it rained again. We found Cockles like unto those we have in England.*

Thursday, October the 27th. In the night past we had much rain,* with very grat gusts of wind, lasting for the whole space thereof. Yet notwithstanding, this day pro∣ved to be the fairest that we ever had since we came into this place. In the evening of this day, our Canoa which was gone to search the adjacent places for Indians, or what else they could find, returned unto the ship, with a Doree at her stern. They had gone, as it should seem, beyond the old Bay where we first anchored, and thereabouts hapned to meet with this Doree. In it were three Indians, who perceiving themselves nigh being taken,* leapt over-board to make their escape. Our men in pursuing them did unadvisedly shoot one of them dead. A second, being a woman, escaped their hands. But the third, who was a lusty boy about eighteen years of age, was taken, and him they brought on board the ship. He was covered onely with a Seals skin, having no other cloathing about him: His eyes were squinted, and his hair was cut pretty short. In the middle of the Doree they had a fire burning either for dressing of victuals, or some other use. The Doree it self was built sharp at both ends, and flat bottom'd. They had a net to catch Penguins, and a club like unto our bandies, called by them a Tomahunks. His Language we could not understand, but withal he pointed up the Lagoon, giving us to understand, that there were more people thereabouts. This was confirmed by our men, who also said they had seen more. They had Darts to throw against an Eenemy pointed with wood.

Page  183On the next day, being October the 28th, in the evening our Canoa went from the ship again to seek for more Indi∣ans. They went into several Lagoons,* and searched them narrowly. But they could find nothing else than two or three Huts; all the Natives being fled before our arrival. In the evening they returned unto the ship, bringing with them very large Lamperts, and also Mussels which were six inches and an half long.* Our Indian prisoner could open Mussels these with his fingers, which our men could not so hreadily do with their knives. Both the night past and this day we ad very fair weather.

On the 29th we had in like manner a very fair day, and also a smooth wind at S. S. E. Our Indian this day poin∣ted unto us, that there were men in this Country, or not far off from hence, with great beards. He appeared unto us by his actions to be very innocent and foolish. But by his carriage I was also perswaded that he was a Man-eater. This day likewise we caught Lamperts enough to suffice us for the morrow.

Sunday, October the 30th. This day was fair, and there blew a small S. S. E. wind.* In the morning we sent a Canoa over to the Eastward-shore, to seek either for provi∣sions or Indians. I my self could not go, as I desired, be∣ing with two or three more, at that time very much tormented with the Gripes. I am perswaded that this place where we now were, is not so great an Island as some Hy∣drographers do lay it down, but rather an Archipelago of smaller Islands. We saw this day many Penguins, but they were so shie, that we could not come near them.* They pad on the water with their wings very fast, but their bo∣dies are too heavy to be carried by the said wings. The Sun now made the weather very warm,* insomuch that the snow melted apace.

October the 31st. Both last night and this day were very fair. At noon our Canoa returned from the Eastern shoar, bringing word they had found several good Bays and Harbours, that were deep even close unto the Page  184 shoar. Onely that there lay in them several suncken Rocks, the which we had also where we were. But these Rocks are not dangerous to shipping, by reason they have weeds which lye two fathoms in circumference about them. This morning blew a small wind at N.N.E.

November the first, this day was also fair, and we had a small wind as before, at N.N.E.

November the second, last night I took the Polar distance of the South star of the Cocks foot, and found it to be 28 d. 25. I observed also the two Magallan Clouds, of which I made mention in this Journal before, and found them to be as followeth, viz. the lesser 14 d. 05. and the greater 14 d. 25. The morning of this day we hoysted an end our top-masts, and also brought too a Main-top-sail, and Fore-sail, and finished our filling all the water we needed. At the same time the wind hung Easterly, and I was still much tormented with the Gripes as before.

November the third, this morning we hanged our Rud∣der,* the greatest piece of work we had to do, after those violent storms above-mentioned. In the afternoon we halled in our two biggest Harsers; and also our biggest Cable from the shoar. For the three days last past we had a very great and dark fog between us and the Eastward shoar. We had now very little wind in the Cove where we were, but abroad at sea there blew at the same time a stiff gale at S.S.E. Moreover, we could perceive now, the stormy weather being blown over, much small fry of fish about the ship, whereof we could see none, as was mentio∣ned before. This day we had a very clear and calme eve∣ning.

November the fourth, both all last night and this day we had very calme weather.* And this morning a small breeze sprang up at N. and N.N.E. which afterwards wheel∣ed about unto S. and S.S.E. This morning we hoisted our Main and Fore-yards; and likewise fetcht off from the shoar our other harser and Cable, into the depth of ele∣ven fathom water. Our resolutions were now changed Page  185 for a departure, in order to seek the mouth of the Straights of Magallanes, seeing that we could not winter here, for want of Provisions, which we could not find either on the Continent, or about these Islands afore-mentioned. The weather now was very warm, or rather hot, and the Birds did sing as sweetly as those in England. We saw here both Thrushes and Black birds, and many other sorts of those that are usually seen in our own Country.

Saturday November the fifth, this morning brought us a wind at N.N.E. hereupon, we warped unto a rocky point,* thereby to get out of the Cove where we lay. For our an∣chor came home unto us as we were carrying our Warp out. At this time a second breeze came up very fresh in our stern; so that we took the opportunity thereof, and went away before it. By noon this day we hoisted in our Canoas, and also turned away loose unto the sea our Indian Doree. As for the Indian boy whom we had taken in said Doree, we kept him still prisoner, and called him Orson. Our Cove at our departure from this place, looked thus, as I took then the description thereof. When we were come out into the Channel, the weather grew stark calme. On∣ly now and then we had a small breeze, sometimes from one quarter, and then from another. By this slackness of wind we observed, that the Current hoisted us to the South∣ward. On the East-side of this Lagoon, we perceived the Indians to make a great smoak at our departure.

Page  186

[illustration]
A description of his Royal▪ Highnesses Isles

Page  187We had a very fair day till six in the evening, when we got without the mouth of the Gulf, it blew so hard, that in an hour it forced us to hand our top-sails. Having now a fit gale at N. W. and N. N W. we stood S. W. by W. to clear our selves of some breaks which lye four Leagues from the Gulfs mouth at S. and S. S. E. Hereabouts we saw many riffs and rocks, which occasioned us to stand close halled. I have drawn here and given unto my Rea∣der, so much as I have seen of the Gulf it self; the rest must be compleated in due time by them, that have grea∣ter opportunities of making a farther search into it, then I had at the time of our stay here under such tempestuous weather, as I have described, and the distemper which hung upon me at the same time.

Page  188

[illustration]
A description of ye English Gulfe Lying a litle to the Northward of Magallanes Straights.

Page  189

CHAP. XXIV. They depart from the English Gulf in quest of the Straight of Magallanes which they cannot find. They return home by an unknown way, never Navigated before.

SUnday November the sixth, this morning we had lost the sight of land, so that we could see it no more. All the night last past, and this day, we were under our two Courses and Sprit-sail. The weather this day was hasey. My reckoning was a S.W. half South way, and by it twen∣ty one Leagues. We had now an indifferent high Sea, and a fresh wind at N.N.W.

November the seventh,* last night was both rainy and fog∣gey, but in the morning it cleared up. The wind for the most part was at W. and W. N. W. But at noon it came about at W. S. W. Our reckoning was a S. W. by S. way, and by it twenty Leagues. We found by observation Lat. 52 d. 03. We now steered away S.S.E. the wind being at that time at W.S.W. In the evening of this day I found a variation of the Needle to N.E. to the number of 15 d. or better. I was still troubled with the Gripes as I had been before.

November the eighth, we had a fair night the last past. About midnight the wind came to N.N.W. This day ear∣ly, at the break of day, we all were perswaded that we had seen Land, but at noon we saw that it was none, but only a Cloud. The wind was now at North. My reckoning was a S.E. half East way, and thirty two leagues and one third of a league. We had an observation that gave us 53 d. 27 South. The whole day was very fine and warm, and we saw great numbers of Fowles and Seales.

November the ninth, yesterday in the evening the wea∣ther Page  190 was cloudy. Hereupon we lay by under a main-course. After midnight we sailed East, and E. by N. with a fresh wind at W. N. W. and not any great Sea. The day it self was cloudy, and toward noon we had some rain. So at two in the afternoon we lay by under a Main course, the wind being fresh at N. W. I reckoned an E. N. E. way, and thereby twenty eight Leagues.

Thursday November the tenth, all the night last past we lay under a Main-course,* with a meer fret of wind at N.W. and N.N.W. Day being come, the wind did rather en∣crease; insomuch, that about noon our sail blew to pieces. Hereupon we were forced to lower the yard, and unbend the sail, lying for a little while under a Mizen. But that also soon gave way. So that all the rest of this day we lay a hull in very dark weather, foggy and windy, with a huge sea, which often times rowled over us. In the after∣noon it seemed to abate for some space of time; but soon after it blew worse than before, which compelled us to lower our Fore-yard.

*November the tenth, all the night last past we had furi∣ous windy and tempestuous weather, from the points of N.W. and N. N. W. together with Seas higher and higher. In the evening we set our Mizen. At which time the Sun appeared very waterish; but the wind now abated by de∣grees, and the Seas also.

November the twelfth, this morning little wind was stir∣ing▪ but only some rain fell. About ten it cleared up, and by an observation then made, we found Lat. 55 d. 25. The Sea was now much fallen, and a fresh wind was sprung up at W. and W.S. W. We experimented also a very great current to the S. W. In the afternoon of this day we set our sails again, resolving now unanimously together, to make for the Straights of St. Vincent, otherwise called the Straights of Fernando de Magallanes. We had a fresh wind at W.N.W. our course being S.S.E. under our Sprit-sail, Fore-•••l, and Fore-top-sail. This day we saw many Fishes, or rather Fowls,* who had heads like unto Muscovia Ducks, as Page  191 also two feet like unto them. They had two Fins like the fore-fins of Turtles: white breasts and bellies; their beak and eyes being red. They are full of Feathers on their bo∣dies, and their hinder parts are like unto those of a Seal, wherewith they cut the water. The Spaniard calleth these Fowles Paxaros Ninos. They weigh most common∣ly about six or seven pound, being about one foot, a little more or less in length. Our Commander Captain Sharp, had so much dexterity as to strike two of them. In the evening we set also our Main-sail; the wind now coming to the Southward of the West.

Sunday November the 13th, all the night past we had a fresh wind between S.W. and W.N.W. with sometimes mists of small rain. In the evening we enjoyed a fine leading gale at W. N. W. together with both clear and wholesome weather. We made a S.E. way, and by it forty two leagues and two thirds. This day an observation gave us Lat. 56 d. 55 South. We still experimented a great S. W. current. In the afternoon of this day we steered E.S.E. and in the e∣vening had whiffling winds.

November the 14th, both last night and this morning we had cloudy weather. About eight it cleared up. My reckoning was a S.E. by E. way, and by it thirty two leagues. Our observation gave us Lat. 57 d. 50. South. This day we could perceive land,* and at noon were due West from it. In the evening we stood E. by S.

November the 15th, all the night past was very cloudy.* We judged now that we should be close in with the Land we had seen the day before, but the morning being come we could see none. In the night much snow fell, and in the day we had great fleets thereof, the weather being ve∣ry cold and cloudy. I reckoned an E.S.E. way, and hereby twenty nine leagues and two thirds. Moreover, that our Latitude was 58 d. 25 S. The wind was now so fresh at North, that we were forced to lye under our two Courses and Sprit-sail.

Novembe the 16th, most of this time we had still rain Page  192 and snow, but now no night at all, though the weather was dark. The wind was various, but from midnight before this day,* the wind was at S.E. and S.S.E. We now lay E.N.E. I reckoned a N.E. by E. way, and twenty three leagues. About four in the afternoon two of our fore-shrouds bolts broke, but withal, were presently mended. This after∣noon also we saw a very large Whale. In the evening we handed in our fore-top sail,* and lay under our pair of Cour∣ses, and Sprit-sail, the evening being very clear.

November the 17th, in the night past there was a very hard frost.* At four this morning we saw two or three I∣slands of Ice, the distance of two or three leagues to the Southward of us. Soon after this, we saw several others, the biggest of them being at least two leagues round. By an observation made this day, we found Lat. 58 d. 23 South. We had now a vehement current to the South∣ward. At noon I saw many others of these Islands of Ice afore-mentioned, of which some were so long, that we could scarce see the end of them, and were extant about ten or twelve fathom above water. The weather in the mean while was very clear, and the wind cold. I found variati∣on of the Needle eighteen degrees to the North East.*

November the 18th, all the night past was very fair. I must call it night;* for otherwise it was not dark at all. The Sea was very smooth, and the wind at N. and N.N.W. I reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and by the same twenty two leagues. At ten it grew stark calme, which held all the afternoon of this day. But at night we had a wind again at N. and N. by E.

November the 19th, this day was cloudy with snow, and a frosty night preceeding it. The wind now was so fresh at North, that we were forced to take in our top-sails, and lye all day under our Courses and Sprit-sail. We made by an E.S.E. way, eighteen leagues and two thirds.

November the twentieth, we had a cloudy night the last past,* together with mising rain and snow. This morning fell so great a fog, that we could not see from stem to stern Page  193 of our ship. From ten of the clock last night we had also a calm and very cold weather. But what was worse than all this,* we were now kept to a very short allowance of our sorry victuals; our Provisions growing very scanty with us. About ten this morning we had a very small breeze at North.* Several of our men were not able to endure the cold, so fierce it was, whereby they were forced to lye and keep themselves as close as they could. We made an East way, and by the same sixteen leagues. This day at noon I reckoned my self to be East from the Gulf, from whence we last departed, two hundred and five leagues and two thirds of a league.

Munday November the 21,* last evening we caught a small and white land fowl, and saw two or three more; and also this morning. This sight afforded us good hopes we were not far distant from some Coast or other, yet none we could see in all this long and tedious voyage. In the night past we had a calme, and all this morning a great fog with much snow and rain. We reckoned an E. by N. way, and ten leagues. At one in the afternoon we had a fresh gale that sprang up at East, and at E. by N.

November the 22, most part of this day was calme. In the mean while we could observe our ship to drive East. My reckoning was an E. N. E. way, and thereby thirteen leagues and one third. At one in the afternoon we had a small gale at W. S. W. our course being N. N. E. and N. E. by N.

November the 23, this day we had a gale at N.W. and freshning still more and more; so that we were forced to take in our top-sails and sprit-sail. The wind was not a set∣led gale, but often varied from point to point. At noon it came at N. E. and our course was then N. N. W. By a North way we reckoned sixteen leagues.

November the 24th, both the night past and this morn∣ing was foggy weather, with some calmes between times. But at eight in the morning the Sun brake out, though notwithstanding the day was not clear. By a N.N.E. way Page  194 we reckoned fifteen leagues. This morning the wind came about to East, and by noon it was again at N.E. We had a clear evening and a fresh gale.

November the 25th, all the night past we had a fresh wind at E. and E.N.E. Insomuch, that at eight in the morn∣ing we took in our top-sails. But at noon the wind was not so fresh as it had been before. I reckoned a N.N.W. half West way, and by the same twenty leagues.

November the 26th, last night the wind was not altoge∣ther so fresh as before; but this morning it was again ve∣ry high. The weather was both dark and cloudy, and brought now and then rain and snow. We made a N.N.E. way, and hereby thirty leagues. The wind all along E. by S. and E. S. E. In the evening we had fair weather again. We experimented for the ten days last past a great West∣ern Sea, and saw in the same time several Seals.

Sunday November the 27th, all the night past we enjoy∣ed a fresh gale and clear weather. I reckoned thirty six leagues by a N. E. by N. way. By an observation made, we now found Lat. 52 d. 48 South.* And I judged my self to be East from the Gulf, two hundred eighty five leagues. In the evening of this day we had a very exact sight of the Sun, and found above 30 d. variation of the Needle. From whence ought to be concluded, that it is very difficult to direct a course of Navigation in these parts.* For in the space of only twenty five leagues sailing, we have experi∣mented eight or nine degrees difference of variation, by a good Dutch Azimouth Compass.

November the 28th, all last night we had a fresh wind at E.S.E.* Towards morning we had but little wind, all the day being hasey weather. This day we saw a whole flight of such Land-fowles, of which sort we killed one before, as was mentioned above. This sight gave us occasion to be∣lieve, that neither then, nor at this present, we were not far distant from land, and yet we descryed none in the resi∣due of this whole voyage. We made by a N. N. E. way, thirty three leagues. Yesterday in the evening we set a Page  195 new sprit-sail, and about three this morning we also set our main-sail. At one after-noon, the wind came about N. E. and N. N. E. which in the evening blew very fresh, with cloudy weather.

November the 29th. The night proved very cloudy, and the wind blew very fresh at E. N. E. and N. E. by E. This morning it was at East, both with snow, and hail. Towards noon the weather cleared up, and we found by an observation taken, Lat. 49 D 45 S. Our reckoning was a North way, and thirty leagues. This day we had a short Eastern sea, and withal, a very cold e∣vening. I took the Sun, and hereby I found variation 26 D. 30. unto the North East. This night the wind came about W. and W. N. W. continuing so all the night.

November the 30th. This day the wind was N. and N. N. E. with some clouds hovering in the sky. At this time we had already almost four hours of night.* The morning of this day was very fair and clear. Hereupon for to give my self satisfaction in the point, as fearing the truth of Spanish Books; I worked the true Ampli∣tude of the Sun, and found his variation to be 26 25 to the N. E. being very conformable to what I had both read and experimented before. Hereabouts, also we experi∣mented a current to the Northward. Moreover, this day we saw much rock-weed, which renewed our hopes,* once more of seeing land. We reckoned a N. E. way and by the same twenty two leagues. By an observation made we found Lat. 48 D. 53 S. This day also we saw several of those fowl-fish afore described called Paxaros-ninos;* and these of a larger size, than any we had seen before. In the afternoon, the wind came about at N. N. E. whereby we stood N. W. by W. with a fresh gale, and smooth wa∣ter. The weather now began to grow warmer, then he∣therto, and the evening of this day was clear.

Tuesday December the first. The latter part of the night past was very cloudy, and also sometimes rainy. About midnight we had a furious and violent Tornado,*Page  196 forcing us in a moment to hand in our top-sails. At five in the morning we set them again, and at eleven, we had another Tornado, forcing us to hand our top-sails the se∣cond time. We made a N. N. E. two thirds East way, and thereby thirteen leagues and two thirds of a league. The afternoon of this stormy day, proved very fair, and the wind came to W. S. W. our course being N. E. by N. In the evening the wind freshned, with cloudy weather.

*December the second. Last night we experimented a very furious whirle-wind, which notwithstanding, it plea∣sed God, did pass about the length of our ship, to West∣ward of us. However, we handed in our top-sails, and halled up our low-sails, in the brails. After the whirle-wind came a fresh storm of large hail-stones, in the night, and several Tornados; but God be thanked, they all came large of our ship. We now made a great way under a fore-course and sprit-sail. At four of the clock this morn∣ing, our fore-sail split, whereby we were forced to lower our fore-yard. At half an hour after ten we hoysted it a∣gain with a furious S. W. wind. We made a N. E. by E. way, and by the same forty seven leagues and an half. By observation we now had Lat. 46 D. 54 S. We riffed our fore-sail, with respect to the violence of the wind. But in the evening, this rather increased, and we had a very great Sea. Our standing rigging, through the fury of this gale, gave way in several places, but was soon mended again.

*December the third. The wind all the night past, was very fresh, with several flaws both of wind and rain, at S. W. and S. W. by S. We enjoyed now very warm wea∣ther. This morning we set our fore-top-sail. Our reckon∣ing gave us, a N. E. half E. way and forty five leagues. We found Lat. by observation 45 D. 28 S. This day at noon, a large shoal of young Porpusses came about our ship, and played up and down.*

December the 4th. All the night past we had a fresh gale at W. S. W. The night was clear, onely that now and then we had a small cloud affording some rain. In Page  197 the morning, from four of the clock till eight it rained. But then it cleared up again, with a S. W. wind and a ve∣ry smooth sea. We made by a N. E. one quarter N. way, thirty nine leagues. By observation we found Lat. 44 D. 01 S. At noon the wind came to S. S. W. our course then being N. N. E. This day we agreed among our selves having the consent of our commander,* to share the eight chests of money, which as yet were remaining unshared. Yesterday in the evening, we let out the reiff of our fore-sail, and hoysted up our fore-yard. This evening I found variation 17 D. N. E.

Munday, December the 5th. All the night past, a clear night, and this a fair day, with a fresh wind at S.S. W. We reckoned a N. E. 5. D. N. way, and by the same forty two leagues. An observation gave us Lat. 42 D. 29. S. This afternoon we shared of the chests abovemen∣tioned, three hundred pieces of eight each man.* I now reckoned my self to be East from my departure four hun∣dred seventy one leagues and one third of a league. At night again we shared twenty two pieces of eight more to each.

December the 6th. We had a clear star-light-night the last and a fair morning this day, with a fresh gale at S. W. At noon we took in our fore-top-sail. We reckoned a N. E. half N. way, and hereby fifty leagues and two thirds. An observation taken afforded us 40 D. 31 S. This e∣vening was cloudy.

December the 7th. The night was both windy and cloudy. At one in the morning, we took in our top-sails, and at three, handed our sprit-sail, and so we scudded away before the wind, which now was very fresh at West. This morning a gust of wind came and tore our main-sail into an hundred pieces, which made us put away before the wind, till we could provide for that accident. My reckoning was a N. E. three quarters E. way, and by the same thirty three leagues. By observation we found Lat. 39 D. 37 S. We had now a great Sea, and a fresh wind Page  198 At three in the afternoon we set another fore-sail; the first being blown to pieces. Moreover, at the same time we furled our sprit-sail. At five the wind came at W. S. W. with very bad weather. This day our worthy comman∣der Captain Sharp, had very certain intelligence given him, that on Christmas-day,* which was, now at hand, the company, or at least a great part thereof, had a design to shoot him; he having appointed that day some time since to be merry. Hereupon he made us share the wine amongst us, as being perswaded they would scarce attempt any such thing in their sobriety. The wine we shared fell out to three jarrs unto each mess. That night the wind encreased.

December the 8th. The night past was both cloudy and windy; the wind often varying between the N. W. and S. W. points. This morning it varyed between W. and N. W. by W. About noon this day, we brought a new main-sail to the yard, but did not set it then, by rea∣son there blowed too much wind. I reckoned a N. E. half N. way, and by the same thirty leagues. By observa∣tion made we found Lat. 38 D. 29 S. In the afternoon we had one or two squalls of wind and rain; but the vio∣lence of both fell at stern of us. In the evening it blew again very hard. I observed this day, the rising and set∣ting of the Sun,* and found the exact variation to be 12 D. 15 N. E.

December the 9th. The night was starry-light, but withal, very windy. About the break of day, the wind came to N. W. and at seven we set our fore-top-sail, and stood N. N. E. with not much wind. We made since our last reckoning a N. E. quarter E. way, and twenty nine leagues. We found by observation Lat. 37 D. 30 S. The sea was much fallen,* but our ship now began to complain of several leakes, through our tedious and long Voyage. This afternoon we hoysted up our main-yard and set up back-stays and main-swifter; whose ring-bolt gave way, but was mended. In the evening of this day we had but little wind.

Page  199December the 10th. The night was very clear, but till ten of the clock this forenoon, we had no wind. Then a small breeze sprang up at N. and N. by E. We made an E N. E. one third N. way, and hereby twenty one leagues. An observation gave us Lat. 37 D. 01 S. In the afternoon of this day our chief Surgeon cut off the foot of a Negro boy, which was perished with cold.* Now it was like to be bad weather again. Hereupon we furled our top-sails, and lay under a pair of courses. But in the evening we lay under a fore-sail and mizen, with misty weather.

Sunday, December the 11th. All the night past, we had a fresh wind at N. and sometimes at N. N. W. The wea∣ther was very cloudy with drizling rain. We made an E. way, and thereby twenty five leagues. This day brought a great sea. About ten in the morning, one of our main shrouds gave way. In the evening fell some small rain.

December the 12th. All the night past we had misty rain, and but little wind; yea, in the morning a perfect calm. At noon came up a small gale at E. S. E. and S. E. bringing with it cloudy weather. We reckoned a N. E. by E. way, and by the same eighteen leagues. Yesterday dyed the Negro boy whose leg was cut off by our Surgeon,* as was mentioned the day before. This afternoon also dyed another Negro, something bigger than the former, named Chepillo. The boy's name was Beafero. All this evening but small wind.

December the 13th. All night the wind was at E. S. E. our course being N. N. E. At three in the morning it came about at S. S. W. and at nine at E. by N. I reckoned a N. E. by N. way, and fifteen leagues. The weather was hasey. In the afternoon the wind was at N. E. our course being N. N. W. We enjoyed now a very smooth sea, and saw multitudes of Grampusses, Whales,* and Por∣pusses, every day as we sailed along.

December the 14th. The evening past was cloudy, as also the night foggy. Hereupon we took in our top-sails. Page  200 At half an hour after three this morning, we stood N. E. the wind being then at N. N. W. At five we put out our top-sails again. At seven of the morning, we saw a Tur∣tle floating upon the sea. We reckoned a N. N. E. way. This days observation afforded us 34 D. 32. S. At this time we had very hot weather,* and great dews in the night. My whole Easting I reckoned to be now, six hundred seventy seven leagues and one third of a league.

December the 15th. We had a fine night the last past, and a great dew. The wind in the interim was between N. and N. W. I reckoned a N. E. half E. way, and by the same thirty one leagues. We had an observation that gave us Lat. 33 D. 46 S. At noon the wind came about at N. N. W. our course being N. E. We had this day a very clear evening, and at the same time a fresh wind.

December the 16th. We had a fair night and wind at N. N. W. and N. W. by N. This morning I took the Sun at its rising,* and found N. E. variation 20 D. 30. My reckoning was a N. N. E. way, and thirty six leagues and one third of another. By observation I found Lat. 32 D. 09 S. At noon this day the wind came about to N. W.

December the 17th. Most part of the last night, the wind was at N. W. as before. But towards morning a a fine and easie gale sprang up at W. N. W. This mor∣ning we saw several Dolphins playing upon the sea,* which made us hope they would at last befriend us, and suddain∣ly shew us some land or other. We reckoned a N. E. by N. one third N. way, and by the same twenty five leagues. An observation gave us, now Lat. 31 D. 04. A fair e∣vening.

December the 18th. We had a clear night past, toge∣ther with a smooth gale at N. W. which this morning was at W. by S. We had now a smooth sea, for several days past. Our reckoning was twenty five leagues, by a N. E. by N. way. By observation we perceive Lat. 29 D. 48 S.

Page  201December the 19th. A clear night the last past, and a fresh breeze at S. S. W. and S. W. by E. lasting untill nine in the morning. Then sprang up a wind at S. E. by E. I reckoned this day a N. N. E. half E. way, and upon the same thirty leagues. By observation made, we took Lat. 28 D. 29 S. The day was very fair, and a smooth sea, with weather that was very hot.* My whole Easting I reckoned now to be seven hundred and sixty leagues. This evening I found variation 02 D. 50 N. E.

CHAP. XXV. The Bucaniers continue their Navigation, without seeing any Land, till they arrive at the Caribby Islands in the West Indies. They give away their Ship to some of their Companions that were poor; and disperce for several Countrys. The Author of this Journal arriveth in England.

DEcember the 20th, 1681. The night before this day was something cloudy, but the weather was fair and the wind but little. At noon the wind came a∣bout N. by E. our course being W. N. W. We made a N. N. W. way, and thereby as I reckoned twenty two leagues. By an observation made we took Lat. 27 D. 25 S. The evening of this day was cloudy, and now and then there fell a shower of rain.

December the 21st. At eight of the clock last night, the wind came N. W. by N. but withal, with such dark weather, that we were forced to take in our top-sails. The night was something rainy, and the weather, this mor∣ning calm and rainy. About ten we had a small breeze at N. W. We reckoned a N. by E. way, and by the same six∣teen leagues. The afternoon of this day was calm and still.

Page  202December the 22d. We had a fair and clear night the last past, which produced this day a smooth sea, and ex∣tream hot weather, and very little wind near the Sun; so that no observation was made.*

December the 23d. The night was very fair. At mid∣night or thereabouts, a fresh gale sprang up at S. E. and E. S. E. which sometime was E. This freshned by degrees. We had in the day very hot and clear weather. By a N. way I reckoned fifteen leagues.

December the 24. Last night we had both a fresh gale, and a clear night. The wind was at E. by S. We reckoned a N. E. by E. way, and by it thirty one leagues.

Sunday, December the 25th. This day being Christ∣mas-day,* for celebration of that great festival, we killed yesterday in the evening a sow. This sow we had brought from the Gulf of Nicoya, being then a sucking pig of three weeks old, more or less, but now weighed about four∣score and ten pound.* With this hogs-flesh we made our Christmas-dinner, being the onely flesh we had eaten ever since we turned away our prizes under the Aequinoctial, and left the Island of Plata. We had this day several flaws of wind, and some rain; but the weather otherwise was pretty clear. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and thirty three leagues by the same. It was now also extream hot wea∣ther, as we signified before.

December the 26th. We had this day several gusts of wind, which forced us to stand by our top-sails. Yet were they but very short, and all the rest of the while we enjoyed an indifferent fresh gale at E. and E. by S. We reckoned a N. by E. way, and twenty eight leagues.

December the 27th. We had fair weather, and a fresh wind at E. and E. by S. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and upon the same thirty two leagues. The evening of this day was cloudy.

December the 28. Last night was cloudy with a fresh wnd. We reckoned a N. E. way, and by the same forty six leagues. We found by an observation made Lat. 15 Page  203 D. 30 S. My whole Easting I reckoned this day to be eight hundred and twenty five leagues. Now we saw much flying-fish, with some Dolphins, Bonito's,* and Albi∣cores; but they will not take the hook.

December the 29th. All last night was cloudy, with a fresh wind between E. and E. S. E. The weather all the afternoon was hasey. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and hereupon forty leagues and one third. In the afternoon we had a S. E. by E. wind, which blew very fresh. The evening was clear.* At Sunset I found variation to N. W. 04 D. 19.

December the 30th. The night past was cloudy. To∣wards morning the wind came about at E. At six it came E. S. E. and at ten to S. E. by S. We made a N. by E. way, and forty three leagues. By observation we found Lat. 11 D. 03 S. The evening of this day was clear.

December the 31st. We had a cloudy night the last past, but the morning was hasey. We came now, to a strict allowance of onely three good pints of water each day. We made a N. by E. way, and found Lat. by obser∣vation 08 D. 55 S. In the afternoon we had an E. S. E. and S. E. by E. wind. My whole Easting I reckoned now to be eight hundred eighty four leagues and one third. At noon we stood away N. W.

Sunday, January the first 1681. All the night past was cloudy, as this day also with some showers of rain. We made a N. W. one eight N. way, and forty leagues. In the afternoon came about a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E.

January the 2d. The weather this day was both dull and cloudy. We reckoned a N. W. one quarter N. way, and by the same thirty two leagues. By observation we found, that our Lat. now was 06 D. 06 S. The wind came pretty fresh at S. E.

January the 3d. We had several squalls of wind, and some rain. But, withal a fresh wind at S. E. and E. S. E. Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and thir∣ty Page  200〈1 page duplicate〉Page  201〈1 page duplicate〉Page  202〈1 page duplicate〉Page  203〈1 page duplicate〉Page  204 four leagues. The afternoon was clear, but the e∣vening cloudy.

January the 4th. All the night past was very cloudy; but this forenoon it cleared up. Yesterday we put a∣broad our main-top-sail, studden-sails; but took them in at night. At four this morning we set our larboard stud∣den-sail, and before noon fitted up top-gallant masts, and yard. We made a N. W. way, and by it forty leagues and two thirds. By observation we had now Lat. 03 D. 09 S. This afternoon also, we set our top-gallant-sail, being forced to make out all its running rigging. The wind was pretty fresh at S. E. and S. E. by E.

January the 5th. Most part of the night past was clear, and star-light, though with some rain towards the morning. This being come, we put out our top-gallant-sail, and both our top-sail, studden-sails. At noon like∣wise, we put up our fore-top-gallant masts, and yard. We caught an Albicore,* this day, weighing about one hun∣dred and twenty pound weight. The wind was at S. E. by S. and S. S. E. We made a N. W. way, and reckoned thereby thirty five leagues. By observation we found Lat. 02 D. 03 S. We had now mighty hot weather.

January the 6th. Yesterday in the evening we caught another Albicore which weighed onely eight or nine pound weight.* We made a N. W. way, and reckon∣ed thirty five leagues, as before. Now by an observation made, we could perceive onely Lat. 00 D. 49 S. The e∣vening of this day was very clear.

January the 7th. The wind was variable between S. S. E. and S. S. W. though not altogether so fresh as before. Our reckoning was a N. W. one quarter N. way, and thirty six leagues by the same. This day an observation gave us Lat. 00 D. 32 N. of the Aequinoctial,* which now we had passed again. In the afternoon of this day we caught another Albicore which weighed more than the first we took;* that is, between one hundred thirty five, and one hundred and forty pound. But little wind stir∣ring this afternoon.

Page  205January the 8th. This evening last past, we had little better than a calm. At nine this morning, we had a fresh wind at S. S. E. with dark weather, so that we thought it convenient, to take in our main-top-sail. But, at noon we set it again, and also, our larboard top-studden-sail with both top-gallant sails. We made a N. W. way, and by it thirty four leagues. By an observation made we found Lat. 01 D. 55 N. We had now extream hot weather, and a very small allowance of water.

January the 9th. Last night we took in top-sails all night, the wind then whiffling between S. and W. points. We had nowithstanding, for the most part very little wind. The morning of this day was rainy, and thereupon, with good diligence, we saved a bompkin of water. There was now a great ripling sea, rising very high; and it is repor∣ted, that sometimes and somewhere hereabouts, is to be seen an enchanted Island; which others say, and dare assert,* that they have sailed over. I reckoned a N. W. by N. one quarter N. way, and twenty five leagues. This afternoon we had very dark and calm weather, looking, as if we should have much rain. Now, reckoning up my meridi∣an I found my self E. from my departure, seven hundred and two leagues. In the evening we had very rainy wea∣ther and a cockling sea.

January the 10th. All the night past was cloudy. A∣bout midnight sprang up a small breeze varying all round the compass. At five this morning we had a breeze at S. E. and a very clear sky, which afterwards continued to freshen, with the same clearness as before. We made a N. W. by N. one quarter N. way, and by the same two leagues and two thirds. By a clear observation we had now Lat. 03 D. 16 N. At four this evening the wind was at E. S. E. the weather being violent hot; in so much, that our al∣lowance of water was tedious unto us for its shortness. At the same time we had an indifferent smooth sea from the E.

January the 11th. All the night past we had little or Page  206 no wind. But about two in the morning, the wind fresh∣ned again at E. N. E. and brought both a clear and hot day. We made twenty three leagues by a N. W. one quarter W. way. This days observation gave us Lat. 04 D. 06. N. In the afternoon we had a shower of rain; and afterward a fresh wind at E. N. E. But the evening grew dull.

January the 12th. In the night past we had two or three squalls of wind, and some showers of rain. In the mean while the wind blew fresh at N. E. and N. E. by E. as it also continued to do in the day. I reckoned a N. W. way, and forty four leagues and one third. Our observa∣tion this day gave us 05 D. 49 N. Yesterday and to day we set our main-top-sail. Now I could not finde much variation of the needle.*

January the 13th. We had a fresh gale all the last night, but more Northerly than before; for now it was N. E. by N. We reckoned a W. N. W. way, and thereupon — leagues and two thirds. An observation taken shewed us Lat. 06 D. 41 N. We had a N. N. E. sea and very clear weather.

January the 14th. We had a clear night the last, and a fresh wind at E. N. E. We made a N. W. one fifth W. way, and thirty eight leagues. By observation we found Lat. 07 D. 46 N. We had a smooth sea; and now we were come to onely three horns of water a day, which made in all but a quart allowance for each man. The e∣vening was clear,* and we had a fresh wind.

Sunday, January the 15th. The night past was clear, and the wind fresh at E.N.E. and again at N.E. by E. very fresh. About eleven of the clock at night, dyed one of our companions,* named William Stephens. It was com∣monly believed that he poysoned himself with Manzanil∣la in Golfo dulce, for he never had been in health since that time. This forenoon was cloudy. We reckoned forty four leagues and a N. W. way. An observation gave us this day 09 D. 18 N. All the last night we kept out our top-gallant-sail. We saw hereabouts, many flying-fish being Page  207 very large in size. This morning also, we threw over board our dead man, and gave him two French volly's and one English one. I found now again very small variation.

January the 16th. We had a clear night, and a very fresh wind at N. E. and E. N. E. with a long homeing sea. My reckoning was a N. W. one seventh W. way, and there∣by forty eight leagues and one third. The observation made this day gave us Lat. 10 D. 48 N. I reckoned my self now, East from my departure five hundred fifty three leagues. We had a cloudy evening.

January the 17th. All the night past we enjoyed a fresh wind, and so this day also, at N. E. by N. We made a N. W. half W. way, and thereupon forty seven leagues and one third of a league. By observation we found Lat. 12 D. 19 N. We had now a long North sea. At noon this day we steered away N. N. W. The day was very hot, but the night both cool and dewy.

January the 18th. All the night past was both cloudy and windy. At six this morning our sprit-sail-top-mast broke. I reckoned a W. N. W. way, and forty eight leagues by the same. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 12 N. At noon we steered away W. the wind being at N. E. fresh, with a clear evening.

January the 19th. We had a clear night the last, and a fresh wind at E. N. E. which sometimes came in pushes. Our reckoning was a W. half Southerly way, and by the same forty six leagues. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 01 N. Yesterday in the evening we put up a new sprit-sail-top-mast; with a fine smooth gale at N. E. by E.

January the 20th. The night past was clear, and not very fresh; but at day-break it freshened again. Last night we saw a great shoal of fish; whereof we caught none, by reason the Porpusses frightened them from us, as they oft∣times had done before. Yesterday in the evening also, we saw a Man of War-Fowl,* and that gave us good hopes we should er'e long see land. These hopes, and the great de∣sires we had to end our voyage; gave us occasion this day Page  208 to put in, or stake down, each man of our company a piece of eight for a reward unto him,* that should first discover land. We reckoned a W. one sixth Northerly way, and by it thirty eight leagues. An observation gave us this day Lat. 13 D. 11 N. The wind was at N. E. and E. N. E. This day we passed over many riplings, and also saw many multitudes of fish;* but the Porpusses did always hinder us of having any good of them.

On January the 21st. We made a W. way, and reckon∣ed forty seven leagues. By observation we found Lat. 13 D. 07 N. The wind was at E. N. E. and from thence came a long sea. The evening was very clear.

January the 22d. We had a fair and a clear day, the wind being at E. We reckoned a W. by N. one third W. way, and forty leagues. An observation shewed us Lat. 13 D. 17 N. We had a clear evening, and a fresh wind at E. N. E.

January the 23d. This day was both clear and hot, with a fresh wind at E. N. E. My reckoning was a W. way, and forty six leagues. Our observation made this day afforded us Lat. 13 D. 15 N. In the evening we had some rain.

January the 24th. This day brought us likewise clear weather, such as the day before. I reckoned a W. way, and forty leagues and one third. By observation we found Lat. 13 D. 12. N. The afternoon was cloudy, and had some rain, the wind freshning at E.N.E. and at E. by N. I reckoned now, that I was East from my departure three hundred and eleven leagues. We had a cloudy evening.

January the 25th. Both last night and this morning the weather was cloudy. This morning we saw several Tropick-birds of divers sorts.* Our reckoning was a W. three quarters N. way, and forty three leagues. We found by observation Lat. 13 D. 29 N. This afternoon we saw a Booby flying close aboard the Horison.* The weather was hasey.* But now we began to look out sharp on all sides for land, expecting to see it every minute. I reckon∣ed Page  209 my self to be Eastward of my departure two hundred sixty eight leagues.

January the 26th. The night last past was indifferent clear. Yet notwithstanding, this morning we had a smart shower of rain, and it was very windy. Hereupon we furled our sprit sail, the weather being very hasey to the Westward. We reckoned a W. way, and thereby forty six leagues and one third. By observation taken we found Lat. 13 D. 17. N. At noon this day, we had a very fierce Tornado, and rain together; but withal, a clear af∣ternoon. We had a high E N. E. sea;* and saw multi∣tudes of flying-fish, also several fowls, and amongst these, two or three Booby's. The evening was hasey.

January the 27th. All night past we had a fresh wind, and clear weather. This morning our fore-top-mast back-stay gave way, and at day-break, the star-board-sheet of our fore-top-sail brake. We had several Tornado's this day, and dark weather. Our reckoning was a W. way, and forty eight leagues by the same. We had a clear e∣vening, and a dark night. This day also a certain bird, called a Noddy, came on board us,* which we took for a certain token that we were not, now very far from land.

Saturday, January the 28th. We had a very clear night the last past. About an hour before day one of our company happened to descry land,* which proved to be the Island of Barbado's, at S. S. W. from us, and at two leagues and an half distance, more or less. Hereupon we clapt on a wind, N. and by W. At day-break we were onely four leagues distant from Chalky-Mount, at which time we stood S. W. by S. As we sailed we saw several ships at anchor in Spikes-Road. Soon after a Shalop passed by, between us and the shoar, but would not come within call of us. Hereupon we stood in, within a mile of the shore; and made a wiff unto a Pinnace which we saw coming out of the road aforementioned. She came close aboard us, and as it should seem, was the Barge of one of his Majesties Frigats,* the Richmond then lying at the Bridge-town at Page  210 anchor. They told us of a peace at home, but would not come on board us, though often invited thereunto. Nei∣ther dared we be so bold, as to put in there at Barbado's; for hearing of a Frigat lying there, we feared least the said Frigat should seize us for Privateers, and for having acted in all our voyage without Commission. Thus we stood away from thence for the Island of Antego.*

Here I cannot easily express the infinit joy we were possessed withal, this day to see our own country-men a∣gain. They told us that a ship, which we saw in the offing to leward of the Island, was a Bristol-man, and an Interloper; but, we feared that same vessel, to be the Frigat aforementioned. I reckoned a way of twenty five leagues. So that I was now by my account, to Eastward of my departure one hundred fifty one leagues. Now we stood N. by W. and by observation found Lat. 13 D. 17 N. we being then N. W. from the body of the Island of Barbado's, between seven and eight leagues. This after∣noon we freed the Negro who was our shooemaker by his trade,* giving him his liberty for the good service he had done us in all the course of this voyage. We gave also unto our good commander Captain Sharp, a Mulato boy, as a free gift of the whole company, for to wait upon him, in token of the respects we all were owing unto him, for the safety of our conduct through so many dangerous ad∣ventures. This being done, we shared some small parcels of money, that had not as yet been touched of our former prizes;* and this dividend amounted unto twenty four pieces of eight each man.

At one of the clock this day, from our fore-yard we de∣scryed the Island of Santa Lucia,* being one of the Western Islands, not far distant from that of Barbados. I had o∣mitted to tell a passage which happened in our ship, on Thursday last, which was the 26th day of this Month, and just two days before we made the Island aforementioned of Barbados. On that day therefore a little Spanish shock-Dog,* which we had found in our last Wine-prize, taken Page  211 under the Aequinoctial, and had kept alive till now, was sold at the mast by publick cry, for forty pieces of eight, his owner saying that all he could get for him should be spent upon the company at a publick merriment. Our commander Captain Sharp bought the Dog, with intenti∣on to eat him, in case we did not see land very soon. This money therefore, with one hundred pieces of eight more, which our Boatswain, Carpinter and Quartermaster had refused to take at this last dividend, for some quarrel they had against the sharers thereof; was all laid up in store till we came to land, to the intent of spending it ashore, at a common feast, or drinking bout. At Sunset the Island of Santa Lucia bore W. S. W. from us, and was at ten leagues distance.* Also the Island of Martinica bore N. W. by W. of us at twelve or thirteen leagues distance. We had this day a very clear evening.

Sunday, January the 29th. We had a clear night and a fresh wind at E. by N. and E.N.E. Our reckoning was a N. N. W. half W. way, and hereby forty six leagues. By observation we took Lat. 15 D. 46 N. At noon this day we saw the Island named la Desseada,* or the Desired I∣land, which then bore N. W. from us, and seemed to be at eight leagues distance more or less. At six of the clock in the evening, we saw likewise Marigalanta,* another of the Cariby Islands, at S. W. by W. from us, and that of Guadalupe, streaking it self in several hammocks of land,* both Westward and Northward: as also la Desseada above∣mentioned at S. E. which from thence showeth like table∣land, and at each end hath a low point running out. At six this evening it was W. S. W. and at five or six leagues distance from us. At the same time we saw the Island of Monserrate, at a great distance from our ship;* and making three round hammocks close together. This evening likewise, we caught an Albicore of twenty pound weight.

Munday, January the 30th. We had a fair night all the last past, and a fresh wind. Hereupon, all night we halled up our main-sail in brails, standing at the same time Page  212 N. by W. with th wind at E. N. E. At midnight we stood N. W. At three in the morning we lay by until five. Then we stood away W. N. W. until six; and at that hour we stood W. At eight of the clock we saw the Island of la Antigua,* called by us Antego, to the Southward of us, making three round hammocks of land, and a long high hill to Northw••d. Hereupon, we stood W. S. W. for it. At noon we fond Lat. 17 D. N. the Island being then just W. from us.

We came about to th S. of the Island, and sent a Canoa on shore, for to get Tobacco, and other necessaries that we wanted; as also to ask leave of the Governour to come in∣to the Port. The Gentry of the place and common peo∣ple, were very willing and desirous to receive us. But on Wednesday, February the first, the Governour flatly deny∣ed us entry; at which all the Gentry were much greived, and shewed themselves very kind unto us. Hereupon we agreed among our selves,* to give away, and leave the ship unto them of our company, who had no money left them of all their purchase in this Voyage, having lost it all at play;* and then to divide our selves into two Ships, which were now bound for England. Thus I my self, and thirteen more of our company, went on board Captain Robert Porteen his ship, called the Lisbon Merchant, and set sail from la Antigua on February the eleventh, and lan∣ded at Dartmouth in England, March the 26th, Anno 1682.

FINIS.
Page  [unnumbered]Page  [unnumbered]Page  [unnumbered]

THE TABLE To the Second Volum OF THE BUCANIERS

    A.
  • ALbicores, a sort of fish so called by the Spaniards, 47, 203. An huge one taken, 204. Another taken of one hundred and thirty five pound weight, ibid.
  • Alexander (John) one of the Bucaniers, and a Scotchman, drowned at the Gulf of Nicoya, 145
  • Captain Alleston, a Commmander among the Bucaniers: his Forces, p. 2. He is left to guard the ships, 4
  • Captain Alonso, a Spanish Officer, killed by the Bucaniers, 164
  • Ahorcados, two rocks so called, nigh the Island of Solango, 167
  • Anchova's, huge shoals of them, 103
  • Captain Andraeas, a chief Commander among the Indians: he conducteth the Bucaniers to the Golden Island, 3. He embarketh with them for Santa Maria, 8. He returneth home with the King of Darien from Panama, 35
  • Captain Antonio, a man of great parts, and a chief Comman∣der among the Indians of Darien, 5. He joyneth the Bu∣caniers, and perswadeth them to undertake the Journey of Santa Maria, ibid. He returneth home from before Pa∣nama. 35
  • Page  [unnumbered]Antigua, alias Antego, one of the Caribe Islands, 212. Its Governour denieth entry to the Bucaniers, ibid.
  • Argandona (Don Tomas) Commander of a Spanish Vessel, taken before Guayaquil, 81. He is set at liberty, 109
  • Arequipa, an English Gentleman inhabitant thereof, and mar∣ried there, fought the Bucaniers at Hilo, 143
  • Arica, designed upon by the Bucaniers, 53. Being arrived there, they dare not to land, 93. is designed upon the se∣cond time, 126. its Governour is Proprietor of Yqueque, 129. The Town assaulted and taken, but the Fort stan∣deth out, 130, &c. A description of its Coast, and scitu∣ation, 136. Some account of the place, 135
  • Alligators, their bigness and nature, 43
  • Armadilla of Panama destroyed by the Bucaniers, 27. De∣scription of that bloudy fight, ibid. &c. Three Armadil∣la-barks sent to keep the mouth of the River of Santa Ma∣ria, for fear of the Bucaniers. 145
  • Captain Assientos his brother killed by the Bucaniers, 164
    B.
  • Don Baltazar, a Gentleman of Quality, taken in a Vessel be∣fore Guayaquil, 82. He is set at liberty, 109
  • Barahona (Don Jacinto) Admiral of the Armadilla of Pana∣ma, 28. He is killed in the engagement, 30
  • Barbadas Island descryed by the Bucaniers, being the first land they saw, 209
  • Barbacoa, a part of the Continent of America, in the South Sea, 49
  • Barcos de la Armadilla, 27. Two of them taken by the Bu∣caniers, ibid. &c.
  • Barco de aviso, or a Packet-boat, taken by the Bucaniers, 161
  • Bark-logs, 70. Their use, 78
  • Beafero, or rather Viviero, a Negr-boy, whose leg was cut off at Sea, dyeth, 199
  • Boca del Toro, the place of the general rendezvous of the Bucaniers, 1
  • Page  [unnumbered]Bonitos, a sort of fish so called, 47. many caught, 141, 142 seen, 203.
  • Booby, a bird so called seen at Sea, being a token of land nigh at hand, 208
  • Captain Bournano, a French Commander; his forces; his attempts on a place called Chepo: he tampereth with the Indians of Darien, 2. He leaveth the Bucaniers, and why, 3
  • Bucaniers, they land on Darien, being in all three hundred and thirty one men: their march towards Santa Maria, 4. Their Arms and provisions, ibid. Four of their number tire, and return to the ships, 5. Difficulties of this march, ibid. &c. They are jealous of the Indians, yet without cause, 9. They take the Town and Fort of Santa Maria, 10. They find little purchase there, the Gold being conveyed away, ibid. They resolve to go for Panama, 12. Are deserted by the Indians, excepting the chief Commanders of them. Are encouraged by a Spaniard, who promiseth to guide them safely, ibid. They take two Barks by the way, 24. Item, several prisoners (whom they kill in cold blood) as also a Peragua at Chepillo, 25, 26. They engage the Ar∣madilla of Panama, and destroy it by a fierce and bloody fight, 27, &c. They block up Panama by Sea, and take several Vessels before the Town, 31. They go to the Isle of Tavoga, where they take other prizes, 36. Thence to Otoque, and Cayboa, 38, 39. They are repulsed from Puebla Nueba, 41. They take here one Vessel, and destroy two more, 42. Are deserted by many of their company, 43. They careen at Gorgona, and alter their Vessel, 49, &c. They lose a ship of their company, and find her again, 55, 62. They design to plunder Arica, 54. Eight of their com∣pany lost at the Isle of Gallo, 75. They take a prize off of Guayaquil, 72. Their cruelty towards a Spanish Fryer, 75. They arrive at Arica, but dare not land▪ 92. Hence they bare away for Hilo: take the place: plunder and de∣stroy a Sugar-work: are cheated by the Spaniards; and at last forced to retire with little or no pillage, &c. They Page  [unnumbered] arrive at Coquimbo: take the City of la Serena; plun∣der it, and are forced again to retire without any conside∣rable purchase, 104, &c. Multitudes of dangers they were in at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116, &c. They mutiny among themselves, and choose a new Commander, 120. They out-brave three Spanish men of war, and give them the go-by, 122. Their cruelty towards an old man at Yqueque, 128. They attempt Arica the second time, 126. Are beaten out of the Town, yet make a bold re∣treat, 132, &c. They resolve to go home over-land, 137. They land at Guasco, 139. They surprize Hilo the second time, 142. They mutiny again among themselves, 140. They go to the Gulf of Nicoya, where they take down the decks of their ship, and hereby mend its sayling, 140, &c. Forty seven of their Companions leave them, and go home over-land, 141. They take some prisoners and two Barks at the Gulf of Nicoya, 144. They careen at Golfo Dulce and resolve to go and cruize under the Aequinoctial, 150, 156. They take there several prizes, 158, &c. especi∣ally one very rich, 162. They are in danger of being mas∣sacred by their own slaves, 165. They attempt the sur∣prizal of Paita, but in vain, 168, &c. They stand away for the Streights of Magallanes, 170. They arrive at a place incognito, which they call the Duke of Yorks Islands, and are in great danger of being lost at their arrival, 178. They run many other dangers in the said place by stress of weather, ibid. &c. Some of them resolve to shoot Captain Sharp on Christmas-day, 198. They arrive at Barbadas, but dare not put in there for fear of the Rich∣mond-Frigat, 209. They bare away for Antego, and arrive at the said Island, 212. They give away their ship to the poorest of their company, and disperse for several places, 212. Some of them arrive in England, ibid.
  • Mr. Bull, one of the Bucaniers, killed, 25
  • Mr. Bullock, one of the Bucaniers, and a Surgeon, made pri∣soner at Arica, and detained there by the Spaniards, 163
Page  [unnumbered]
    C.
  • Cabbage-trees, 122
  • Cacao-nut, whereof Chocolate is made, the best sort, 71. Cacao-trees in great plenty at the Isle of Cano, 142
  • Caldero, a Port of this name in the Gulf of Nicoya, 143
  • Calms, very great, and where, 68
  • Camarones, a river of this name nigh Yqueque, 130
  • Cammock (William), one of the Bucaniers, dyeth 113
  • Cannis, a Dutchman, Interpreter to the Bucaniers, 95. He runneth away to the Enemy, 147
  • Canoas, none about Guayaquil, 70
  • Cano, an Island of this name: its latitude and appearance at Sea, 143. Some account thereof, 142
  • Cape of San Francisco, 58, 160
  • Cape Passao, 51, 161, 164
  • Cape St. Lawrence, 61
  • Cape Blanco, 77, 149. New Cape Blanco, a place so cal∣led, 147
  • Carabaxal (Don Diego) one of the Commanders of the Spa∣nish Armadilla, 28. He escapeth from the fight, 29
  • Carpenters (Spanish) do the Bucaniers good service at the Gulf of Nicoya, and are rewarded by them, 146
  • Cavallo, a place so called in the Gulf of Nicoya. 145
  • Cayboa, an Island famous for the fishery of Pearl, 39. its scituation, ibid. Some account thereof, 43
  • Chandy, or Chanduy, a Point so called, 71, 167
  • Chappel (James) one of the Bucaniers, with whom the Au∣thor fought a Duel, at the Isle of Plate, 165
  • Santa Clara, a place so named, where a rich Vessel was cast away, 167
  • Chepillo, an Island nigh Panama, where the Bucaniers meet, 25. They take there several prisoners, and a Peragua, 25, 26
  • Chira, an Island of this name, in the Gulf of Nicoya, 144, 146
  • Chocolate, much used by the Bucaniers, 100
  • Christmas-day solemnized by the Bucaniers, 116, 202
  • Page  [unnumbered]Don Christoval, a person of Quality, taken before Guaya∣quil, 82. He is set at liberty, 109
  • Comet, one seen and observed, with what followed, 101
  • Coasts very deep, 55
  • Colan, a Town of this name, its description, 170, 171
  • Cold, in extremity, whereabouts the Bucaniers experimented it. 193
  • Cockles as large as two fists, 146. like unto those in Eng∣land, 192
  • Captain Cook, a Commander among the Bucaniers: his For∣ces, 2. What party he led at their first landing, 4. He is put into a Vessel taken at Puebla Nueba; but soon quit∣teth that Command, 44. is put into irons, and where∣fore, 121
  • Cook (William) servant unto Captain Cook, dieth, 137. He accuseth his Master of several Crimes, ibid.
  • Copper-furnaces and Mines, 138
  • Coquimbo-Bay, 103. its description and topography, 111
  • Coves, or Cuevas, what they are, 2
  • Cox (Captain John) one of the Bucaniers, is put into a Ves∣sel taken at Puebla Nueba, 44. His Vessel is sunk by order, 76. He is sent to parly with the Enemy at Hilo, 95
  • Cox's River, 188
  • Captain Coxon setteth forth towards Darien, 1. His forces, 2. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He is cho∣sen to be chief Commander of the Bucaniers, 12. He en∣gageth a Spanish Bark, but misseth of his design, 25. is branded with cowardize, 35. He mutineth, and retur∣neth home, with many more over-land, ibid.
    D.
  • Darien, a Province of America, whose Indian King meeteth the Bucaniers: his habit and attire: as also the of Queen, 6▪ 7. The women free, airy, and brisk, ibid. The Indians of this Country can tell no farther than twenty, 8. They wage al∣most continual Wars against the Spaniards, 2. Wherea∣bouts is the place of their general rendezvous in the said Page  [unnumbered] Wars, 9. The Kings Daughter redeemed by the English at Santa Maria, 12. Cruelty of the Indians against the Spa∣niards, ibid. They desert the Bucaniers, ibid. Are forced to a Peace with the Spaniards by a Stratagem contrived in the Name of the English, 153
  • Drake (Sir Francis) some memoires of him, 63. He di∣vided the Plate by whole bowls unto his Company, and threw much over-board, idid. He built a Church at the River Loa in the South Sea, 142
  • Desseada, one of the Caribe-Islands, 211
  • Dog, one sold by the Bucaniers at the mast for forty pieces of eight, 210
  • Dolphins caught, 141. Seen at Sea with hopes of land, 200, 203
  • Duke of Yorks Islands, so called by the Bucaniers: an ac∣count of them as far as they were searched, 178. &c. Their draught 186
    E.
  • Earthquake, which hapned at the City of la Serena, while the Bucaniers were there, 108
  • Eclipse of the Sun observed, 84. What followed, ibid.
  • Embargo laid on all Spanish Vessels in the South Sea, for fear of the Bucaniers, 76. it is taken off, 129
  • Enchanted Island, 205
  • English Gulf, a place so named by the Bucaniers, its draught, 188
    F.
  • Farol, or Farollon, de Glantanos, an Island so called nigh Panama, 24. The Bucaniers arrive there, and seize the watchman of the Isle, ibid.
  • Fowls very great seen at Sea, and where, 102. seen again, 114. A strange Sea-fowl like an Eagle, 180
  • Francisco, a Negro, attempteth to make his escape, 154. He is detained prisoner for this attempt, 159
  • Francisco, an Indian, attempteth the same, ibid.
  • Francisco, a Biscayner, and a Pilot of the South Sea, 163
Page  [unnumbered]
    G.
  • Galapagos, an Island of the South Sea, where the Bucaniers designed to careen, 48. Great currents and calms there∣abouts, 64
  • Gallo, an Island nigh Gorgona, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 56
  • Grampusses, 53, 61, 199
  • Guayaquil, designed upon by Sawkins; also by Captain Sharp, 45. They change this resolution, 53. An account of the said place, 71
  • Goat-key, a place so called, 74
  • Goats in huge quantity at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116
  • Gold, whereabouts gathered in great quantity, 11, 50, 53, 127
  • Golden Island, whereabouts scituated: the Bucaniers meet at the said place, 4
  • Golfo Dulce, a draught thereof, 155. it is named King Charles his Harbour, by Captain Sharp, 154
  • Gorgona Island, its latitude, scituation, appearance at Sea, and description, 50, 51, &c. its continual rains, 49
  • Gorgonilla, another Island, 56
  • Gulf of San Miguel, 4, 15, 16. its smoothness of water, 18
  • Gulf of Ballona, 14. its description, 20. How it lieth in re∣lation to the Bay of Panama, 40
  • Gulf of Nicoya, its description, 148. The Bucaniers arrive there, and search it, 143. They take there some prisoners and two barks, 144
  • Gulf of the English, or English Gulf, its draught and descripti∣on, 188
  • Guadalupe, one of the Caribe-Islands, its appearance at Sea, 211
  • Guasco its Point, 138. An account of this place, 139. De∣scription of its Port, 144
  • Guyones, a Cape so named, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 150
    H.
  • Captain Harris, a chief Commander among the Bucaniers, 2. What party he led at their first landing upon Darien, 4.Page  [unnumbered] He taketh a Spanish Bark, 25. is killed in the engagement before Panama, 32
  • Hilo, its Port and Point, 94, 91, 92. The Town taken, 94. The Sugar-work burnt, 97. The inhabitants force the Bu∣caniers to retreat, ibid. What they got there, 98. The place surprized and taken again, 142
  • Hernando, a Negro of this name, runneth away from the Bu∣caniers, 154
  • Houses of Darien, how they are built, even neater than those at Jamaica, 6
    I.
  • Juan Fernandez, an Island of this name, its appearance at Sea, description, and some account thereof, 115, &c. A particular observation made there by the Author and o∣thers, ibid,
  • Juan Diaz, a River so called nigh Arica, 136
  • Captain Juan, a Spanish Commander, promiseth to conduct the Bucaniers to Guayaquil, 45. He is set at liberty, 109
  • Joseph Gabriel, a Spaniard, dieth, 53. He promiseth to de∣liver Panama into the hands of the Bucaniers, ibid.
  • Islands of Ice, 192
  • Island enchanted, 205
    K.
  • King of Darien goeth with the Bucaniers to take Panama, 13. He promiseth 50000 men to assist the English, ibid. He returneth home from Panama, 35
  • King Golden-cap, Son unto the King of Darien, 13. He go∣eth with the Bucaniers on the expedition of Panama, ibid. He remaineth behind after his Father was returned home, 35
  • King Charle's his Harbour 154
  • King Charles the first of England assisted by the Merchants of Lima, 63
    L.
  • Land of San Tiago, 57
  • Land of San Matteo, 57
  • Land-fowls, 88. seen at Sea, yet no land, 193, 194
  • Page  [unnumbered]Land seen, but not found, about the Latitude of 57, D. South, 191
  • Leaves of a certain nature, eaten by the Inhabitants of Yque∣que, 128
  • Lapina, the Embarcadero of Guayaquil, 71
  • Lima, its Merchants send a ship laden with Plate unto the King of England, 63. its Table used by the Author, 101. Whereabouts the ship was lost, 167
  • Limpets in strange quantities at the Duke of Yorks Islands, 180, &c. Limpet point, 188
  • Loa, a River so called, 142. The Bucaniers could not find it, ibid. A Church built there by Sir Francis Drake, ibid.
  • Lobos, an Island so called, or the Isle of Seals, 140, 169
  • Lopez (Don Diego) Commander of el Santo Rosario, being a rich prize taken under the Aequinoctial, 163. is killed in the fight, ibid.
  • Santa Lucia, an Isle of this name, being one of the Western I∣slands, 210
  • Lyons adore the Cross at Tumbez, 76
  • Lyon of the Sea, or a Sea-Lyon, its description, and where seen by the Author, 110
    M.
  • Captain Mackett, a Commander among the Bucaniers; his forces, 2. He is left to guard the ships, 4
  • Magallan-Clouds, very famous among the Bucaniers, 85
  • Man-of-war-fowl, a Sea-fowl so called in the West-India's 207
  • Manta, a Port and Town so called, 60, 61, 165
  • Manzanilla-tree, the effects of the drops falling from off the leaves, 44. One of the Bucaniers poysoned therewith, 206
  • Santa Maria, a Town so called, with a Garrison: is designed upon by the Bucaniers: its scituation, 4. is taken and burnt, 10, 14
  • Santa Martha, a Spanish Town taken by Captain Sawkins, 38. The Bishop thereof made Bishop of Panama.
  • Marigalanta, one of the Caribe-Islands, 211
  • Martinica-Island, another of the Western Isles. ibid.
  • Page  [unnumbered]San Matteo its Bay, 158. Land of San Matteo, 57
  • Mero, a Point of land of this name, 168
  • Mexillones, a Bay so called, 142
  • Mines of Silver very rich. 127
  • San Miguel, the Gulf. ibid.
  • Miscelaw, how it is prepared, 7, 8
  • Monte de Christo, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 61
  • Montgomery (Robert) one of the Bucaniers, dieth, 82
  • Monserrate, one of the Caribe-Islands, its appearance at Sea, 211
  • Mora de Sama, 91, 92
  • Moro de Horse, its appearance at Sea, 141
  • Morro Moreno, its appearance at Sea, ibid.
  • Mulato-boy, one given by the Bucaniers unto Captain Sharp for to wait on him, 210
  • Mules flesh eaten by the Bucaniers at Hilo, 99
  • Mussels in great quantities found at the Duke of Torks Islands, 180. Huge ones, 183. Those Indians open them more rea∣dily with their fingers, than we with knives, ibid.
  • Mussel Point, 188
    N.
  • Negro's, two of them make their escape, 154. More at∣tempt it, but are taken, ibid.
  • Negro, a Shoomaker to the Bucaniers, set at liberty for his good service, 210
  • Needle, its variation observed by the Author, at several places and times. 189, 192, 194, 198, 200, 203, 206
  • Nicoya, the Gulf.
  • Night, whereabouts the Bucaniers found none, 192
  • Noddy, a bird of this name seen at Sea, with hopes of seeing land, 209
    O.
  • Observation made by the Author, concerning the Navigation about the latitude of 52 D. S. where the Needle varieth very much, 194
  • Orson, a name so given to an Indian boy taken in the English Gulf, 185
  • Page  [unnumbered]Oisters very large and great at Cayboa, 44
  • Otoque, an Island of the Bay of Panama, 38, 40
    P.
  • Paita, 77, 78. The Bucaniers design upon the said place, 168. Description of its Bay and scituation, 191
  • Panama taken by Sir Henry Morgan, 1. Designed upon a∣new, 3. The Bucaniers arrive there, and block it up by Sea, 27, &c. Description of the present state thereof, 33. It hath been burnt three times within this few years, ibid. its Bay described, 40
  • Pardela, a bird of this name, 117
  • Paxaros, an Island so called; its appearance at Sea, 112
  • Paxaros Ninos, a Sea-fowl so called by the Spaniards; its description, 190, 195
  • Plate Island, or Isle of Plate, 55, 62, 140, 165, 167
  • San Pedro, a Ship of this name, twice taken by the Bucaniers in the space of fourteen months, 158
  • Pena Horadada, a high and steep rock of this name near Paita, 169
  • Penguin, a Sea-fowl so called, 181. Some account of them, 183
  • Penguin-shoal, 188
  • President of Panama, sendeth a message to the Bucaniers, 38. Their answer, ibid.
  • Peter, an Indian boy, runneth away from the Bucaniers, 146
  • Peralta (Don Francisco) a valiant Spanish Commander, 28. His undaunted Courage in the engagement before Pana∣ma, 30. He highly commendeth the valour of the English, 32. He disswadeth the Bucaniers from attempting the ships at Perico, 31. He giveth an account of the present state of Panama, 33. is removed from the Admiral, on board the ship of Mr. Cox, 45. He directeth the Bucaniers to the Island of Gorgona, 49. He admireth the sailings of the English, 64. is taken frantick, but recovereth, 103. He is set at liberty. 109
  • Perico, an Island before Panama, where the Bucaniers take veral Vessels, 27, &c.
  • Page  [unnumbered]Philippinas Islands, how the Spaniards sail unto them, 47
  • Pilots of the Spanish Nation, their ignorance, 63
  • Piura, an in-land City, unto which Paita serveth as a Port or Embarcadero, 169
  • Point St. Helen, 69, 167
  • Point Chandy, or Chanduy, 71, 167
  • Point Parina, 77, 78
  • Point of Mangroves, 57. its draught and description, 65
  • Punta de Mero, 168
  • Punta de Hilo, 89, 90
  • Punta Borrica, its latitude and appearance, 151
  • Punta Mula, a Point so called in Golfo Dulce, 151, 155
  • Punta de San Lorenzo, 17. Vnder it is a great ripling, 21
  • Puebla Nueba, a Town on the Continent, where Captain Saw∣kins was killed, 41
  • Puerto Velo taken the second time, 1
  • Porpus, a white one seen, 147. Young Porpusses, 196, 199. They hinder the fishing of the Bucaniers, 208
  • Prisoners released by the Bucaniers, 81. Others detained, ibid. 109
    Q.
  • Quicara, its latitude and appearance at Sea, 46
  • Quito, a great City, unto which Guayaquil serveth for an Embarcadero, 71
    R.
  • Rains very continual, and almost incessant, at Gorgona, 49
  • Reflection of the white sand very great at Hilo, 99
  • Richmond-Frigat hindreth the Bucaniers from landing at the Isle of Barbadas, 209
  • Mr. Ringrose the Author embarketh on the River of Santa Maria, 8. His misfortune going to Panama, 14, &c. He is cast away, 17. He saveth the lives of six Spaniards, 19. is made prisoner by the same, but released for his gene∣rosity, 21, 22. He overtaketh the rest of the fleet, 23. He putteth to flight one of the Vessels of the Armadila, 29. He resolveth to stay, and not go home over-land with the Page  [unnumbered] desertors, 43. He repenteth of this resolution, and where∣fore, 49. He maketh Quadrants at Sea, 68, 176. He is sent down with a party of men from the City of la Se••a to the Bay of Coquimbo, 60. and returneth, 108. is sent with a flag of truce to the enemy at Hilo, 95. His advice is not followed, to the prejudice of that enterprize, 96. is in great danger of being cast away in the Isle of Juan Fer∣nandez, 117. is strucken blind by a strange accident, but recovereth again, 153. He fighteth a Duel at the Isle of Plate, 165. He arriveth in England, 212
  • Rio de Juan Diaz, a River of this name, 92
  • Rockweed seen at Sea, yet no land, 195
  • Rosario, or el Santo Rosario, the name of a great Prize taken under the Aequinoctial, 163, 164
  • Captain Row, a Commander among the Bucaniers; his for∣ces, 2. He leaveth the Bucaniers, and why, 3
    S.
  • Salvador, an Indian slave dieth, 146
  • San Tiago, a River of this name, 159
  • San Tiago, a slave so named, shot in the water by Captain Sharp, for plotting the destruction of the Bucaniers, 165
  • Captain Sawkins setteth forth towards Darien, 1. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He leadeth the for∣lorn with fourscore men, 7. He goeth to pursue them that fled from Santa Maria, 12. He behaveth himself very couragiously in the engagement before Panama, 29. is three times beaten off from the ship of, Captain Peralta, 30. yet at last taketh him, ibid. He is chosen in chief, 36. He took the Town of Santa Martha some years ago, 38. is complemented by the Bishop of Panama, ibid. He is kil∣led before Puebla Nueba, 41
  • Captain Sharp setteth forth towards Darien; with what de∣sign and forces, 1. What party he led at the first landing, 4. He was then very faint and weak, ibid. He was absent at the engagement before Panama, 36. He taketh in his absence a Spanish bark, ibid. Is chosen in chief at Cayboa, 42. He taketh there three several Vessels, ibid. He de∣signeth Page  [unnumbered] upon Guayaquil, 45. but changeth resolution, 53. He striketh Tortoises very dexterously, 66. He is remo∣ved from his Command, Watling being chosen in his place, 120. His prophecy at Yqueque, seeing the cruelty of the Bucaniers, 128. He is chosen in chief again, 133. He maketh a bold retreat from Arica to the ship, 133. He shooteth in the water one of the slaves, who had plotted the destruction of the Bucaniers, 165. He striketh two Paxa∣ros Ninos, 191. He discovereth and preventeth a Plot against his life, 198. He buyeth a dog for forty pieces of eight, with intention to eat him, 211. Is presented with a Mulato-boy from the rest of the Company, 210
  • Slaves of the Bucaniers, they plot to massacre them at the Isle of Plate, 165
  • Snakes of huge bigness, 53. Water-Snakes, 61
  • Strawberries very large at la Serena, 105
  • Seals, 87. Huge quantities at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 116. Isle of Seals, 140
  • Sea-grass, 88
  • la Serena, a City so called, taken by the Bucaniers, 104. its description, 105, &c. The Town fired, 109
  • Shergal (Henry) one of the Bucaniers, drowned, 178
  • Shergal's River, 188
  • Stephens (William) one of the Bucaniers, dyeth, 206
  • Silvestre, a Negro of this name, runneth away from the Bu∣caniers, 154
  • Silla de Paira, 78, 169
  • Captain Springer, one of the Bucaniers, 29. He putteth to flight one of the Vessels of the A. midilla, ibid.
  • Solango, an Isle of this name its lat, and appearance, 69, 167
  • Sloath, an animal so called, taken, 53
  • South-Sea, an observation made therein, 82
  • Snowy hills and mountains, 188
  • Sundays ordered to be kept among the Bucaniers, 121
  • Scurvy much troubleth the Bucaniers, 99
    T.
  • Tavaga, a little Island before Panama, where the Buca∣niersPage  [unnumbered] lay several days, and took several prizes, 36, &c.
  • Trinidad (La Santissima) or the Blessed Trinity, a ship so cal∣led taken before Panama, 32. He choseth her for his chief Vessel, 44. They take down her Round-house, 54. And her decks, 140, &c. In this Vessel the Bucaniers came home, 212. They give her away to the poorest of the Company, ibid.
  • Tocamora, a great and rich place, designed upon by the Buca∣niers, 2. They quit this design for another, 3
  • Tornados, 156, 195, 196, 209
  • Tortoises, the pleasantest meat in the world, 2. Great quanti∣ties of them, and where, 66, 141
  • Tropick-birds so called, 208
  • Tucames, a Port of this name; its appearance at Sea, 158
  • Tumbes, the first place setled in the South Seas after Pana∣ma, 76
  • Thunder and lightning, very great at Cayboa, 45
  • Truxillo, a rich Vessel of this place taken before Panama, 37
    V.
  • Vanero, a place so called in the Gulf of Nicoya, 147
  • Variation of the Needle. See Needle.
  • Velas, a Port so called, its appearance at Sea, 150
  • Vice-Roy of Lima presseth ships, and armeth them against the Bucaniers, 73. Another new Vice-Roy dareth not ad∣venture up to Lima from Panama, in a ship of twenty five guns, for fear of the Bucaniers, 160. He resolveth to go under the conduct of three sail of ships, 161. He behead∣eth Admiral Ponce for not destroying the Bucaniers at Gorgona. 167
  • Water-key, an Island so called, 2
  • Water snakes, 61, 87
  • Captain Watling chosen to command in chief, 120. He was an old Privateer, ibid. He putteth Captain Cook in irons, 121. He ordereth Sundays to be kept, ibid. is daunted at the sight of three Spanish men of war, 123. His cruelty at Yqueque, 128. He is slain at Arica, 132
  • Page  [unnumbered]Whales, 53. a sign of land, 88, 192, 199
  • William, a Mosquito-Indian left behind at the Isle of Juan Fernandez, 122. He is found there, and taken prisoner by the Spaniards, 159
  • Winds very inconstant in some parts of the South-Sea, 47
  • Old Wives, a sort of fish so called, 47
  • Woman, one very beautiful taken in the Rosario, 163
    Y.
  • Yqueque, an Island of this name: some account thereof, 127 &c. Customs of the inhabitants, ibid.
    Z.
  • Zamblas, certain Islands so called: whereabouts they lie: habit of the Indians of those Isles: their women fairer than the fairest of Europe: these can see in the dark better than in the light, 2, 3. The natives disswade the Bucaniers from the design of Tocamora, 3. Great rains falling there, hinder ten sail of Privateers from landing, and going to the South Sea, 164
FINIS.
Page  [unnumbered]

A Catalogue of BOOKS printed and sold by William Crooke Bookseller, at the Sign of the Green Dragon without Temple-bar, nigh the Passage into the Temple by Devereux-Court, 1685.

    DIVINITY.
  • 1. BRevis Demonstratio, being the Truth of the Christian Religi∣on, proved by Reason, 12o. price Bound 10 d.
  • 2. The Primitive Institution, shewing the antiquity and usefulness of Catechising, together with his suitableness to heal the distempers of the Church. By L. Addison, D. D. and Dean of Litchfield. Price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 3. A Sermon preacht at the Funeral of a sober religious man, found drown'd in a Pit. In 8o. price Bound 1 s.
  • 4. Mr. Howel's Visitation-Sermon before the Bishop of Chichester, 4o. price 6 d.
  • 5. Dr. Hascard's two Sermons, the one on the Fifth of Novem∣ber, the other before the Lord Mayor of London, both in 4o.
  • 6. Mr. Manningham's two Sermons, one before the Lord Mayor, the other at St. Maries in Oxford. In 4o.
  • 7. A Sermon preached at the Savoy-Church in French, and since printed in French and English, 12o. price bound 8 d.
  • 8. A Modest Plea for the Clergy, wherein is considered the reasons why the Clergy are so contemned and neglected. By L. A. D. D. and Dean of Litchfield. Price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 9. Hugo Grotius his Catechism, Greek, Latin, and English, with a Praxis of all the Greek words therein contained. In 8o. price bound 2 s.
  • 10. The Spirit of Prophecy, proving that Christ and his Apostles were Prophets: written by the directions of, and recommended to the Press, by the late Peter Gunning, then Lord Bishop of Ely. In 8o. price 3 s.
  • 11. The King-killing Doctrine of the Jesuites, in a sincere discourse to the French King: written by a Roman Catholick. In 4o. price 〈◊〉.
  • Page  [unnumbered]12. Justifing Faith; or the Faith by which the Just do live, together with the excellency of the Common-Prayer-Book. In 8o. price bound 1 s.
  • 13. Mercy Triumphant, or the Kingdom of Christ enlarged be∣yond the narrow bounds which have been wont to be set to it. By Ed. Lane, M. A. and Rector of Sparshalt.
  • 14. Du Moulin's Reflections reverberated, being a full answer to the damning Doctrine of Dr. Lewis du Moulin: also, a Confutation of Edmond Hickeringill against the Ecclesiastical Courts. By E. Lane, &c. In 4o. 1 s. 6 d.
  • 15. A Discourse about Conscience, relating to the present Dif∣ferences among us, in opposition to both extremes of Popery and Fanaticism. In 4o. price 6 d.
  • 16. A Thanksgiving-Sermon for the Discovery of the late Fa∣natick Plot Septemb. 9. 1683. By John Harison, D. D. Rector of Pulborrow, 4o.
  • 17. An Introduction to the Sacrament: or, a short, plain, and safe way to the Communion-Table, being an Instruction for the worthy receiving the Lords Supper; Collected for, and familiarly addressed to every particular Communicant. By L. Addison, D. D. Dean of Litchfield.
  • 18. The Protestant Religion the safe way to Salvation: or, an Answer to a Book entituled, Mercy and Truth, or Charity maintained, by Catholicks which pretend to prove the contrary; together with the Apostolical Institution of Episcopacy; as also nine Sermons on special occasions. By William Chillingworth, M. A. of Oxford, the fifth Edition; to which is now added Mr. Chillingworths Reasons against Popery, to perswade Mr. L. to return to the Church of Eng∣land. In fol. price 14 s.
  • 19. The Case of Resistance of Supreme Powers stated and re∣solved. By W. Sherlock, D. D.
  • 20. A Continuation and Vindication of the Defence of Dr. Stil∣lingfleet's Unreasonableness of Separation, in Answer to Mr. Baxter and Mr. Lobb, &c. with an Examination of Mr. Humphreys materials for Union. By W. Sherlork, D. D.
  • 21. Primitive Christianity: or, the Religion of the Antient Christians in the first Ages of the Gospel. By W. Cave, D. D.
  • 22. The History of the Charter-house, (being once a Carthusian Order) setting out the Gift of Mr. Sutton in making it so famous an Hospital, with all the Laws and Institutions of it, &c. written by Mr. Heiron of the said Foundation. In 8o.
  • 23. Dr. Barrows two Sermons; the one at the Spittle in Easter, the other a Passion-Sermon. In 8o.
  • Page  [unnumbered]24. The Souls Communion with her Saviour: or, the History of our Lord Jesus Christ, written by the four Evangelists: digested into Devotional Meditations; 12o. price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 25. Responso Valedictoria ad secundum Sandii Epistolam, &c. Per Sam. Gardiner, S. T. D. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 26. A Demonstration of the Divine Authority of the Law of Nature, and of the Christian Religion, in two parts, by Sam. Par∣ker, D. D. in 4o.
  • 27. The Practise of Christianity, in two parts. By Dr. Sherlock. In 8o. price 5 s.
  • 28. A Collection of private Devotions in the practice of the ancient Church, called the hours of Prayer; taken out of the Scri∣ptures, Fathers, &c. By Doctor Cozens late Bishop of Durham, 12o. price 2 s.
  • 29. Robinson's Annalium Mundi Universalium. Folio. With other sorts of Divinity Books.
    LAW.
  • THe Jurisdiction of the Authority of Court-Leets, Court-Ba∣rons, Court-Marshalsea, &c. together with the most necessary learning of Tenures, and all their Incidents of Essoyns, &c. with the Return and Forms of several Original and Judicial Writs, now in use, relating to Writs of Errour, Writs of false Judgment, and other Proceedings of frequent use in the Courts of Westminster, by I. Kitchin of Grays-Inn Esq To which is added Brevia selecta, be∣ing a choice Collection of special Writs; the Fifth Edition, in 8o. price 7 s.
  • 2. Praxis Curiae Admiralitatis Angliae, Author F. Clarke. In 12o.
  • 3. The Reports of Sir Henry Hobart, Chief Justice of the Com∣mon-Pleas, folio, price 10 s.
  • 4. The second Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, con∣taining the Exposition of the Statutes. By Sir Edw. Coke, folio, price 15 s.
  • 5. The third Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, concer∣ning the Pleas of the Crown. By Sir Edw. Coke, folio, price 6 s.
  • 6. The fourth Part of the Institutes of the Laws of England, con∣cerning the Jurisdiction of Courts. By Sir Edw. Coke, in folio, price 10 s.
  • 7. The Law of charitable Vses revised, and much enlarged, with many Cases in Law, both ancient and modern; with the Readings of Sir Francis Moor upon the Statute of the 43 of Eliz. digested by G. Duke Esq folio.
  • Page  [unnumbered]8. Officina Brevium, select and approved Forms of Judicial Writs, and other Process, with their Returns and Entries in the Court of Common-Pleas; as also special pleadings to Writs, fol.
  • 9. Young Clerks Guide, in four parts, or an exact Collection of their English Presidents, 8o.
  • 10. Reports of divers Cases in Law, taken by R. Brownlow and J. Goldsbrough Esquires, both Prothonotaries; with directions how to proceed in any intricate Actions, both real and personal, with an exact Table; the third Edition, in 4o.
  • 11. The Touchstone of Presidents, relating to Judicial proceedings at Common Law, in 8o.
  • 12. Actions on the Case for Deeds, viz. Contracts, Assumpsits, Deceipts, Nusances, Trover, and Conversion, &c. with two Tables, by W. Sheppard Esq 8o.
  • 13. A Dialogue betwixt a Student and a Philosopher, about the Common Law of England, by Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury. In 8o.
  • 14. Several Statutes of Bankrupt, with the Judges Resolution thereon. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 15. Les Reports des tres Honorable, Edw. Seigneur Littleton Ba∣ron de Mounslow, Custos de la Grand Seale d' Angleterre, & de ses Majestie pluis Honorable Privy Council, en le Courts del Common Bank & Exchequer, en le 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, &c. ans del Reigne de Roy Charles le I.
  • 16. The Complete Clark, containing the best Forms of all sorts of Presidents for Conveyances and Assurances, and other Instru∣ments now in use and practice; with forms of Bills, Pleadings, and Answers in Chancery, &c. whereunto now are divers Presi∣dents that were wanting; and also some Saxon Presidents, with exposition of Words used in ancient Charters, &c. with Alphabe∣tical Tables of the whole Contents of the Book. In 4o.
  • 17. The Compleat Sollicitor, entring Clerk and Attorney, fully in∣structed in the practice, methods, and Clerkship of all his Majesties Courts of Equity and Common Law, Superiour and Inferiour, as well as those at Westminster, and in the City of London, as elsewhere throughout the Kingdom of England: a Collection more correct, uniform, and universally advantageous, than any Treatise hereto∣fore extant of the same kind. In 8o.
  • 18. The Laws against Conventicles, written at the request of the Justices of Peace of Middlesex, by Order of the Council, by the late Sir Edmund Saunders Lord Chief Justice of England. In 8o. price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 19. The Reports of all the pleadings to them of the late Lord Page  [unnumbered] Chief Justice Sir Edm. Saunders are printing in folio in two Vo∣lumes.

With other useful Law-Books.

    HISTORY.
  • 1. AN Institution of general History, or the History of the World; being a compleat body thereof, in two Volumes, by W. Howel, late Chancellour of Lincoln▪ In folio.
  • 2. Historical Collections; being an account of the Proceedings of the Four last Parliaments of Queen Elizabeth, by H. Townsend, Esq in folio.
  • 3. Clelia, the whole work, in five parts; written in French, now put into English, in folio.
  • 4. Scarron's Comical Romance; being an Historical account of a company of Stage-players, full of variety of Novels, rare Adven∣tures, amorous Intreagues, &c. being both witty and pleasant. In folio.
  • 5. Popish Cruelties, being an account of the Treasons of Dr. Parry against Queen Elizabeth, with his Confession of it at his Try∣al, and his Denial at his Execution, folio, price 1 s.
  • 6. The Life of Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury, written by himself in Latin, since translated into English. In folio, price 6 d.
  • 7. An Historical Narration of Heresy, with an account of the Pu∣nishments thereof. By Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury. In folio, price 6 d.
  • 8. Megalopsichy; being a particular and exact account of the last seventeen years of Queen Elizabeths Reign, both Military and Civil; the first written by Sir W. Monson one of the said Queens Ad∣mirals; the second written by H. Townsend Esq a Member of her last Parliament. Wherein is a true and faithful Relation of all the ex∣peditious attempts, designs, successes, and errours, both of the Eng∣lish and Spanish, in the Wars from the year 1585, to the said Queens Death; with a full account of the eminent Speeches and Debates, &c. in the said time: To which is added, Dr. Parry's Tryal in the year 1584, all written at the time of the Actions, by persons that were eminently acting therein. Folio, price bound 10 s.
  • 9. A Voyage into the Levant, being a relation of a Journey lately performed from England to Grand Cairo, by Sir Henry Blunt, 12o. price 1 s.
  • 10. A description of Candia, with an exact account of the last Siege and Surrender of it to the Turks. In 8o. price 1 s.
  • Page  [unnumbered]11. A Discourse of the Dukedom of Modena, containing the O∣riginal, Antiquity, &c. of that Dukedom. In 4o. price 6 d.
  • 12. The Travels of Vlysses, how he went to Hell and came back again, &c. by Tho. Hobbs, price 1 s.
  • 13. The present state of London, containing the Antiquity, Fame, Walls, Rivers, Gates, Churches, Bridge, with the Customs and In∣franchisements. By I. Bridal Esq price 1 s.
  • 14. The Wonders of the Peak in Darbyshire, commonly called the Devils Arse of Peak. By Tho. Hobbs, 8o. price 1 s.
  • 15. The Life and Death of Mahomet, being the first estate of Mahometism, shewing all the designs that that Impostor Mahomet had to carry on and settle the Turkish Religion; written by L. Ad∣dison D. D. price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 16. The Historians Guide: or, Britain's Remembrancer; being a summary account of all the Actions, Exploits, Sieges, Battels, De∣signs, Attempts, &c. taking notice of the Year, Month, and day of the Month, all eminent Passages that have been for 80 years last past, price 1 s. A portable Book.
  • 17. The Connexion; being Collections of some principal matters in the Reign of King James, being the time that nothing of this nature is printed, being betwixt the end of Megalapsichy, or the last seventeen years of Queen Elizabeth, and the beginning of Mr. Rushworth, Heath, Nalson, Whitlock, and others, price 1 s. 6 d.
  • 18. The Moors ba•••ed; being a discourse of the Government of Tangier, under the Earl of Tiviot; shewing the subtilty and polli∣cies of both parties: written by Dr. Addison, who lived there ma∣ny years, 4o. price 6 d.
  • 19. All the Works of Homer, both Illiads and Oddyses, transla∣ted out of Greek into English, by Thomas Hobbs of Malmsbury, price s. 6 d.
  • 20. Considerations on the Loyalty, Religion, Manners, and Re∣putation of Thomas Hobbs, 8o. price bound 1 s.
  • 21. The Memoires and rare Adventures of Henrietta Sylvia Mo∣liere, a great Lady in France, now living, written by her self, in six parts in French, and now translated into English, price 4 s.
  • 22. Tho. Hobbs Angli Malmsb. Vita, being an account of Mr. Hobbs, of the Books he wrote of the times, when, and the occasion thereof; of the Books and Authors against him, of his Conversati∣on, Acquaintance, &c. part wrote by himself, the rest by Dr. B. in 8o. printed 1681.
  • 23. Behemoth, being the History of the Civil Wars of England, and the Councels and Artifices by which they were carried on, from 1640, to 1660. printed now from his own perfect Copy, in Page  [unnumbered] which is many pages more than was in the former Counterfeit E∣dition; none of which Editions before this, had less than a thou∣sand faults in them, whole Lines left out in a hundred places, which did extremely pervert the sence of the Author Tho. Hobbs.
  • 24. The Tracts of Mr. Tho. Hobbs of Malmsbury, in two Volumes in 8o. gathering nine of his Treatises together, which are also to be had single, viz. 1. His Life in Latin. 2. His Considerations on his Loyalty, Religion, &c. 3. His Art of Rhetorick, in English. 4. His Dialogue about the Common Law of England. 5. His ten Dia∣logues of Natural Philosophy. 6. His Civil Wars of England, the perfect Edition. 7. His Historical Narration of Heresy. 8. His Answer to Bishop Bramhab in defence of his Leviathan. 9. His seven Problems, with an Apology for his writings to the King, price bound 12 s.
  • 25. A New Survey of the present State of the World, newly written in French, and now translated into English, in 8o.
  • 26. Compendium Geographicum: or, a more exact, plain, and easie Introduction into all Geography than yet extant, after the latest Discoveries and new Alteration; very useful, especially for young Noblemen and Gentlemen; the like not printed in English. By P. Chamberlayne of the Inner-Temple, Gent. the second Edition with Additions, 12o. price bound 1 s.
  • 27. Bucaniers of America: or, a true Account of the most re∣markable Assaults committed of late years upon the Coasts of the West-Indies, by the Bucaniers of Jamaica and Tortuga, both English and French, &c. Written in Dutch, Spanish, &c. and now put into English; the second Edition, with the Addition of Captain Cookes, and another Relation to it, in 4o.
  • 28. The present State of the Jews, wherein is contained an exact Account of their Customs, Secular and Religious; to which is an∣nexed a summary Discourse of the Misna, Talmud, and Gemara. By L. Addison D. D. Dean of Litchfield, and Archdeacon of Coven∣try, 12o. price bound 1 s. 6 d.
  • 29. French Intrigues: or, the History of their Delusory Promises since the Pyrenaean Treaty: printed in French at Cologne, and now made English, price 1 s.

With other Curious Histories, &c.

Page  [unnumbered]Page  [unnumbered]

[illustration]
A DESCRIPTION of The South Sea & Coasts of AMERICA Containing ye whole Navigation and all those places at which Capt: SHARP and his companions were in the years 1680 & 1681